0% found this document useful (1 vote)

1K views493 pages

Prinect Signa Station - Reference en

Signa station reference

Uploaded by

Resimasc González

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (1 vote)

1K views493 pages

Prinect Signa Station - Reference en

Signa station reference

Uploaded by

Resimasc González

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 493

Prinect Signa Station - Reference

Prinect Signa Station

Reference

Edition March 2010

Order No. SZ.111.1543

ABC
ABC

Imprint/Company Address Copyright 2010 Heidelberger Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Phone +49 (4 31) 3 86-0
Druckmaschinen AG. Dr.-Hell-Strasse Fax +49 (4 31) 3 86-13 80
No part of this book may be repro- D-24107 Kiel http://www.heidelberg.com/
duced without prior written per-
mission.
.............................................................................................
Acrobat, Adobe, the Acrobat logo, Heidelberg, Heidelberg GTO 46, Pantone, Inc. is the copyright
Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Type GTO 52, M-Offset, SM 52, SM 74 owner of color data and/or software
Manager, PageMaker, Photoshop and SP 72 are registered trade- which are licensed to Heidelberger
and PostScript are registered marks of Heidelberger Druckma- Druckmaschinen AG to distribute
trademarks, Extreme, OPI and schinen AG. for use only in combination with
TIFF are trademarks of Adobe Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Prinect Signa Station. PANTONE
Systems Incorporated. Windows 95, Windows 98, color data and/or software shall not
Adobe, the Clearly Adobe Imaging Windows XP, Windows NT, be copied onto another disk or into
logo, PostScript and Acrobat are Windows 2000 and memory unless as part of the execu-
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor- Windows 2003 are registered tion of Prinect Signa Station.
porated. trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- Prinect, Prinect Printready System
Apple, the Apple logo, Apple- tion. and Prinect Printready are trade-
Talk, ColorSync, EtherTalk, marks of Heidelberger Druckm-
LaserWriter, Macintosh, Finder, PANTONE colors displayed in the aschinen AG
MacroMaker, PICT and Power software application or in the user Other company names, product
Macintosh are registered documentation may not match names and trademarks not
trademarks of Apple Computer PANTONE-identified standards. expressly mentioned in this man-
Incorporated. Consult current PANTONE color ual are trademarks or registered
publications exact color. trademarks of the corresponding
EPS is a registered trademark of PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc.
Altsys Corporation. manufacturers and fall within the
trademarks are the property of Pan- regulations regarding the protec-
EtherShare is a registered trade- tone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2002 tion of trademarks.
mark of Helios Software GmbH.
.............................................................................................
Important notice!
We are dedicated to improving and The information contained in this product described in this manual,
enhancing our products. Conse- manual about performance and please contact the agency which is
quently, the information in this speed as well as technical data con- responsible for you.
manual is subject to change with- cerning application of our products Order No. SZ.111.1543
out notice. is not legally binding as it does not
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG constitute a written contract of fea- Edition March 2010
assumes no responsibility for infor- tures. Printed in Germany.
mation and description as far as If any problems occur with the
third-party products are concerned.
ABC Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Before You Start ...

About This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
What you should already know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
Further Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
Symbols and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIV
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIV
Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields . . . . . . . XXV
Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXV
Heidelberg online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXVI

1 What Is New?
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.5 . . . . . . . . 1-1
New Functions and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.0 . . . . . . . . 1-7
New Functions and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
What's New since Prinect Signa Station 3.0 . . . . . . . 1-10
New Functions and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

2 The Heidelberg User Interface

Concept of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Structure of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
The Four Basic Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Inspectors Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Folder Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Drop-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Prinect Signa Station Reference III

Table of Contents ABC

Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Option/Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tool Button (On/Off Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Multitool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Numeric Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
File Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Context-sensitive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Help! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Contents/Full Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Forwards/Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Page Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Editing the Clip Path (Work Mode: Packaging) . . . . . . . 2-23
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

3 What's What?
Terms Used in Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Master Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Folding Schemes (Schemes, Imposition Schemes) . . . . . . 3-2
Folding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Plate templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Press Sheet (= Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

IV Edition March 2010

ABC Table of Contents

Paper (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Assembly Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Bounding Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

4 Preferences / Getting Started

Preferences and Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Used Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
View Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Number of Recent Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Default User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Suppressed Message Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Default Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Select External Executables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Default Layer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Surface Names (Press Sheets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Job File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Free Text Replacer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
JDF Workflow with Prinect Prepress Manager . . . . . . . 4-12
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Bleed Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Defaults for folding sheet generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Several Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Switches for Marks Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Proof Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Default Screen Angles for RIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Prinect Signa Station Reference V

Table of Contents ABC

Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Marks Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Default for Other Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Default for Report Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Default for Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Default for Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Page and Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Attributes for Report Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Defaults for JDFConnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Resources Default for JDFs with Job Prep Data . . . . . 4-26
Default Groups for Imports (JDF / Signa 9 Template) . 4-26
JDF Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
MDS (Master Data Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
PDF Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Preview Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
PDF Preview Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Attributes for HTML Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Option Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
License Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
License Server (name or IP number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Refresh Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Basic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Login Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Your First Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Job Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

VI Edition March 2010

ABC Table of Contents

5 Job Assistant
Basics about Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Starting the Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
New Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Edit Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Working with the Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Order of the Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6 Browser Window
Browser Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Product Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Internal Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

7 Resources and Machines

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Creating Custom Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Product Part Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Papers (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Page and Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Plate layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Output Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
User data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Report Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Prinect Signa Station Reference VII

Table of Contents ABC

Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Creating Custom Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Filmsetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Platesetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Sheetfed Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Web Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

8 Graphic Window
Graphic Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Graphic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Standard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Front/Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Creating Internal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Text mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Creating an ink pickup bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Creating a cover mark and other internal marks . . . . . . 8-10
Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . 8-13
Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . 8-22
Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

VIII Edition March 2010

ABC Table of Contents

Tile Front / Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Display the Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating a Text Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating an ink pickup bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Creating a cover mark and other internal marks . . . . . . 8-28
Move Content Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Define line type for the clip path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Define cover mark from line type for glue area . . . . . . . 8-28
Clip Path Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
User-defined dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . 8-30
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Pages per Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Press Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . 8-33
Display and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
All Press Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . 8-35
Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

9 Inspectors Window
Where You Can Select Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Prinect Signa Station Reference IX

Table of Contents ABC

Details in the Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Folding Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Packaging Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Parameters of the Inspectors in
Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
When Do I Use What? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Administrative Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Job from Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Job and customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Default for JDF and job ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Job Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Default Screen Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Product Part from Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Job Details in Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Work Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Start Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Pages in Product Part / Page Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Master Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

X Edition March 2010

ABC Table of Contents

Master Page Types and Trimmed Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Page-related Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Custom Bleed and Trim Allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Segmented Folding Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Placement rule for assigned pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Binding Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Creeping and Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Gripper Collator / Cover Bonding / Glue Line . . . . . . . 9-39
Parameters for Automatic Gap Computation . . . . . . . . 9-42
Cut Block Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks . . . . . . . 9-44
Notes on Using Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Marks Colors/Scaling and Collating Values . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Other General Marks Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Load Plates and Schemes from Product Part Template 9-47
List of Selected Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Selected Plate Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Placement rule for perfecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Paper Definition for Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Subject Position on Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Page Assignment & Master Schemes (only for the
"Imposition" mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
List of Used Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Editing Schemes in the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Active Inspector Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Folding Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Folding Sheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66

Prinect Signa Station Reference XI

Table of Contents ABC

Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Assembly Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
1up Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Placement rule for assigned 1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Lenticular Printing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Management Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Sheet Optimization (only in the "Montage"
working mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Press Sheet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
Version Preallocated for Versioned Output
(Versioning Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Trimmed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Active Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Version Preallocated for Versioned Output . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92

XII Edition March 2010

ABC Table of Contents

Clip path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93

Placement rule for assigned page/1up . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Creeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Apply Rule to All Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Apply changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Available colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Area of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Trimmed Size (Trim Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Available colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102

10 List Window
List Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Context-sensitive Menu Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Folding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Not assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Prinect Signa Station Reference XIII

13 Packaging
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Definition of the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Job Assistant in the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Product Part Inspector - "Packaging" tab . . . . . . . . . 13-2
"Packaging" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Cutting Die File and Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Information about Loaded CFF2 File ("Info") . . . . . . . . 13-3
Placement rule for assigned 1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
"Attributes" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Editing the Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Rectangular Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Polygon Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Functions in a 1up Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Prinect Signa Station Reference XIX

Table of Contents ABC

"StationNumber" Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark
to the 1up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Step 2: Assigning the station numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
"Station Numbers" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Cover Marks (Job-internal Cover Mark /
"CoverClippath") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Background Info about Cover Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Job-internal Cover mark ("InternalMark") . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
"CoverClippath" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Define cover mark from line type for glue area . . . . . . 13-21
Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Notes on Generating CFF2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Overview: Changes in the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . 13-26

14 Sheet Optimization
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Requirements for Creating a Job with Sheet
Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Creating Master Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Sheet Optimization in the Press Sheet Inspector: . . . 14-3
"Sheet Optimization" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
"Ribbon Margin" Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Graphic of "Horizontal" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Graphic of "Vertical" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Graphic of "General" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Display in the List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Creating a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Concept for Optimization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

XX Edition March 2010

ABC Table of Contents

Automatic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Functions for Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Important Terms at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

15 Drag & Drop

What's Behind Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Using Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
From the Browser Window to the Graphic Window . . . . 15-2
From the List Window to the Graphic Window . . . . . . . 15-3
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
From the Browser Window to the Inspectors Window . . 15-3
From the Inspectors Window to the Graphic Window . . 15-4
Files from the Operating System to the Browser Window . 15-5

Glossary

Index

Prinect Signa Station Reference XXI

ABC Before You Start ...

Before You Start ...

About This Documentation

This documentation applies to Prinect Signa Station
version 10.0.
This documentation is implemented as the context-
sensitive Help in the Prinect Signa Station applica-
tion and at the same time is a separate reference man-
ual. This means that you immediately have Help
online on the screen when you hit the F1 key or, if you
wish, you can read up on the information in the refer-
ence manual.
In this documentation you will learn ...
0
to work with Heidelberg's user interface,
0
to configure Prinect Signa Station optimally,
0
to create your first job with the available
resources,
0
each function in Prinect Signa Station works.

What you should already know

We assume that you are familiar with the basic func-
tions of Windows /Apple Macintosh. We assume
that you know the basics about reprographics and
printing.

Further Documentation
You will find more information in ...
0
Prinect Signa Station - User's Guide
0
Prinect Signa Station - Installation

Prinect Signa Station Reference XXIII

Before You Start ... ABC

Symbols and Styles

The following typographical conventions are used in
this manual:
0
References to other chapters and sections are blue
(on the screen) and underlined.
Example:
See Symbols and Styles, page XXIV.
0
Quotes are used to indicate menus, folders, names
of functions, hardware conditions, switch set-
tings, system messages, etc.
Example:
Set the switch to "off".
0
Menus, functions and submenus are separated
from one another by a ">".
Example:
Select "File > Open..."
0
A plus sign is used to indicate that several keys
have to be pressed at the same time.
Example:
Press Alt+A.

Important Information
Important information in the text is marked by sym-
bols that are used as follows:
Warning: Contains information that must be taken

3 into consideration to protect the user from injury.

Attention: Contains information that must be taken

1 into consideration to prevent damage to hardware or

software.

XXIV Edition March 2010

ABC Before You Start ...

Note: Contains important general or additional infor-

2 mation on a specific topic.
Prerequisites: This text contains requirements which
5 must be fulfilled before the steps which follow can be
performed.

Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields

Strong magnetic fields may influence your monitor
screen (for example, they might make the edges of
the screen unsteady or images flicker). This could be
caused by the 50 Hz magnetic field coming from the
power cables routed along your floors.
Recommended measures to eliminate these prob-
lems, taking into account the safety regulations for
workplaces with monitors in an office environment:
0
Move the monitor to a different location.
0
Shield the source (e.g. shield the cable duct).
0
Lay the power cables differently.
0
Screen the monitor using a metal hood.

Open Source Software

Some software libraries and other software programs
which form part of the scope of delivery of the Heidel-
berg software are applications from third-party pro-
viders. They are Open Source Software, for which the
granted rights of use are subject to the regulations
pertaining to the license agreements. Upon your writ-
ten order you can obtain a free and fully machine-
readable copy of the source code of such Open Source

Prinect Signa Station Reference XXV

Before You Start ... ABC

Software, in line with applicable provisions, from

Heidelberg. The costs for the data carrier, postage and
administration will be charged.
You can obtain a copy of the source code stating your
Heidelberg software version from:
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Service Hotline
Electronics
E-mail: [email protected]

Heidelberg online
Do you have any questions regarding our products?
Do you want to improve your workflow?
Then visit us on the Internet. You can find us at:
http://www.heidelberg.com/

XXVI Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?

1 What Is New?

General
The new Prinect Signa Station software has a fully
new graphical user interface that is in tune with all
other Prinect products, making your work with it
consistent and easy.
Now we would like to highlight to you briefly what's
new compared to Prinect Signa Station versions 3.0,
4.0 and 4.5:

ABC What Is New?

0 "Import" tab: "No Gap Computation for" was

added to "JDF Attributes". See No Gap Computa-
tion for:, page 428 for details.
0 "Import" tab: "Constant Press Sheet Order (rec-
ommended: On)" was added to "JDF Attributes".
See Constant Press Sheet Order (recommended:
On), page 427 for details.
0 "Import" tab: "PDF Handling" was added. See
PDF Handling, page 429 for details.
0 Work Mode: "Montage"
The "Change or Create Station Number..." function
that you could use through the context-sensitive
menu in the graphic window in the "Folding
Sheet/Assembly Block" tab was renamed to
"Change Station Index and Article..." to avoid
ambiguities. See Change or Create Station Num-
ber..., page 824 for details.

What's New since Prinect Signa Station 4.0

New Functions and Enhancements

0 The new DIPCO 4 color control bars were imple-
mented for the new color control bar workflow.
You can find more details about the new color con-
trol bar workflow in Allow Spot Colors to BCMY,
page 913.
0 The versioning functionality has been optimized.
You will find an example in the User's Guide show-
ing you, among other things, how working with
marks is enhanced as well as a new editor for
"assigning versions to folding sheets". See also
Assign Versions, page 988.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 17

What Is New? ABC

0 The functionality of "Packaging Pro", the packag-

ing module, has been optimized. Further details
can be found in the Online Help of "Packaging
Pro".
0 The new 145+ size for output to large-format plate-
setters was implemented.
0 Changes in the preferences
0 "General" tab: "Column for 'Ignore in Mark'"
was added. See Column for "Ignore in Mark",
page 44 for details.
0 "General" tab: It is possible to define the num-
ber of recent jobs. See Number of Recent Jobs,
page 47 for details.
0 "Defaults" tab: You can modify the page-related
bleed with the mouse in the graphic window.
More details can be found in the option Modify
Page-related Bleed in Graphic Window,
page 416.
0 "Resources" tab: It is no longer necessary to
define a barcode font in the preferences. More
details can be found in the User's Guide.
0 New tab, "Reports": A separate "Reports" tab was
added for more clarity. See Reports, page 420
for details.
0 "Import" tab: Two new options were added in
"JDF Attributes". Refer to Automatic Position-
ing during JDF Import, page 427 and Special
Interpretation of Folding Sheet Orientation for
JDF Import, page 427.

18 Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?

0 Job Inspector
0 New option, "Allow Spot Colors to BCMY":
You can enable the above-named option in "Job
Inspector > Colors". This has enhanced the han-
dling of color control bars noticeably. See
Allow Spot Colors to BCMY, page 913 for
details.
0 A job can be frozen when saved. See Prevent
Resource Balancing, page 911 for details.
0 Marks
0 Simplified working with barcode marks Fully
automated working with WST barcode marks.
See Reports, page 420 for details.
0 "Cover Mark Background" was added as an
option in the Color Control Bar Editor. See
"Cover Mark Background":, page 1134 for
details.
0 You can duplicate marks in the graphic win-
dow using the context-sensitive menu. See
Duplicate Mark, page 824 for details.
0 The ink coverage in color marks can be reduced
for proofing. You can save a noticeable amount
of ink this way. See "Ink Coverage in Proof":,
page 1133 for details.
0 The "Ink Pickup Mark" and "Plate Control Mark"
mark types were added in conjunction with
the new color control strip workflow. See
"Mark Type":, page 1131 for details.
0 The "Show Output Status" window in the "Tools"
menu can now also be minimized. As a result, it is
not always in the foreground of

Prinect Signa Station Reference 19

What Is New? ABC

Prinect Signa Station. See Show Output Status,

page 1223 for a description of the window.
0 In the "Montage" mode, you can use the "Change
Station Index and Article..." function to automati-
cally number the 1ups on the back as well. You
will find this function in the graphic window in
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block". See Change or
Create Station Number..., page 824 for details.

What's New since Prinect Signa Station 3.0

New Functions and Enhancements

0 New extensive functions for "versioning"
0 The versioning functionality has been
enhanced. For example, you can assign con-
tents to single folding sheets or even to pages.
See Job Details, page 99 or Version Preallo-
cated for Versioned Output (Versioning Only),
page 988 in the Press Sheet Inspector and Ver-
sion Preallocated for Versioned Output (Ver-
sioning Only), page 988 in the Page/1up
Inspector. You will find an example showing
you many of the new functions in the User's
Guide.
0 Enhancements when working with gang run
forms.
You can assign job details to several products parts
in a job. See Job Details in Product Part, page 919
for details.
0 Changes in the preferences
0 "General" tab: Use Global Settings. See Used Set-
ting, page 42 for details.

110 Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?

0 "General" tab: Column for Darkest Color. See

Column for Darkest Color, page 44 for
details.
0 "Names" tab: Parameters for Automatic File
Names. Preallocation of file names has become
simpler and was moved to the "Names" tab. See
Job File Name, page 411 for details.
0 "Option Chooser" tab: New "Packaging Pro" pur-
chase option. See Product Part Inspector -
"Packaging" tab, page 132 for more details.
0 "Option Chooser" tab: New basic package, "Pri-
nect Signa Station Server". This package is
designed solely for the workflow with the Pre-
press Manager. A layout can be put together
automatically by all the Prepress Manager
Cockpits without having to install Prinect
Signa Station locally.
See the Basic Packages, page 432.
0 "Defaults" tab: New option for simplifying a
sequence. See "AutoArrange" after Plate Loaded
from Product Part Template, page 415 for
details. Also output enhancement, see Output
Parameter Set Automatic, page 416 for
details.
0 "Resources" tab: It is possible for you to define a
second folding sheet label in "Marks Default".
You can select the "1up Proof" template for
packaging printing in "Default for Other
Resources". See 1up Proof Template, page 420
for details.
You can define the "old" "Report Header"
default directly in the list window. See "Save
Table as HTML File...", page 105 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 111

What Is New? ABC

0 "Import" tab: You can show MDS resources in

an easy-to-follow table if you enable the "Show
MDS Resources as Table" option.
0 "Processes" tab: The "Show Spot Colors as True
Colors" option is new in "Preview Attributes".
See Show Spot Colors as True Colors,
page 429 for details.
0 "Processes" tab: The "Overprint Preview" option
is new in "Preview Attributes". See Overprint
Preview, page 430 for details.
0 New Print Assistant
0 The new "Print Assistant" button is located in
"File > Print Job...". The Assistant displays when
you click this button and guides you through
all relevant output settings. See Print
Assistant ..., page 1218 for details.
The Print Assistant is not available in the work-
flow with the Prepress Manager.
0 New Combi Marks Editor
0 A new separate editor was integrated for combi
marks. The "old" combi mark function in the
following editors no longer exists:
Ink pickup bar
Color Bar
Special color control bar
Marks Import
Marks Import (Line Mark)
See Combi Marks Editor, page 1153 for details
about the new Combi Marks Editor.
0 New function, "Import Job"
0 A compressed ZIP file was written if a job in Pri-
nect Signa Station was exported for data
exchange. The "Import Job" function lets you

112 Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?

open these ZIP files without having to unpack

them first. See Import Job ..., page 126 for
details.
0 New function, "Export Signa Resources..."
0 You write the resources on your computer to a
compressed ZIP file. See Export Signa
Resources..., page 1216 for details.
0 Job Browser
0 The "File" menu has a new function, "Open
with Browser...". An Assistant opens that makes
it easier to look for files. See Open with
Browser ..., page 121 for details.
0 "Browser" window
0 The "Internal Marks" tab was enhanced and
renamed to "Internal Resources". Not only
marks but also other components of the active
job are shown: Plate template, papers (printing
materials), schemes, plate layouts and output
parameter sets. See Internal Resources,
page 614 for details.
0 You can save the current press sheet as a plate
template in the "Product Parts" tab. Mark the
press sheet and display the context-sensitive
menu. The saved plate template is then avail-
able for other similar jobs. See "Create Plate
Template from Press Sheet", page 69 for
details.
0 New Assistant for easy assignment of PDF files
(pages) to the job. See "Assign Pages...",
page 613 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 113

What Is New? ABC

0 Graphic window
0 A button for showing or hiding dimensions
was incorporated. See Dimensions on/off:,
page 85 for details.
0 Enhanced toggling between front and back
sheet. See Front/Back, page 85 for details.
0 You can save settings in the graphic window as
a default. See View Properties and Enable/Dis-
able Layers, page 86 for details.
0 List window
0 You can now save tables also as a PDF. See "Save
Table as PDF File...", page 108 for details.
0 Inspectors
0 You can enter job details for product parts in
"Product Part Inspector > General". See Job
Details in Product Part, page 919 for details.
0 Sort Folding Sheet for Bookbinding
A new automatic function was added in "Prod-
uct Part Inspector > Schemes > Active Inspector
Section > All Folding Sheets". See Sort Folding
Sheet for Bookbinding, page 958 for details.
0 Automatic rotation
See "Product Part Inspector > Schemes > Press
Sheet Layout" Automatic rotation, page 962.
0 Change the mark position
You can select whether the mark will be offset
relative to the reference point or to the last
position. See "Folding Sheet Inspector > Marks
> Position X/Y" "Change" button, page 976 for
details.

114 Edition March 2010

ABC What Is New?

0 Marks
0 In the Marks Editor, the layer on which the
mark was positioned is now also shown. You
can set the layer using a list box. More details
can be found in the Marks Editor "General"
Group, page 1131.
0 Other additional fields in the Marks Editor:
"Number of Additional Fields", "Ink Coverage in
Proof", "Color". More details can be found in the
Marks Editor "General" Group, page 1131.
0 In the Marks Editor, the alias name of the mark
is now also shown. More details can be found in
the Marks Editor "General" Group, page 1131.
0 Button for sorting marks in the marks list. See
Marks Tab, page 116 for details.
0 All the marks on the front can now be copied
to the back in the Folding Sheet Inspector.
More details are described in the Folding Sheet
Inspector in Marks, page 967.
0 The ink pickup bar can now also be arranged
vertically. See the Graphic Area, page 1146
for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 115

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

2 The Heidelberg User Interface

Concept of the User Interface

The user interface of Prinect Signa Station was
designed to give you the best possible overview of the
system at all times. A "flat" hierarchy was therefore
selected for the displayed elements, in which wher-
ever possible there are no overlapping windows.
Things can quickly get muddled, especially when sev-
eral dialog boxes, perhaps even overlapping each
other, are open at the same time. The user interface
was therefore designed in such a way that all impor-
tant settings can be made in the main windows of the
application.

Structure of the User Interface

The user interface of the Prinect Signa Station con-
sists of "static" and "dynamic" elements. The static ele-
ments are always visible while the dynamic elements
can change their appearance and contents depending
on the operational process that is currently in
progress.
Prinect Signa Station has four dynamic basic win-
dows that appear when a job is open, showing the
data about it.
You can resize each of the windows to suit your needs,
see Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts, page 217.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 21

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

The user interface has the following static elements:

0
the menu bar (1)
For details, see Menu Bar, page 23.
0
the toolbar (2)
For details, see Toolbar, page 23.
The user interface has the following dynamic ele-
ments:
0
the Browser window (3)
For details, see Browser Functionality, page 61.
0
the graphic window (4)
For details, see Graphic Window, page 81.
0
the inspectors window (5)
For details, see Inspectors Window, page 91.

22 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

0
the list window (6)
For details, see List Window, page 101.

Menu Bar
A menu bar with the "File, "Edit", "Jobs & Resources",
"Inspectors", "Tools", "Services" and "? (Help)" menus is
located at the top of the GUI. The functions listed in
these menus are static and can be selected at any time
you are processing the job.

You will find a description of the menus in the menu

bar in the chapter Menus in Prinect Signa Station,
page 121.

Toolbar
The toolbar is a control element where you can trig-
ger important and frequently used functions with a
click.

In the toolbar, you can open, create and print jobs

and call up various inspectors. You can switch
between the resources view and the job view (also
using shortcut "Alt + 1"). More details can be found in
the "Resources and Machines" chapter, General,
page 71.
You can also select the Default unit, page 45 for Pri-
nect Signa Station.
If you move the mouse pointer to an icon, a tooltip
appears explaining its function.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 23

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

The Four Basic Windows

The four basic windows of Prinect Signa Station will
now be described.

Browser Window
The Browser window shows you the open and active
job and all of its components in three tabs. A click on
the arrows displays more details in a substructure.

See the Browser Functionality, page 61.

Graphic Window
The graphic window shows you the elements of a job
you selected as a graphic view.

24 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

See the Graphic Functionality, page 81.

Inspectors Window
The inspectors window shows you the settings of the
open and selected job. You only see the settings of the
inspector that is currently displayed.
Depending on which inspector you are in, the caption
bar shows the name of the job, product part, work
mode and the name of the current inspector.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 25

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

See the Where You Can Select Inspectors, page 91.

List Window
The list window shows you the elements of a selected
job as a table.

See the List Functionality, page 101.

26 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Button
Click a button to trigger an action. A window displays
or a function is performed directly.

Folder Button
The folder button opens the file selection dialog, see
the File Selection Dialog, page 211.

Drop-down Menu
You can display different drop-down menus in the
menu bar. See Menus in Prinect Signa Station,
page 121 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 27

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

List Box
An arrow on a button indicates that the button con-
tains more than one option and that these options
are mutually exclusive: it is only possible to select one
at a time.

Tabs
The screen contents vary depending on the tab you
click.

Details
The right arrow means that another section with
details (e.g. folder structure) can be opened up. Vice
versa, the down arrow means that this section with
details can be collapsed again.

28 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Option/Check Box
You can select just one of the various options pre-
sented, for example, "To pages/1ups", "To folding
sheets" or "To scheme". This indicates that a setting is
selected.
You can enable or disable a setting with a click on the
button.

Tool Button (On/Off Function)

Each tool button has a function that you can enable
or disable. The button is shown in reverse video when
the function is enabled.

Multitool Button
There is an "arrow" at the bottom right of the button
that lists the available modes or tools when you right-
click it on the PC or use the command key + mouse
button on the Macintosh. Select the mode or tool you
want. It moves to the top of the list where its function
can then be triggered.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 29

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

Text Boxes
Places where you can enter data yourself are high-
lighted by a dark background.

Numeric Text Boxes

0 Boxes for linear dimensions:
You can decide whether the data displayed will be
with or without a unit of measure in "File > Prefer-
ences > General > Show Units".
0 Boxes for linear dimensions:
The linear dimension is converted to the default
unit of measure if you enter a value in a unit that
doesn't correspond to the default one.
0 Calculations are possible in a numeric text box
(addition, subtraction, multiplication and divi-
sion).
0 Errors: Some boxes have limits. The limit displays
if it is exceeded. The box turns red and a beep
sounds.
0 Accuracy: You can enter numeric values as accu-
rately as you want. The system uses precisely this
accuracy internally. In the user interface, how-

210 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

ever, the values that are displayed are only accu-

rate to approx. 1/100 mm.

File Selection Dialog

The file selection dialog appears at various points in
Prinect Signa Station. Two variations of the dialog are
possible.
1. The following dialog displays if you wish to open a
job:

You can then select and open a job. You can use the
buttons to look in folders, create a new folder or
change to a different folder level. Click the arrow on
the right to define your favorite folders.
2. The following dialog displays if you want to load a
template (e.g. a scheme) to a job:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 211

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

You can then select files in existing structures and

folders. The top folder level displays automatically.
This varies according to where you are in the applica-
tion when you clicked the folder button.

New
The "New" button lets you create your own folder. The
appropriate editor for creating a resource also opens.

Edit
Opens the appropriate editor for editing a resource.

212 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Context-sensitive menu
The functions of a context-sensitive menu vary,
depending on where you are in the application (for
that reason, context).
If you use a mouse with two buttons, click the other
mouse button to display the context-sensitive menu.
(The right button if you are right-handed, and the left
if you are left-handed provided that you reconfigured
your mouse buttons.)
With the Macintosh single-button mouse, you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu by holding down the
Ctrl key at the same time you click with the button.
Below is an example of the context-sensitive menu as
it displays in the graphic window in the "Press Sheet"
tab:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 213

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

Help!
If you let the pointer hover over a button for a
moment, a tooltip appears explaining what the but-
ton is for. Other useful tooltips appear at many differ-
ent points in the application as well (e.g. text boxes).

You can disable the tooltip display in "File > Prefer-

ences > General".

214 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

If you need more information, press F1 on your key-

board to display the Online Help.
The Online Help is context-sensitive. This means that
you first see information that relates immediately to
the context you are presently in.

Hyperlinks

Hyperlinks are blue text that you can use to jump to

somewhere else in the documentation.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 215

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

Contents/Full Text Search

In the left-hand side of the Help Window, you navi-
gate to a topic from the contents or you can search for
all occurrences of a certain term (full text search by
selecting the magnifying glass).

Forwards/Backwards
Using the arrows in the header and footer of every
page, you can move from one page to the next. In this
way, you can browse through the Online Help from
start to finish just like a book.

The up arrow returns you to the page you started on

in Online Help.

Use the arrows in the toolbar of the Online Help to go

to the previous page and, if you want, back to where
you were.

216 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts

You can also call up some functions using keyboard
shortcuts.
You can also call up many functions using mouse and
keyboard shortcuts.
Some shortcuts vary, depending on the computer
platform you use. The following table lists some
shortcuts:

Taste (PC) Taste (Mac)

Befehlstaste Strg */#
Alt-Taste Alt alt /
Eingabetaste E E
Kontextmen alternative ctrl +
Maustaste Maustaste
Umschalttaste
T
Tabulatortaste

You can move sliders with the arrow keys, horizontal

sliders with the left and right arrows, and vertical
sliders with the up and down arrows.
Use the Tab key to jump to the next element.
Hit the spacebar to trigger the function of the
selected element (e.g. button).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 217

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

General Functions

Keyboard Function
Command key + A Select all files/pages in lists.
Command key + click Add/deselect single files/pages in lists.
Shift key click + click Select blocks of files/pages in lists.
Double click on the The window is maximized at the sides.
caption bar of a window
Double-click the caption bar again to return to the
standard size.
Click on small arrows The window is maximized in length (up arrow) or in
on borders between the width (right arrow).
four basic windows
Click the down/left arrows to return to the standard
size.
Click on window The window is made bigger or smaller manually.
border, move holding
down mouse button

Menu functions

File Menu

Keyboard Function
Command key + O Open Job
Command key + S Save job (selected job)
Command key + N Start Job Assistant
Command key + P Output (displays the "Print Job" window)
Command key + W Close job (selected job)

218 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Command key + Q Exit program

Edit Menu

Keyboard Function
Command key + Z Undo function (not possible with all functions)
Command key + Y Redo function (redoes undone function).

Jobs & Resources Menu

Keyboard Function
Alt + 1 Display the current job

Alt + 0 Go back to the previously selected resources.

Command key + Shift You can switch between the jobs open in the Browser
key + 0, 1, 2, etc. window using digits 1, 2, 3 (job is then active).
Alt + 2 Display general resources and machines
Alt + 3 Display plate templates
Alt + 4 Display schemes
Alt + 5 Display marks

Inspectors Menu

Keyboard Function
Command key + 1 Display the Job Inspector
Command key + 2 Display the Product Part Inspector
Command key + 3 Display the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector

Prinect Signa Station Reference 219

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

Command key + 4 Display the Press Sheet Inspector

Command key + 5 Display the Page/1up Inspector
Command key + 6 Display the Document Inspector

Tools Menu

Keyboard Function
F3 The graphic window is detached from the user inter-
face so that you can scale it up.

Hit F3 again to integrate the window back into the

user interface.

Browser Window

Keyboard Function
F7 Opens the "Assign Pages..." window.
Only active if a PDF file is loaded in "Contents" in the
Browser window.

Graphic Window

Keyboard / Mouse Function

Double click on the The window in the graphic view is maximized in
caption bar of a window length (applies to all four basic windows).

Double-click the caption bar again to return to the

standard view.

220 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Double click on the Shows or hides the back.

colored caption bar of
the front/back sheet
F11 and F12 key In the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block"
and " Page List" tabs, you can select the next content
with F11 and the previous one with F12.
Command key + space Zoom in
bar + click

Command key + Alt + Zoom out

space bar + click

Command key + + A selected object is shown as large as possible in the

graphic view.
The graphic view is scaled up if nothing is selected.
Returns scaleups to the default (Auto).
Command key + -

Space bar Move tool (hand)

Click on ruler, drag to Set magnetic snap lines
position holding down
mouse button

Alt + click on selected Delete snap line

snap line
Command key + Shift Set a measuring position
key + click

Command key + Shift Create the measurement tool

key + click
hold down mouse but-
ton and draw rectangle

Prinect Signa Station Reference 221

The Heidelberg User Interface ABC

Click on ruler cross, Set zero on the ruler

define position with
mouse pointer and click

Double click on ruler

cross Reset zero to standard origin

Command key + 9 Shows the back.

Command key + 9 again to return to the standard

view.
Command key + 0 Open the "View Properties" dialog

Page Inspector

Keyboard Function
Click in "Offset" box + Set position for alignment of offset
command key + Shift
key + click in the "Fold-
ing Sheet" graphic view
Click in text boxes + left/ Change "Offset" and "Scaling" step-by-step and visibly
right arrow keys (in the graphic window) with the arrow keys

Job Assistant

Keyboard Function
Command key + space Jumps one step forward.
bar
Command key + Shift Jumps one step back.
key + space bar

222 Edition March 2010

ABC The Heidelberg User Interface

Editing the Clip Path (Work Mode: Packaging)

Keyboard Function
See Editing the Clip Path, page 136 for details.

Help Menu

Keyboard Function
F1 Online Help

Prinect Signa Station Reference 223

ABC What's What?

3 What's What?

Terms Used in Prinect Signa Station

In this chapter, we will explain essential terms in Pri-
nect Signa Station that are absolutely necessary for
you to fully understand what is being described.
We believe it is very important that you know the
meaning of these terms and what they entail.

Job
A job is saved to your disk as a file with the extension
".sdf" and the name you give it. You can specify the
path to the file location in "Preferences". The job file
contains all the data and settings that were made at
Prinect Signa Station. The job can consist of several
product parts where different working modes (impo-
sition, montage) are defined.
The name of the open job appears in the caption bars
of the four basic windows (Browser window, graphic
window, inspectors window and list window).

Product Part
Is one part of the job. You can save the "Imposition",
"Automatic Imposition"; "Packaging" and "Montage"
working modes as product parts. A product part in
turn can also consist of several parts such as the press
sheets, folding sheets/assembly blocks and the data
pages if they were filed in a page list or 1up list.
You will find all the resources that are part of the job,
e.g. internal marks, in the "Internal Resources" tab. A
mark can be present in several product parts and, for
that reason, marks are job components as well. They
are on the same hierarchy level as the product parts.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 31

What's What? ABC

Master Page
The master page specifies the trimmed size of the
pages on the press sheet. In addition, you can also
define details about the type (left page), extra space
and placement of the assigned pages.
By assigning master pages in a folding sheet (the fold-
ing sheet is part of a press sheet), you define the
dimension of the folding sheet.

Folding Schemes (Schemes, Imposition Schemes)

A folding scheme describes how the sheets will be
folded in finishing. A folding scheme doesn't have any
dimensional data. It only tells you that there are a cer-
tain number of pages on a folding sheet and defines
how they must be folded.
Heidelberg has its own "Heidelberg Fold Type Cata-
log". This has more than 80 folding schemes that
Heidelberg's folders can process.
The fold type catalog is integrated into Prinect Signa
Station. You can also create your own custom scheme
with the "Folding Scheme Editor". More details can be
found in Folding Scheme Editor, page 1110.

32 Edition March 2010

ABC What's What?

Folding Sheet
A folding sheet is defined when you give a folding
scheme dimensional data. In Prinect Signa Station,
this is done by assigning master pages or page sizes
and gaps between the pages (head, foot and page
trims).
A folding sheet is the "central unit" in finishing. The
folded sheets can be placed in the stacker of a saddles-
titcher. The saddlestitcher then gathers the sheets
from the stackers and binds them with staples (saddl-
estitching).
A folding sheet contains a folding scheme, assigned
pages and marks (cut, folding and collating).
blue = collating mark
red = folding marks
green = cut marks

Prinect Signa Station Reference 33

What's What? ABC

Plate templates
A plate template describes the parameters that must
be considered during output. They can be press
parameters such as plate size, maximum paper size,
gripper margin, lead edge of print. The plate template
makes sure that imaging is in the exposable area of
the CtP and in the printable area of the press.
The plate template is equivalent to the press sheet
without the folding sheet, i.e. also without the fold-
ing scheme and marks applied subsequently.

Press Sheet (= Plate)

In Prinect Signa Station, the term 'press sheet' is the
same as 'plate' (Press Sheet tab, Press Sheet Inspector).
The press sheet is the same as the plate template with

34 Edition March 2010

ABC What's What?

placed folding sheets. You can set the colors for dis-
playing the single elements in the graphic view in the
preferences, "General > Color Setting". Here is an
example:
yellow = folding sheets/assembly blocks
cyan = paper
light purple = plate
blue-and-white line (dark purple area) = max. imaging
area (depends on imagesetter you use)
reddish-brown strip = critical area (gripper margin)

Prinect Signa Station Reference 35

What's What? ABC

Paper (Printing Materials)

Paper (printing materials) is the press sheet that is
printed by the plate. The folding scheme or folding
sheet must fit on the paper.

Subject
Subject is the term for the bounding box around the
printed area on the press sheet.

Assembly Block
An assembly block is very similar to a folding sheet. It
is a type of scheme with the required number of 1ups
and their distribution. All the 1ups of an assembly
block have the same trimmed size (analog to the mas-
ter page in the folding sheet). You can also define the
gaps between the 1ups. Unlike the folding sheet, an
assembly block is not folded but finished in a cutter.

Tiles
Tiles can be folding sheets or assembly blocks. These
can both occur together in one job.

Marks
There are several types of marks such as register, cut,
folding, collating, page and custom marks as well as
color control bars. In Prinect Signa Station, cut, fold-
ing and collating marks can be set automatically, all
other marks on the other hand must be added manu-
ally. The marks on a plate template are used automat-
ically when press sheets are created. You can also
import marks and create your own ones.

36 Edition March 2010

ABC What's What?

Bounding Boxes
When assigning PDF data pages, it is important to
know which bounding boxes are in the PDF file and
how Prinect Signa Station evaluates them (see also
the section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930).
The following five boxes (sorted by box size) in a PDF
document can be evaluated by Prinect Signa Station:
0
Media box: The media box contains all the objects
of a page. This includes all texts, images and
marks that appear on the page or extend beyond
the page edge.
From a technical point of view, the media box
defines the limits of the physical medium on
which the page is to be printed. Apart from the
complete page, it can comprise space for trim
marks, color control bars and other elements.
The media box is the biggest box.
0
Crop box: The crop box defines the area the page
contents is cropped to for display or output. In
contrast to the other box types this box does not
convey any meaning in relation to the physical
page geometry or the intended use. It merely
defines how the page contents are cropped.
The crop box defines the way the page contents
are positioned on the output medium if no other
information is available (e.g. imposition instruc-
tions via JDF or PJTF job).
The crop box is smaller than the media box.
0
Bleed box
The bleed box represents an extended area around
the trim box. The entire page contents are

Prinect Signa Station Reference 37

What's What? ABC

trimmed by this amount when a bleed area is

defined. A document requiring a bleed also
requires a bleed box. The bleed box is always larger
than the trim box and smaller than the media
box. The bleed area of a printed page can have
print, folding and cut marks, slug lines, etc.
0
Trim box: The trim box specifies the final page size
after printing and cutting.
The trim box is the same as the term "trimmed
size" used in Prinect Signa Station. If a PDF docu-
ment has a trim box, the trim box should be iden-
tical in size to the trimmed size of the page.
The trim box must be smaller than the bleed box
and the media box.
0
Art box
The art box represents a page area (e.g. a graphic
file) that will be positioned when the PDF content
is placed in an application such as a DTP program.
The art box must be smaller than the bleed box.
Note:
2 The very least you should define is the trim box as
imposition is usually based on the trim box. No other
box may be larger than the media box.

38 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

4 Preferences / Getting Started

Preferences and Getting Started

This chapter will help you to configure Prinect Signa
Station as you need it and to create your first job in
the "Automatic Imposition" mode. To create jobs, you
need resources that you can create later for your own
device setup. For your first job, however, we will use
the default resources. See Creating Custom
Resources, page 73 for details about creating your
own resources.

Preferences
In the Preferences, you can set parameters that sim-
plify working with Prinect Signa Station.
You can save, close or reset your settings at any time
in the dialog:
0
Close
Click this button to discard any changes you made
in all of the tabs and close the window.
0
Reset
Click this button to reset your settings in all of the
tabs back to the last version saved.
0
Save
Click this button to save all the changes you made
in all of the tabs.

General
In this tab, you configure the way Prinect Signa Sta-
tion will display on your screen. In addition, a pre-
view of PDF files can be displayed automatically when
they are being loaded.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 41

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Used Setting

Use Global Settings (are filed in current workspace)

Preferences can be filed "centrally" just like resources
and used jointly by all users.
When this option is enabled, the structure set in
"Preferences > Paths > Workspace" in Prinect Signa
Station is applicable. A preferences file that is already
in this workspace, for example, from a previously
installed Prinect Signa Station will be used. A restart
of Prinect Signa Station is necessary if different pref-
erences are detected in order for the most recent one
to be used.
If the workspace does not yet have any preferences,
the local settings are copied to the workspace and are
then applicable as global settings that other users can
also access.
The global settings of the logged-in user are copied to
the local path if the option is disabled. A message
describes the preferences that are then used. All
other users are also relocated to their own local area.

View Attributes

List View
It is possible to hide the list window permanently. As
a result, the graphic window is bigger height wise.
If the list window is hidden, you can show it again
only by enabling it in these preferences.

Units in text boxes

The selected unit is shown in boxes where dimensions
are specified.

42 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Paper Name Editable

You can change the name of the paper in "Product
Part Inspector > Plates".
This function should not be enabled in the Prepress
Manager workflow and with the MDS (Master Data
Store).
This is a global setting that is not applied immedi-
ately to an open job. The function is applied only
when you reopen the job.

Units in toolbar
The "Unit" list box is shown by default in the toolbar.
The list box no longer appears when you deselect the
check box.

Column for cutting die color

In the "Packaging" mode, the "Cutting Die" column
displays in the Job Inspector in "Colors > Color Defini-
tions". You can enable the color of the cutting die in
this tab.
A cutting die color indicates the color that is used to
outline a cutting die in a PDF document.
Cutting die colors can be handled separately in the
JDF workflow. For example, output of a plate with a
spot color as the cutting die color can be suppressed
automatically.
See Colors, page 913 for details.

Show check items for multiple web

You can enter different web widths for multiple webs
in "Product Part Inspector > Plates". See Multiple Web
Widths, page 952 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 43

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

This is a global setting that is not applied immedi-

ately to an open job. The function is applied only
when you reopen the job.

Column for Darkest Color

A "Dark" column displays in the Job Inspector in the
"Colors" tab.
You can define the "darkest color" manually in the Job
Inspector when this option is enabled.
Note: This setting does not affect the JDF workflow
2 with the Prepress Manager because the Prepress Man-
ager sets the darkest color.

Column for "Ignore in Mark"

An "Ignore in Mark" column displays in the Job
Inspector in the "Colors" tab.
You can disable spot colors in marks manually in the
Job Inspector when this option is enabled.
The spot color is ignored for combi marks and also in
the workflow with "Allow Spot Colors to BCMY". Fur-
ther details can be found in Ignore in Mark,
page 915.
Note: This setting is used in the JDF workflow with
2 the Prepress Manager.
Show check items for cover bonding and glue line
You can see the cover bonding and glue line functions
in "Product Part Inspector > Binding" only for web
printing.
More details are described in Gripper Collator / Cover
Bonding / Glue Line, page 939.

44 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Show Check Items for Lenticular Printing

The functions related to lenticular printing display in
the "Assembly Block Inspector > Attributes".
More details are described in Lenticular Printing Set-
tings, page 984.

Tooltips
A tooltip appears or is always hidden.
If you let the pointer hover over an element, e.g. a but-
ton, for a moment, a tooltip appears explaining what
this element is for.

Default unit
The unit selected in the list box is used as the default
unit of measure for your work with the Prinect Signa
Station application.
Existing values are immediately converted to the new
unit if you change the unit of measure in the list box
(e.g. from centimeter to inch).
The following units of measure with their equivalents
in millimeters are available:

Conversion to
Unit of measure millimeters
1 millimeter 1 mm
1 inch 25.4 mm
1 centimeter 10 mm
1 meter 1,000 mm
1 point 0.353 mm
1 Pica 4.21 mm

Prinect Signa Station Reference 45

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Conversion to
Unit of measure millimeters
1 Cicero 4.51 mm
1 Didot 0.376 mm

Note: Numbers that have more than three zeros after

2 "0." are shown as exponential numbers.
An example is given below:
The value 0.06 millimeter would be shown as
0.000006 meter if you switched the unit of measure to
meters. However, since the boxes cannot show an infi-
nite number of digits, the value in our example is
shown as an exponential number, 6E-5 meter
Explanation: The first digit '6' describes the real
value, the second digit '5' after the 'E' the number of
zeros after the decimal point.

Display color
This is where you configure the background color for
the Graphic Functionality, page 81.
You can give the various areas different colors to be
able to clearly tell them apart, e.g. the plate and paper
you use. "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block", "Paper",
"Plate", "Critical Section", "Proof Color" and "Dimen-
sioning" can be highlighted by different colors.
The default setting already highlights these areas
accordingly.
1. In the list box in "Display color", select the area whose
color you wish to change.
2. Then click the button beside the list box and change
the colors, using the sliders, to the setting you want
in the "RGB" color space.

46 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

3. Confirm the "Color Selection" dialog with "OK".

4. Then save your setting with "Save" in the "Preferences"
dialog.

Number of Recent Jobs

Confines the number of jobs displayed in "File >
Recent Jobs" always to the set value.
In predecessor versions, the list was confined to five
jobs only after Prinect Signa Station was exited. As a
result, the list often became very unclear during a
work shift.

Language
By default, Prinect Signa Station appears in the lan-
guage that is set for the computer's operating system.
However, you can also set the dialog language of Pri-
nect Signa Station, irrespective of the operating sys-
tem. Select one of the languages offered in the "Lan-
guage" list box and save your change.
The language change will take effect the next time
that Prinect Signa Station starts.

Default User

Default user on
The default user set in this box is automatically
logged on when Prinect Signa Station starts.
You will find a description of the implemented user
management in the User's Guide.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 47

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Suppressed Message Boxes

To optimize processes, you can suppress many mes-
sage boxes from displaying again by manually
enabling "Do not show this window again". These sup-
pressed message boxes now appear in this list. If nec-
essary, you can reactivate these message boxes again
with the following buttons:

Remove Selected
All selected message boxes display again.

Remove All
All the message boxes in the list display again.

Paths
The preferences defined in "Paths" save you unneces-
sary steps when you are saving and opening files. In
addition, you can define a path to Acrobat Distiller
and Acrobat Reader to start them automatically
whenever they are needed.

Default Folder
The path and folder set in "Workspace" defines where
the resources folders are also filed.
If you change the default "Workspace", the resources
included in the shipment in the "Standard" folder are
copied to this new workspace. Any user-specific
resources remain in the old path structure and can
no longer be seen or selected in Prinect Signa Station.
Set the other folder paths to suit your needs. Click the
folder button and select the folder you want. By
default, data are opened and saved from the set folder
path.

48 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Example:
The folder that you set in the "Paths" tab in "Jobs"
appears by default when you select "File > Open".

Select External Executables

Acrobat Distiller must be installed to be able to open
PostScript files (*.ps). Acrobat Distiller automatically
converts PostScript files to the PDF format.
In Prinect Signa Station, settings are defined for the
Distiller that are used automatically for the conver-
sion to PDF.
You can also define the path to Acrobat Reader for
viewing PDF files.
Note: Using the folder button, define the paths to
2 Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader. Select the
respective ".exe" files.

Names
You can assign names to layers in the "Names" tab that
can then be used as default layer names when you
enter several layers in the Job Inspector (you can
change these names at any time in the Job Inspector).
You can find more details about working with several
layers in the User's Guide or in View Properties and
Enable/Disable Layers, page 86.
In addition, it's also possible to modify and/or define
default names and attributes.

Default Layer Names

In the "Name" column, double-click the row with the
index you want to change and type the new name of
that layer.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 49

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Example of a bilingual document with language-inde-

pendent images:

Index Designation
1 Images
2 German
3 English

The procedure for showing layers is described in View

Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 86 in the
Graphic Window chapter. You will find a sample job
in the User's Guide.

Surface Names (Press Sheets)

In Sheetfed Press
You can overwrite each of the default terms "Front"
and "Back". The terms are used in the graphic window
and for output.
The names are also written to the JDF in the JDF work-
flow.

In Web Press
You can overwrite each of the default terms "Top" and
"Bottom". The terms are used in the graphic window
and for output.
The names are also written to the JDF in the JDF work-
flow.

410 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Job File Name

Placeholders
In the list box, you can select placeholders that are to
be part of a file name. The placeholders you selected
are used when you click the "Insert placeholder" but-
ton. Placeholders "Job Number" and "Job Name" are set
by default. When you save your job, the placeholders
are replaced as specified in the job, and the name is
set automatically.
The names are evaluated in the JDF workflow with
the Prepress Manager.
More details can be found in Full job name, page 98
in the Job Inspector.

Output File Name

"Create a generic product part name"
An abstract product part name (TP01, TP02, etc.) is cre-
ated in the output file instead of the product part
name if you enable this option.
This option has no effect in the JDF workflow with
the Prepress Manager.

Free Text Replacer Names

You can define general, job-specific replacers (fea-
tures) that can then be filled with data in the
"Attributes" tab in the Job Inspector. You can define
up to 15 replacers.
You should define the replacers before you open a job.
When you open a job, the replacers are then defined
in the Job Inspector.
See Attributes, page 916 for more details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 411

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

JDF Workflow with Prinect Prepress Manager

This option has been added especially for the interac-
tive variant of the Versioning workflow.

Use Short Variant Name for JDF

When you create press sheet variants with different
versions, their names can be very long, something
which may cause errors during further processing:
For example, FB 001-02-Dt-Dt-En-En-En_Front... (i.e.:
2 x Dt, 3 x En)
Double entries are automatically removed from the
name to shorten it if "Use Short Variant Name for JDF"
is enabled.
In this example: ...FB 001-02-Dt-En_ Front...

Defaults
This tab shows you typical defaults for the functions
usually used. The defaults are only meant to simplify
your work and can be changed at any time later in the
job.
You can also set options for special functions that
simplify or automate a certain procedure.

Bleed Default

Bleed
The default for the bleed is 3 mm.
You can find more details about bleeds in Master
Pages, page 923.

412 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

in routing margin
Prerequisite: Perfect binding is chosen as the binding
method.
You can change the bleed in the routing margin. This
enables you to handle the special requirements of dif-
ferent gluing techniques.
Negative values produce a "colorless" area at the rout-
ing edge of a page.

Defaults for folding sheet generation

Minimum and maximum routing margin

The routing margin defines the space that is required
only in perfect binding to get a "smooth" gluing edge.
The default for the "minimum routing margin" is 2
mm and for the "maximum routing margin" 3 mm.
You can find more details about the routing margin
in Use routing margin, page 942.

Maximum head gap / Maximum gap width

The defaults for maximum head gap and maximum
gap width define the largest possible spacing of the
gaps on a folding sheet.
These defaults are applied when you use the "Auto-
matic Gaps" function in the Product Part Inspector in
the "Schemes" tab.

Min. Gripper Fold Values / Max. Gripper Fold Values

By setting minimum and maximum defaults for front
fold and rear fold, you confine the gripper margin to
a reasonable range, matching the saddlestitcher used
in finishing.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 413

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

The minimum value is set with the "Gripper Collator"

function in the "Binding" tab of the Product Part
Inspector. It is no longer possible to enter a value
higher than the maximum.

Several Switches

Center subject
The subject is centered in all directions relative to the
paper when you select "Sheetwise (front and back)" as
well. The lower edge of the subject with the bleed size
is positioned on the lead edge (blue line) when this
option is not selected.

Scheme filter
Only schemes that fit on the paper and where the
number of pages is less than or equal to the number
of unplaced pages are displayed for selection.
You can disable the filter later when selecting a
scheme, for example, with the Product Part Inspector.

One Folding Sheet per Sheet

The "One Folding Sheet per Sheet" option is the pref-
erence for the same option in the "Product Part
Inspector > Schemes > Active Inspector Section > Press
Sheet Layout". See One Folding Sheet per Sheet,
page 962 for details.

Constant Press Sheet Order

You can change the folding sheet order for better pag-
ination in the Product Part Inspector in "Schemes >
Active Inspector Section "All Folding Sheets". This
change also changes the press sheet order. Enable this
option if you wish to keep the press sheet order
unchanged.

414 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Restrict "Apply" functions in Page Inspector

In some cases, it may not make sense to apply place-
ment rules and marks to all the pages in the job. You
can use this box to restrict the function to the pages
of the currently active folding sheet/assembly block.

Use Media Box for Positioning

Normally, when you import a PDF content file that
has a trim box (equivalent to the "trimmed size" in Pri-
nect Signa Station), positioning is based on this trim
box.
However, enable this option if you prefer to use the
media box as the basis for positioning your data.
You cannot enable this option in a Prinect workflow.
For more information, see Bounding Boxes, page 37
and the section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930.

"AutoArrange" after Plate Loaded from Product Part Tem-

plate
Prerequisite: Both product parts must be gang run
forms. The "Gang run form" option must be set in
"Product Part Inspector > "Plates".
During an import, the option automates the "AutoAr-
range" button in "Product Part Inspector > Schemes >
Active Inspector Section > Press Sheet Layout". For a
description of this function, see Position and orienta-
tion of folding sheet 1up (gang run form only),
page 961.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 415

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Output Parameter Set Automatic

Enables the "Parameters" tab in the "Print Assistant"
where you can assign different output parameter sets
to the single press sheets. You can also edit the output
parameter sets.
The setting in "Options" in the output parameter set
is ignored and set to "One job per press sheet".
You will find more details about this option in Print
Assistant ..., page 1218.

Modify Page-related Bleed in Graphic Window

You can modify the page-related bleed with the
mouse.
When you select a page, a black frame displays in
addition to the yellow frame in the "Press Sheet" and
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tabs in the graphic
window. The frame reflects the page-related bleed
and, when the option is set, has handles that let you
modify the bleed using the mouse.

Packaging: Treat Line Type 99 as Cut

This option defines line type 99 that is usual in pack-
aging as the cutting line.

Snap Lines Relative to Ruler

You can set snap lines relative to the ruler or relative
to the press sheet/folding sheet. When this option is
set, the snap lines also move when you shift the zero
point; otherwise they remain at the press sheet or
folding sheet.

416 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Switches for Marks Handling

Cut Marks on All Corners

For the "Imposition" and "Automatic Imposition"
working modes.
Cut marks are also set on the "inner" page edges if
there is enough space on a folding sheet.

Fixed Cut Marks in Creeping

The cut marks are not moved in creeping. This affects
the ProofColor layer, gives you a better check of the
proof.
The option must be enabled before you open a job.
You can also set this option in the "Product Part
Inspector > Marks > Other General Marks Defini-
tions".

Subject Clipped Marks Centered on Plate

Color control marks with "AutoClip to subject" are
automatically centered on the plate.

Cut and Folding Marks in Background

You can now place cut and folding marks in the back-
ground to prevent them from covering color control
bars, for example.

Collating Marks in Background

You can now place collating marks in the background
to prevent them from covering color control bars, for
example.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 417

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Use Rotated Collating Marks

Collating marks are positioned rotated by 180
degrees.

Proof Color
You can set the line width manually for a proof out-
put.
The default line width is 0.035 mm.

Lines to folding sheet edges

Lines are drawn to the edges of the folding sheet on
the ProofColor layer so that you can judge the proof
better.

Arrow Keys
Defines the distance you move objects in the graphic
window each time you click an arrow key, e.g. when
moving assembly blocks.
Default: 1 mm per step (click on arrow key)

Default Screen Angles for RIPs

Settings in this group do not affect the Heidelberg
workflow (MetaDimension, etc.). The values are used
only when you output to third-party RIPs.
More details can be found in Default Screen Angles,
page 916 in the Job Inspector.

Resources
You can define defaults in the "Resources" tab that Pri-
nect Signa Station will then automatically use.

418 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Assistant

Assistant Template
You can select a product part template for the Job
Assistant. This is then automatically set by default
when the Job Assistant starts and saves you entering a
great number of parameters.
The trashcan icon to the right beside the selection
button removes the default and lets you select a dif-
ferent template.

Marks Default
For your folding sheets, you can select defaults for
"Cut Marks", "Folding Marks", "Collating Marks", "Col-
lating Mark Extension", "Folding Crosses", "Folding
Sheet Cut", "Fold Lay Marks" and "Folding Sheet Label
A and B". These marks are then automatically set if
the relevant boxes were checked in the Product Part
Inspector, for example.
Click the folder button beside the mark type and
select the mark you want.
A change in mark type is immediately applied in the
current job if you first deselect and then check the
relevant box (e.g. "Cut Marks") in the "Marks" tab in
the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector". The
new default mark displays at once in the graphic win-
dow.

Barcode Font
This item is no longer required as of this version. For
a description of working with barcode marks, see the
Chapter "Working with Marks" in the User's Guide.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 419

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Default for Other Resources

Reader's Spread Template

You can use the "11x17-TwoUp (ReadersSpread)", "A3-
TwoUp (ReadersSpread)", "A3-TwoUp-Collating-Mix
(ReadersSpread)", "A4-OneUp (ReadersSpread)" and
"Letter-OneUp (ReadersSpread)" product part tem-
plates for converting your data to reader's spread.
These templates cause the defined master pages of
the product part to be converted to reader's spread
when you select "Product part in reader's spread". For
more details, see "Product Part in Reader's Spread /
Product Part for Single 1up Proofs", page 67.

1up Proof Template

You can select product part templates especially for
packaging printing. For more details, see "Product
Part in Reader's Spread / Product Part for Single 1up
Proofs", page 67.

Reports
To document and/or check a job, you can create and
save reports containing all the job data, for example,
in the list window.
An output report can be written if you enable the
"Output Parameter Set Editor > Finishing > Create
Report" option.
After that, you define the standard entries of the
reports.
In addition, you have the option of defining barcode
marks and and then sending them to finishing with
"Save Table as HTML File...". At the saddlestitcher, the
feeders can then be loaded fully automatically.

420 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Procedure:
1. Position the "WST-5-Barcode" default mark on the rel-
evant folding sheets.
2. Go to the list window and select "Select Columns".
3. Add the three WST marks below "Report" with "Add
Text Mark".

4. Confirm the window and send the HTML report to the

"WST Control Client" for finishing with "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105.
We will now describe the many options you have
when creating your reports.
See "Save Table as HTML File...", page 105 or "Save
Table as PDF File...", page 106 for output of the
reports.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 421

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Default for Report Header

This is where you set the defaults that will be in the
files when the reports are output. See "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105, "Save Table as PDF File...",
page 106 or Create Report, page 1166 for output of
the reports.

Report header
A cover sheet precedes the job data in the reports.
This is defined by the default
"ReportHeader_en.html" file (includes variables such
as job name, customer name, page total,...).
You can define a custom report header with the
Report Templates Editor. See Report Templates Edi-
tor, page 1168 for details. After you defined it, you
can then select it in this tab.

Header
In addition to the report header, you can also add a
header to the beginning of the report by selecting a
mark.

Company logo
Besides the report header and header, you can also
assign a graphic file to the reports by selecting a
".png" graphic file with the company logo.

Default for Surfaces

This is where you define the defaults for labeling and/
or displaying preview images in the reports. In addi-
tion, you can also include certain view properties
from the graphic window in the reports.

422 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Details about setting view properties in the graphic

window can be found in View Properties and Enable/
Disable Layers, page 86.

Surface header, surface footer, preview size

You can label press sheets in the print report by
selecting and positioning marks. You can also define
the size of the press sheet preview images.

Dimensioning
All units of measure set in the graphic window are
written to the report.

Outline mode display

All icons set in the graphic window are written to the
report.

Use graphic view setting

All view properties currently set in the graphic win-
dow are written to the report. The setting defined in
the "View" tab in the graphic window is applicable.
See page 87 for details.

Default for Footer

You can add right, left and centered footers to the
reports by selecting marks.

Page and Paper Sizes

The "Page and Paper Sizes" you want are added to the
reports when you select them.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 423

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Attributes for Report Handling

Reports with Preview

The press sheets in a job are written as an overview to
the report.
The report contains HTML file information about the
job and image files (*.png) with the press sheets avail-
able in the job.

Always Show Last Configuration in Save Dialog

The last version saved of the job with its preferences is
shown in the report.
When this option is enabled, the currently set prefer-
ences are not shown.

Automatic Reports for JDF Output

Reports are written automatically when JDFs are out-
put. A "report" folder is created in the output path,
and the HTML report of the job is filed in this folder.
In older versions, it was not possible to output reports
for a JDF output from the list window.

Import

Defaults for JDFConnector

The JDF Connector checks the specification of the JDF
files that will be imported and adapts some of the
parameters for Prinect Signa Station. An error log file
and the JDF file are moved to an error folder if the JDF
file specification is incorrect for Prinect Signa Sta-
tion. The JDF Connector does not correct any errors in
the JDF file.

424 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

The JDF Connector is a separate program that is also

installed during installation. It runs automatically
from a defined hot folder if "AutoStart JDF Connector"
is checked and checks any incoming JDF files.
It is also possible to start two JDFConnectors and set
them up differently if you are working in parallel
with two different versions of Prinect Signa Station.
The input folder is defined by default as the hot
folder:
"C:...\All Users\Application Data\Heidel-
berg\PrinectSignaStation_4_5\JDFConnectorIn"

All JDF files saved or copied to the input folder are

checked automatically by the JDF Connector and are
moved to the error folder or output folder, depending
on the result.
Default output folder:
"C: ...\All Users\Application Data\Heidel-
berg\PrinectSignaStation_4_5\JDFConnectorOut"

You can then load the JDF file from the output folder
to Prinect Signa Station with "File > Open" or "File >
Import > JDF...".
The following folder hierarchy is set by default:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 425

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Resources Default for JDFs with Job Prep Data

The output parameter set defined in this box is used
automatically if the "Complete Layout" function was
used in the Prepress Manager. When this function is
set, the layout is generated automatically after the
JDFs are imported from the Prepress Manager and is
sent back to the Prepress Manager without any man-
ual intervention.

Default Groups for Imports (JDF / Signa 9 Template)

Plate templates
This is where you define the folder where Prinect
Signa Station looks for a suitable plate template dur-
ing a JDF or Signa 9 Template import. The search cri-
terion is the sheet size named in the JDF.
Click the folder button on the right and select the
folder you want. The "Standard" folder is set by
default.

Scheme
This is where you define the folder where Prinect
Signa Station looks for a suitable scheme during a JDF
or Signa 9 Template import.
Click the folder button on the right and select the
folder you want. The "Standard" folder is set by
default.

JDF Attributes

Automatic Gaps with JDF Import

If this option is checked, Prinect Signa Station uses
product-specific algorithms to check the data from
the JDF and correct any errors.

426 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

The data from the JDF are used as they are if this
option is disabled when you import JDFs with inter-
nal "stripping params" (from job preparation).
Default: The option is enabled to correct any errors in
the JDF.

Automatic Positioning during JDF Import

The positions of the folding sheets are calculated
automatically by Prinect Signa Station when JDF files
with gang run forms are imported.

Special Interpretation of Folding Sheet Orientation for JDF

Import
It can be wise to enable this option when importing
JDF files from third-party MIS systems. The folding
sheets are then oriented automatically by Prinect
Signa Station.

Constant Press Sheet Order (recommended: On)

This option is identical to that in "Preferences >
Defaults", in this case it automatically includes the
procedure for an import from an MIS system. For an
explanation of this function, see Constant Press Sheet
Order, page 414.

Show warning if plausibility check fails during output after

JDF import
During the output of imported MIS JDF files, mes-
sages are issued, indicating the changes to the
imported JDF after processing by Prinect Signa Sta-
tion (e.g. change of press, modified sheet name).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 427

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

No Gap Computation for:

You can define machines, separated by commas,
where there will be no automatic gap computation.

MDS (Master Data Store)

Use MDS
Connection to an MDS is possible if you are working
with the Prepress Manager and/or MetaDimension
and an MDS is installed. Type the name of the server
on which the MDS is installed.
Working with an MDS lets you access central
resources in the network from your workstations.
You can export only local resources of "Papers (Print-
ing Materials)" of a workstation to the MDS. See "To
MDS...", page 78 for details.
The "Papers (Printing Materials)", "Customer Data",
"User Data", "Filmsetters", "Platesetters" and "Sheetfed/
Web Presses" resources are available through the MDS
but can only be viewed in the respective editor. It is
not possible to edit the MDS resources with Prinect
Signa Station.
Local resources for the "Platesetters", "Filmsetters",
Sheetfed Presses", "Web Presses" and "User Data"
resources are available in addition to the MDS
resources.
You can find resources from the MDS in "Resources &
Machines" in the "MDS" tab where they can be dis-
played as tables. See the next item for details.

428 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Show MDS Resources as Table

The MDS resources are shown in an easy-to-follow
table. More details can be found in the "Resources and
Machines" chapter, MDS, page 722.

PDF Handling

Encoding
PDFs can have different types of encoding. You can set
a default encoding type in a list box for correct inter-
pretation.

Processes

Preview Attributes

Automatic Preview
Previews are automatically calculated when pages are
assigned in a job. These are shown in the graphic win-
dow.

Hires Preview
Imported pages are shown with a resolution of 72 dpi
in the preview in the graphic window. You can
increase the preview resolution to 144 dpi if you
select "Hires Preview".
Note: Remember that it takes some time to compute
2 previews. If necessary, you can always generate pre-
views later in the Browser or graphic window.

Show Spot Colors as True Colors

Prerequisite: MDS (Master Data Store) is enabled.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 429

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Spot colors are shown as true colors if color tables for

the spot colors are defined in the MDS.

Overprint Preview
The "Overprint Settings" defined in the PDF are also
calculated and shown.

PDF Preview Attributes

One Page per Color in Separated PDF

When this option is selected, each color separation
(CMYK and any spot colors) becomes a single docu-
ment page. Color separations are not combined to
form logical pages.

Use Thumbnails for Preview

Prinect Signa Station doesn't calculate the preview
itself but uses the thumbnails of the PDF file that you
will import.
The advantage of this is a fast view but the quality of
the preview may not be the best.

Attributes for HTML Reports

This option was moved to the "Reports" tab. See
Reports, page 420 for details.

Output Attributes

AutoClose output dialog

The "Print Job ..." dialog closes automatically after a
job is output and is no longer in the background.

430 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

Option Chooser
The window below displays when you first start Pri-
nect Signa Station.
To add to or change your licenses and options at a
later period, you can make your changes in the
"Option Chooser" tab. The changes are enabled when
the system restarts.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 431

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

License Server
This option is set by default and lets you install a full
version of Prinect Signa Station. You must have a valid
license for this.

Demo Mode
The entire software functionality is available to you
in the demo mode. You can put the software through
all its paces and only then decide if you want to
acquire a license.
It is not possible to output a job. When you save demo
jobs, they will be marked so that you cannot output
any of the jobs you created.
Attention: You can open jobs from the full version of

1 Prinect Signa Station and change them but you can-

not output them again once they are saved in the
demo mode. You should not open your production
jobs with the demo version.

License Server (name or IP number)

A Heidelberg license server must be installed on your
computer or in the network to be able to run Prinect
Signa Station. Type the name or IP address of this
license server into the box.

Refresh Connection
Shows connection status to the License Server. You
can refresh the display if necessary.

Basic Packages
Select the basic package you have a license for. The fol-
lowing packages are available:

432 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

0
Prinect Signa Station 52: Printing plate width is
restricted to 67.5 cm. All output formats are avail-
able to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable
Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station 75: Printing plate width is
restricted to 83.5 cm. All output formats are avail-
able to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable
Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station 105: Printing plate width
is restricted to 116.5 cm. All output formats are
available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Porta-
ble Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station 145+": Printing plate width
is restricted to 405 cm. All output formats are
available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Porta-
ble Job Ticket Format (JT)).
0
Prinect Signa Station JDF/JT: Printing plate
width is restricted to 405 cm. Only the JDF and JT
(Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format) output formats
are available to you.
0
"Prinect Signa Station Server": Printing plate
width is restricted to 405 cm. Only the JDF and JT
(Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format) output formats
are available to you.
You may use this variant only in a workflow with
the Prepress Manager.
A layout can be put together automatically by all
the Prepress Manager Cockpits without having to
install Prinect Signa Station locally.

Options
Select the option matching your license. Multiple
selection is possible. The following options are given:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 433

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

0
"Presetting": With this option released, data for
further processing (CIP4-JDF) are automatically
generated. In addition to the automatically gener-
ated CIP4-JDF data you can manually generate PPF
files (see also User's Guide, chapter "Generation of
CIP3-PPF/CIP4-JDF Data").
0
"Sheet Optimizer": When this option is enabled,
you can use all the functions for sheet optimiza-
tion in the "Montage" mode (see the section Sheet
Optimization, page 141).
0
"Packaging": When this option is enabled, you can
work in the "Packaging" mode (see the
section Packaging, page 131).
0
"Packaging Pro": Has other editing and animation
functions in addition to "Packaging" (see the
section Packaging, page 131).

When you log in the first time, use the default user
"Signa" and the password "signa".

Proceed as follows to change the user:

434 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

1. You assign user permissions and change users in "Jobs

& Resources > Resources & Machines > User Data".
2. Mark the "Signa" user in "PrePress Administrators"
and display the context-sensitive menu.
3. Click "Edit User Data..." to change the default user.
4. Type in the user name you want and repeat your pass-
word twice and then click "Save".
You will then see the changed user in the list of
defined "PrePress Administrators". The user has the
permissions of the "PrePressAdministrators" group.
More details can be found in the User's Guide in User
Management.
To avoid the login dialog appearing every time Pri-
nect Signa Station launches, you can set an automatic
user login:
0
In "File > Preferences > General > Default User",
enable the check box and select a user. After this,
the login dialog no longer appears.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 435

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

Your First Job

When you are happy with the preferences you
defined, you can start on your job.
We can skip creating resources for the moment as
ready resources are shipped with Prinect Signa Sta-
tion. Read up on how to create your own resources in
the User's Guide or in Creating Custom Resources,
page 73.

Job Specifications
0
You will create your first job, a Heidelberg man-
ual, in the "Automatic Imposition" mode.
0
The book will be approx. 70 pages long, will have
perfect binding and be printed in A5 format. The
book describes the "SuperColor" application.
0
A Prosetter imagesetter will be used for output
and an SM102 as the press.
0
You will create the job with the help of the Job
Assistant integrated in Prinect Signa Station.

Procedure
1. Start the Job Assistant with "File > New" or use the
shortcut "command key + N".
2. The Job Assistant window displays:

The Job Assistant defines the logical order in which

you can set all the data you need for your job.

436 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

3. You define general data for your job in the "Job Data"
window. Enter the following data for your first job:
(4.) Job Number = 0001
(5.) Job Name = Heidelberg manual
(6.) Click the "Folder" button in the "Customer Name" row.
(7.) Select "Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG" from the
"Standard" folder and confirm with "OK". Select any
customer you want if you are working with an
enabled MDS (Master Data Store).
(8.) The customer name and the customer number are
used automatically.
(9.) In "Job Details", enter the "Target Date" and the "Vol-
ume" (quantity) you want for the job. Other inputs in
the "Job Data" window are not necessary.
10. Go to the next window "Product Part Definition" by
clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of
the window.

11. In the "Product Part Definition" window, you give the

product part a name and select the working mode
you want:
(12.) Enter "Prinect Color Editor" as the product part name
in "Main Features > Name".
(13.) Check "Enabled" in "Job Details in Product Part" and
enter your data.
(14.) Select "Automatic Imposition" as your work mode.
Other inputs in the "Product Part Definition" window
are not necessary.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 437

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

15. Go to the next window "Master Pages" by clicking the

"right arrow" button in the lower part of the window.
16. You define the trimmed size in the "Master Pages"
window:
(17.) Click the folder button after "Width" and "Height".
(18.) Select the "A5" page format from the "Standard"
folder. The A5 values are automatically applied.
(19.) As we don't need any bleed for our documentation,
set "Page-related bleed" to "0". Other inputs in the
"Master Pages" window are not necessary.
20. Go to the next window "Binding Methods" by clicking
the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the win-
dow.
21. Select "Perfect Binding in "Binding Methods". Other
inputs in the "Binding Methods" window are not nec-
essary.
22. Go to the next window "Marks" by clicking the "right
arrow" button in the lower part of the window.
(23.) Select the check boxes for "Cut Marks", "Folding
Marks" and "Collating Marks" in "Automatically
Placed Print Control Marks".
(24.) You can leave all other settings in the window as they
are.
25. Go to the next window "Printing Plates" by clicking
the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the win-
dow.
26. You select the plate template and paper definition
you want in the "Printing Plates" window:
(27.) Click the folder button after "List of Selected Plate
Templates".

438 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

(28.) For example, select the "SM102" plate template from

the "Standard" folder. The values of the plate template
are displayed in the window and automatically
applied after you confirm with "OK".
(29.) Select "Sheetwise (front and back)" in the "Placement
rule for perfecting" list box.
(30.) Click the folder button after "Paper Definition for Pro-
duction".
(31.) Select the "Profisilk_90_100x70" paper from the
"Standard" folder. The values of the paper are dis-
played in the window and automatically applied after
you confirm with "OK".
32. Go to the next window "Folding Schemes" by clicking
the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the win-
dow.
33. In the "Folding Schemes" window, you define the fold-
ing scheme and set the head, foot and back margins
(if necessary, automatic setting):
(34.) Click the folder button after "Scheme Name".
Note: When you select a scheme, only those schemes
2 that can be arranged best on the sheet using the set-
tings you defined so far (selected trimmed size, plate
template and paper size) will be displayed.
You can disable this filter function, if necessary, in
the lower part of the window.
(35.) Select the "F32-05_li_4x4" scheme from the "Stan-
dard" folder. The scheme displays in the graphic win-
dow on the right and is automatically applied after
you confirm with "OK".
(36.) Click "Automatic Gaps" to apply the gaps from the
preferences. The scheme changes accordingly in the
graphic window and displays as follows:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 439

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

37. Now quit the Job Assistant by clicking the "end" right
arrow button in the lower part of the window. This
concludes your job setup in the Job Assistant.
38. You have now created your job, but it is not yet saved.
Select "File > Save as...". The job name is suggested as
entered and you can save it with "Save". Import of the
PDF files can now start.
39. Go to the "Contents" tab in the Browser window.
Right-click (PC, Mac: ctrl key and click) "PDF Docu-
ments" to display the context-sensitive menu and
select "Documents...".
40. The window that opens displays automatically in the
"Documents" folder. Select "Prinect Color Editor.pdf".
The PDF file displays in the Browser window.

440 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

41. Right-click (PC, Mac: ctrl key and click) "Prinect Color
Editor" to display the context-sensitive menu and
select "Assign Pages". The pages are positioned auto-
matically in the scheme in the graphic window.
42. When all the pages are imported, save your job again.
Select "File > Save".
43. Now check whether all the pages were positioned cor-
rectly and all the press sheets required created. Dou-
ble-click the "yellow" caption bar in the "Press Sheet"
tab in the graphic window. You now see front and
back and they should be something like this:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 441

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

44. Change to the "Press Sheet List" tab. The press sheet
list shows you all the press sheets that were created
and that you need:

442 Edition March 2010

ABC Preferences / Getting Started

45. Two press sheets with front and back were created in
our job.
46. After a check, you can now print your job. Go to "File
> Print Job".
47. Click the folder button after "Output Parameter Set"
and select "Prosetter (PDF)" from the "Standard"
folder.The press sheets you wish to print are already
selected.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 443

Preferences / Getting Started ABC

48. Click the "Edit" button after "Output Parameter Set",

then click the folder button after "Output folder for
PDF, JDF, JT" in the "General" tab and select the sug-
gested folder "Output" if it is not yet entered.
49. Click "Save" and "Close" the window.
50. Now click the "Output" button.
51. You will be notified if your output was successful.
Close the window by clicking "OK".
52. At the PC, the file is saved to the following folder:
"C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Heidelberg\PrinectSignaStation_4\Output".
53. At the Macintosh, the file is saved to the following
folder: "C:\Startup Disk\Users\All Users\Heidel-
berg\PrinectSignaStation_4\Output".
54. The PDF file with all its parameters is printed to the
folder listed above.

444 Edition March 2010

ABC Job Assistant

5 Job Assistant

Basics about Job Assistant

The Job Assistant guides you step-by-step through
your data input in the various inspectors and makes
it easy for you to create and change jobs and product
parts.
The Job Assistant has the same data input structure as
the inspectors. It's easy for you because you don't have
to know which parameters must be entered or
changed in which inspector and the order in which
you must do this. The Job Assistant presents you with
all the relevant parameters in their turn.
You always create a new job with the Job Assistant.
To change a job, you don't need the Job Assistant. You
can make changes directly in the inspectors window
if you want to change just one or two parameters in
the job or product part or if you are already very
familiar with the inspectors. For more details, see
Inspectors Window, page 91.
The "From Template" folder buttons allow you to use
existing resources at any time, for example, jobs, cus-
tomer data, product parts, page sizes, plate templates
and folding schemes. Refer also to Resources and
Machines, page 71.

Starting the Job Assistant

You can open the Job Assistant with "File > New" or by
displaying the context-sensitive menu in the "Product
Parts" tab in the Browser window and selecting "New"
there.
You can also you mark your job or product part in the
"Product Parts" tab in the Browser window, then dis-
play the context-sensitive menu to edit an existing job
or product part.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 51

Job Assistant ABC

The contents of the Job Inspector vary, depending on

the context you display the Job Assistant from (e.g.
editing a product part). Only the steps that are
required are shown. To edit a product part, you no
longer need the job data (e.g. customer data) and, for
that reason, they are not displayed there.

New Job
To open the Job Assistant to create a new job:
0
Start the Job Assistant with "File > New" or display
the context-sensitive menu in the "Product Parts"
tab in the Browser window and select "New" there.
The following window displays:

You enter job-specific data in "Job Data", see Adminis-

trative Data, page 97 for details.
In "Product Part Definition", you decide on the mode
you would like to work with. The data input structure
of the Job Assistant varies depending on the mode
you selected. Only boxes relating to packaging are
shown if you selected "Packaging" as your working
mode. Any boxes that are not relevant are automati-
cally hidden by the Job Assistant.
You will find explanations about the other stages and
their order in Order of the Steps, page 54.

Edit Product Part

To open the Job Assistant to edit a product part in the
"Imposition" working mode:

52 Edition March 2010

ABC Job Assistant

0
Mark your product part in the "Product Parts" tab
in the Browser window, then display the context-
sensitive menu and select "Edit Product Part". The
following window displays:

To open the Job Assistant to edit a product part in the

"Montage" working mode:
0 Mark your product part in the "Product Parts" tab
in the Browser window, then display the context-
sensitive menu and select "Edit Product Part". The
following window displays:

Working with the Job Assistant

In the open Job Assistant, enter your data and go to
the next step by clicking the "right" arrow button.
The progress bar in Job Assistant shows you at what
stage you are (orange dot) and what is already fin-
ished (green dot).
You can quit the Job Assistant at any time and not cre-
ate a job by clicking the "Cancel" button.

Click the "back" button if you wish to check and, if

necessary, correct the data you entered.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 53

Job Assistant ABC

When you are at the last step, you can close the Job
Assistant with the following slightly highlighted but-
ton:

The job or product part appears in the Browser win-

dow in the "Product Parts, page 62" tab. Your job or
edited product part is not yet saved on your hard disk
at this point. Now save it with "File > Save".

Order of the Steps

1. Job Data
Administrative Data, page 97
2. Product Part Definition
Definition, page 918
3. Master Pages (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging"
working modes)
Master Pages, page 923
4. Binding Methods (not in the "Montage" and "Packag-
ing" working modes)
Binding, page 932
5. Marks (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working
modes)
Marks, page 943
6. Printing Plates
Plates, page 947
7. Folding Schemes (not in the "Montage" and "Packag-
ing" working modes)
Schemes, page 953

54 Edition March 2010

ABC Job Assistant

8. Assembly Blocks (not in the "Imposition / Automatic

Imposition" and "Packaging" working modes)
Assembly Block Inspector, page 980
9. Cutting Die (CFF2) (only in the "Packaging" working
mode)
Packaging, page 131

Prinect Signa Station Reference 55

ABC Browser Window

6 Browser Window

Browser Functionality
When you open a job with "File > Open", all informa-
tion about this active job displays in the Browser win-
dow.
A new job created with the Job Assistant also appears
in the Browser window together with all its compo-
nents.
You can open several jobs with "File > Open". However,
only one job at a time can be "active". The data of this
job are shown in the inspectors, list and graphic win-
dows. When you open a job, this one is automatically
the "active" one.Only the "active" job shown in the
Browser window can be edited.
To go to another open job, click the name of the job
you want in the "Jobs & Resources" menu. A tick
appears before the selected job that displays in the
Browser window for editing (it is now the active job).
Note: If you want several jobs open at the same time,
2 remember that each job needs memory. Always open
only a manageable number of jobs so as not to over-
tax your computer capacity unnecessarily.
The window has three tabs. These tabs show you data
in an easy-to-follow tree structure. You can also start
many different actions with the implemented Con-
text-sensitive menu, page 213.
When you create a job with the Job Assistant, it first
appears in the Browser window but is not yet not
saved. Save a job as follows:
0
Select "File > Save". See also Save, page 1216.
The "Product Parts", "Contents" and "Internal
Resources" tabs show you all the components in the
job.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 61

Browser Window ABC

You can drag-and-drop PDF files, folding sheets/assem-

bly blocks to the graphic window and place them on
plates, pages or even on the paper of the job that is
currently open. You can find more details about drag-
and-drop in What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151
or in the User's Guide.

Product Parts
The open (active) job is shown in a clear tree structure
in the "Product Parts" tab. Several jobs can be open at
the same time but only the active job can be edited.
This also applies to a job that has several product
parts. You must click the product part that you wish
to edit with the mouse so that it becomes active.
You can also start many actions simply with the con-
text-sensitive menu.
The open job displays all its product parts, folding
sheets, page lists and press sheets. Each of these items
has its own tree structure that can be expanded by
clicking the arrow before the structure. You can then
see other details.

Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Product Parts" tab
with the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.
0
To open an existing job, start the Job Assistant to
create a new job or import documents to the job:
Display the context-sensitive menu in the "Product
Parts" tab and select "Open", "New", "Documents"
or "Recent Jobs".

62 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

Note: If you want several jobs open at the same

2 time, remember that each job needs memory.
Always open only a manageable number of jobs so
as not to overtax your computer capacity unneces-
sarily.
0
To display the open (active) job with all its product
parts:

0
To change the active job. If several jobs are open,
activate a different job by clicking the job name in
the "Jobs & Resources" menu or using the shortcut
"command key + Shift + number". The job then dis-
plays in all the windows and can be edited.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 63

Browser Window ABC

0
A double click on folding sheets, press sheets or
imported pages in the page list opens the relevant
view in the graphic window and displays the
respective inspector in the inspectors window so
that you can edit them.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when a job name is selected:
0
"Job Inspector"
Displays the Job Inspector. More details can be
found in Job Inspector, page 97.
0
"Edit Job..."
Displays the Job Assistant so that you can edit
the job data. You can only select this function if
neither pages were assigned yet nor several
product parts defined. More details can be
found in Basics about Job Assistant, page 51.
0
"New Product Part..."
Displays the Job Assistant so that you can cre-
ate another product part. More details can be
found in Basics about Job Assistant, page 51
(without customer data).
Note:
When you select "New Product Part", the calcu-
lation basis for selecting a product part tem-
plate with the "Readers Spread" parameter is
missing. To generate a reader's spread, please
select solely the "Product Part in Reader's
Spread / Product Part for Single 1up Proofs",
page 67 function.
0
"Save"
The job you selected is saved. More details can
be found in Save, page 1216.
0
"Save as..."
The job is saved, allowing you to change the job

64 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

name if you want. More details can be found in

Save as ..., page 1216.
0
"Close Job"
Closes the open job. More details can be found
in Close, page 1217.
0
"Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"..."
The job is saved as a template. All the data in
the job are saved and filed to "Resources > Job
Templates".
Exceptions: Imported pages, job number, job
name, customer name and customer number.
You can display the saved templates with "Job
Assistant > Job from Template" or with the Job
Inspector > "Administrative Data > Job from
Template" and then select the template you
want.
Note: You must set up your own group folder
2 before you save a template or resource. Enter
the folder name you want after "Group" or
select one from the list box. The template or
resource is saved in the folder. See To create a
group folder, page 75 for details.
0
"Print Job..."
Opens the window for printing plates. Refer
also to Print Job ..., page 1217.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when a product part is selected
(top level in tree structure):
0
"Product Part Inspector"
Displays the Product Part Inspector. More
details can be found in Product Part Inspector,
page 917.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 65

Browser Window ABC

0
"Edit Product Part..."
Displays the Job Assistant. More details can be
found in Basics about Job Assistant, page 51
(without customer data).
0
"Save product part as "Resources/Product Parts
Templates"..."
The product part is saved as a template. You can
display the saved templates with the Job Assis-
tant in "Product Part Definition > From Tem-
plate" or with the Product Part Inspector in
"Main Features > From Template" and then
select the one you want.
Note: You must set up your own group folder
2 before you create a template or resource. See
To create a group folder, page 75 for details.
0
"Save Product Part as Default for the Assis-
tant...".
The product part is saved as the default tem-
plate for the Job Assistant. The Job Assistant
launches with the setup of the saved product
part.
You will find the selected product part (marked
by a green star) in "Jobs & Resources >
Resources & Machines > Resources > Product
Parts Templates". At this point, you can now
reset this default to the standard template by
displaying the context-sensitive menu and
selecting "Reset as Default for the Assistant" or
you can set a different product part by select-
ing "Set as Default for the Assistant".
You then display the saved template by starting
the Job Assistant with "File > New...".

66 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

0
"Product Part in Reader's Spread / Product Part
for Single 1up Proofs"
In an "imposition" job, a reader's spread can be
generated from a ready, job-specific product
part. This reader's spread then appears in the
job structure as another product part with the
extension "readersspread".
The reader's spread gives a true display of the
product (leaflet, etc) on the screen (in the
graphic window) that can be output to a
printer (layout print).
It has no other functions.

In a packaging job, a 1up is generated from the

product part. The 1up appears as another prod-
uct part in the job structure. The 1up displays
in the graphic window and can be output to a
printer (layout print).
0
"Duplicate Product Part"
The product part you selected is duplicated
with all its components and filed in the job as
another product part of the same name with
"copy" added to it.
0
"Delete Product Part"
The product part you selected is deleted from
the job.
0
"Print All Press Sheets of the Product Part..."
The "Print Job ..., page 1217" dialog displays.
0
"3D Collating Mark Visualization"
The collating marks of the product part you
selected are shown in a three-dimensional
view. See 3D Collating Mark Visualization,
page 1228 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 67

Browser Window ABC

0
"3D Reader's Spread Visualization"
The product part you selected is shown in a
three-dimensional view. The reader's spread
shows you a true display of the product (leaflet,
etc), allowing you to visually check the product
part in a simple way. See 3D Reader's Spread
Visualization with Data Pages, page 1230 for
details.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when the press sheet is selected
(second level in tree structure):
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985
in the inspectors window.
0
"Print Press Sheet..."
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The
Print Job ..., page 1217 window displays.
0
"Print All Press Sheets of the Product Part..."
Prints the currently selected product part with
all the press sheets. The Print Job ...,
page 1217 window displays.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when a single press sheet is
selected (third level in tree structure):
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985
in the inspectors window.
0
"Print Press Sheet..."
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The
Print Job ..., page 1217 window displays.
0
"Print All Press Sheets of the Product Part..."
Prints the currently selected product part with

68 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

all the press sheets. The Print Job ...,

page 1217 window displays.
0
"Create Plate Template from Press Sheet"
The current press sheet is saved without the
folding sheet, folding scheme and content
pages as a plate template in the "Plate Tem-
plates" resource. This function makes it easy for
you to create your own plate templates.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when a single page in the page list
or a single 1up in the 1up list is selected (fourth
level in tree structure):
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can view
the preview in the graphic window. You can set
general view properties. See Default User,
page 47 for details.
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) or
1up(s) in the job. The pages or 1ups in the job
no longer have any assigned content.
0
"Paste Pages from Clipboard"
If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to
the clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the
Browser window, you can paste it in anywhere
you want.
You can also use this function in the graphic
window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page
List" >.

This function is really suitable for positioning

certain pages/1ups several times. In the "Page
List" tab in the graphic window, select several
pages/1ups (command key and click) and paste

Prinect Signa Station Reference 69

Browser Window ABC

the content of the clipboard on the selected

pages/1ups using the context-sensitive menu.
0
"Assign Blank Page" (add a blank page)
Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and
"Automatic Imposition" working modes.
A blank page is pasted before the selected page.
The page size defined in the scheme is used
automatically. The subsequent pages with their
contents shift back one page.
This method is used when, for example, blank
pages that were not in the PDF document must
be pasted to certain positions.
You can also use this function in the graphic
window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page
List" >.
0
"Show Page in Press Sheet"
The press sheet on which the page you are look-
ing for is positioned is highlighted in the
Browser window. The page displays in the
graphic window when you double-click the
press sheet.

Contents
The "Contents" tab lets you import PDF and PS files to
the job currently open. You can import the data to
one or more layers. See chapter 10 in the User's Guide
for details.

Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Contents" tab with
the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.

610 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

0
You can import PDF and PS files to the job cur-
rently open with the "Contents" tab. Display the
context-sensitive menu in this tab, click "Docu-
ments" and select a PDF or PS file.
0
Import of PDF files to a number of layers for posi-
tioning by dragging-and-dropping them to the
graphic window.

0 After the import, you can assign the pages in the

PDF file to the open job (with drag-and-drop, see
What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151). The
pages in the PDF file are shown as a list. In the
screenshot below, you can see that the PDF file,
"Supertrap 3.0_de", has two assigned pages. Pages
3 and 4 are not yet assigned.

0 A double click on imported pages opens the "Doc-

ument" tab in the graphic window and displays

Prinect Signa Station Reference 611

Browser Window ABC

the Document Inspector in the inspectors window

so that you can edit them.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when a PDF file or pages are
selected:

0 "Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector. More details
can be found in Document Inspector,
page 998.
0 "Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can view
the preview in the graphic window. You can set
general view properties. See Default User,
page 47 for details.
0 "Hires Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set
general view properties. See Hires Preview,
page 429 for details.
0 "Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed
with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Exe-
cutables, page 49.

612 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

0
"Remove Document from Job"
The PDF file is deleted from the job.
0
"Reload Document"
The imported PDF file is updated in the job.
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s)/
1up(s) in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no
longer have any assigned content.
0
"Assign Pages"
The selected pages are assigned to the job. The
pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the
next blank pages in the job.
0
"Assign Pages..."
The Assistant that helps you assign pages dis-
plays. The Assistant shows you the position and
layer of the assigned PDF file and makes it easy
for you to assign PDF files to the job.
0
"Copy Pages to Clipboard"
The selected page/1up is copied to the clip-
board and can be pasted at any place you want,
for example, in the "Product Parts" tab > "Page
List" or in the graphic window in the "Page List"
tab. Refer also to "Paste Pages from Clipboard",
page 69.
0
"Show Page in Press Sheet"
The selected page/1up is shown in the Graphic
Window.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 613

Browser Window ABC

Internal Resources
The "Internal Resources" tab shows you the marks
that are in the job currently open.
You can position internal resources by dragging-and-
dropping them to the "Marks" tab in the inspectors.
You can position them in the Press Sheet Inspector,
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector or Page/1up
Inspector, depending on the parent set for the marks.

Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Internal Resources"
tab with the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see Marks,
page 153.
0
The "Internal Resources" tab lets you position
marks by dragging-and-dropping them to the
"Marks" tab in the inspectors. You can position
them in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block Inspector or Page/1up Inspector,
depending on the parent set for the marks. See
Marks, page 153 for details.
0
When you select the "Marks" folder and display the
context-sensitive menu, you can create a "new
internal mark" with the following editors:

614 Edition March 2010

ABC Browser Window

Note: A user-defined internal mark is designed

2 only for the current job and is not available later
in the marks resources. More details about inter-
nal marks can be found in the User's Guide.
0
The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when an internal mark is selected:
0
"Edit Job Internal Mark..."
Displays the editor for the marks. More details
can be found in Marks Editor, page 1131.
0
"Replace Internal Mark"
The selected mark is replaced by a new one that
you will select.
0
"Refresh Internal Mark"
After a refresh, the selected mark shows the
present status of the mark.
0
"Copy Internal Mark to Clipboard"
The selected mark is copied to the clipboard
and can be pasted to the marks resources in
"Jobs & Resources > Marks" by selecting a folder
and displaying the context-sensitive menu.
0
"Delete Internal Mark"
The selected mark is removed from the job. If
the internal mark is available as a marks
resource, it continues to be available for later
jobs.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 615

ABC Resources and Machines

7 Resources and Machines

General
The resources and machines must be regarded sepa-
rately from the open job. You can use them as tem-
plates when creating jobs.
Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG provides you with
a whole series of resources and machine data sets to
facilitate working with Prinect Signa Station. How-
ever, you should still create resources for your own
setup. In this chapter, we will explain how you can
create, edit and import resources to an active job.
In Prinect Signa Station, the default view shows you
the job. Proceed as follows to go to the resources view
and edit or create resources:
Select "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" or
click the following button in the toolbar:

Job Templates
You will find a shipped template for a standard job in
the "Standard" folder in "Job Templates". The standard
job is called "4711_Demo" and contains a job with
eight pages for a flyer.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 79

Resources and Machines ABC

Create a folder as described in To create a group

folder, page 75 for your own custom job templates.
Then mark the "job" in the "Product Parts" tab in the
Browser window and save the open job as a template
with "Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"...",
page 65.

Product Part Templates

You will find shipped templates for standard product
parts in the "Standard" folder in "Product Parts Tem-
plates". Standard jobs have unique names.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own custom product part
templates. Then mark the product part name in the
"Product Parts" tab in the Browser window and save
the product part as a template in an open job with
"Save product part as "Resources/Product Parts Tem-
plates"...", page 66.
You can also save the product part as a default for the
Job Assistant. See "Save Product Part as Default for the
Assistant..."., page 66 for details.

Plate Templates
You will find shipped templates for standard plate
templates in the "Standard" folder in the "Plate Tem-
plates" resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own custom plate templates.
Mark the new folder, display the context-sensitive
menu and select "New Plate Template...". The Plate
Template Editor, page 112 displays and you can now
define your own plate template.

710 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

Schemes
You will find shipped templates for standard schemes
in the "Standard" folder in the "Schemes" resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own custom schemes. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "New Scheme...". The Folding Scheme Edi-
tor, page 1110 displays and you can now define your
own scheme.
You also have the option of studying an existing
scheme with the "Open Folding Sheet Animation"
function. Refer also to Folding Sheet Animation,
page 1225.

Marks
Shipped marks are located in the "Marks" resource.
You will find write-protected standard marks in the
"Standard" folder. You can place these marks in an
open job.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own custom marks. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select the appropriate marks editor. The follow-
ing marks editors are available: Marks Editor,
page 1131, Text Mark Editor, page 1138, Ink
Pickup Bar Editor, page 1146, Color Control Bar Edi-
tor, page 1147 and Color Control Bar Special Editor,
page 1149. You can create your own marks using
these editors.
You can also import and edit existing marks with the
Marks Import Editor, page 1151.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 711

Resources and Machines ABC

You will find text marks in the "Report" folder. You

can place these marks in the list window for output of
HTML and/or PDF files. See "Save Table as HTML File...",
page 105 for details.

Papers (Printing Materials)

This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See
MDS (Master Data Store), page 428 for details.
You will find shipped templates for standard papers
in the "Standard" folder in the "Papers (Printing Mate-
rials)" resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own custom papers. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "New Paper". The Paper Editor, page 1155
displays and you can now define your own paper
(printing material).

Page and Paper Sizes

You will find shipped templates for standard paper
sizes in the "Standard" folder in the "Page and Paper
Sizes" resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own custom page and paper
sizes. Mark the new folder, display the context-sensi-
tive menu and select "New Format". The Format Edi-
tor, page 1156 displays and you can now define your
own page and paper size.

Plate layout
You will find a shipped template for a standard plate
layout in the "Standard" folder in the "Plate Layout"
resource.

712 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

Create a folder as described in To create a group

folder, page 75 for your own custom plate layout
resources. Mark the new folder, display the context-
sensitive menu and select "New Plate Layout". The
Plate Layout Editor, page 1156 displays and you can
now define your own plate layouts.

Customer Data
This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See
MDS (Master Data Store), page 428 for details.
You will find shipped sample customers in the "Stan-
dard" folder in the "Customer Data" resource. You can
use these customers to create a test job.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own customer data. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "New Customer Data". The Customer Data
Editor, page 1156 displays and you can now define
your own customer data.

Output Parameter Sets

You will find shipped templates for standard output
setups in the "Standard" folder in the "Output Param-
eter Sets" resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own output parameter sets.
Mark the new folder, display the context-sensitive
menu and select "New Output Parameter Set". The
Output Parameter Set Editor, page 1157 displays
and you can now define your own output parameter
sets.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 713

Resources and Machines ABC

User data
This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See
MDS (Master Data Store), page 428 for details.
In the "User Data" resource, you will find groups and
users set by Prinect Signa Station for internal user
management. All groups and users have certain per-
missions.More details can be found in the User's
Guide.
You can create, edit and delete users, provided that
you have the necessary permissions.

Report Headers
You will find shipped templates for standard report
headers in the "Standard" folder in the "Report Head-
ers" resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 75 for your own report headers. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "New Report Header". The Report Tem-
plates Editor, page 1168 displays and you can now
define your own report headers.

714 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

Machines
The "Machines" tab is independent of the open job.
You can use it as an archive for existing machine
resources.
The machine resources are shown in a clear tree
structure. You can create group folders for your own
machines using the context-sensitive menu. You can
edit, copy, delete and resave machine resources.
All the workstations can work with the same data sets
if the default folders for machine resources are filed
on a server and assigned to the program. See also
Default Folder, page 48.
Note: The "Standard" folder in the group folders is a
2 read-only folder that contains shipped machine
resources that cannot be changed. The machine
resources are used only as templates and must be
saved, if necessary, in user-specific group folders.

Creating Custom Machines

The following procedure is recommended for creat-
ing your own machines:
1. Create your own platesetter.
2. Select the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs & Resources >
Resources & Machines" menu.
3. Mark the "Platesetters" folder and display the context-
sensitive menu.
4. Select "New Group" in the context-sensitive menu and
give it a name that you will confirm with the Enter
key.
5. Open the "Standard" group folder.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 715

Resources and Machines ABC

6. Mark the "Suprasetter" standard resource and display

the context-sensitive menu.
7. Select "Copy Platesetter Data Set" in the context-sensi-
tive menu.
8. Now mark the new group you created and display the
context-sensitive menu.
9. Select "Paste Platesetter Data Set" in the context-sensi-
tive menu.
10. The "Suprasetter" platesetter data set is pasted and
you can now double-click it to edit and save it in the
Platesetter Editor.

Functionality
You trigger the functions in the "Machines" tab only
with the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
0 To import resources
Display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Machines" tab and select "Machine...".

Select the machine you wish to import. Prinect

Signa Station automatically recognizes the type of
machine you selected and presents you with only
those groups that are located in that path so that
you can save the machine. Read the section named
"To create a group folder" if you still haven't cre-
ated one.
0 Refresh

716 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

Updates the currently selected machine path if

you are working in a network.
The system looks for new or deleted groups and
machines in the currently selected path. If new or
deleted groups/machines are detected, the num-
ber found is displayed and the first element in the
list is named.
The machines are available afterwards.
0 Refresh Machines and Resources
Updates all machine and resources path if you are
working in a network.
The system looks for new or deleted groups and
machines/resources globally in all paths. If new or
deleted groups/resources/machines are detected,
the number found is displayed and the first ele-
ment in the list is named.
The resources/machines are available afterwards.
0 A double click on existing machines opens the edi-
tor responsible for the machine.
0 The following function is found in the context-sen-
sitive menu when a group folder is selected (top
level in tree structure):
0 To create a group folder
To be able to create a machine, you must first
set up your own group folder where you can
save it.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 717

Resources and Machines ABC

You can save a machine to the new group

folder you created using the context-sensitive
menu in the "Machines" tab.
0 Refresh
Updates the currently selected machine path if
you are working in a network.
The system looks for new or deleted groups and
machines in the currently selected path. If new
or deleted groups/machines are detected, the
number found is displayed and the first ele-
ment in the list is named.
The machines are available afterwards.
0 The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when the folder is selected (second
level in tree structure):
0 Rename Group
You can give the group folder a different name.
0 Delete Group
The selected group folder is deleted. You can
only delete empty group folders.
0 New "press data set"
Displays the relevant editor for creating a new
machine data set.
0 Paste press data set"
A machine data set copied beforehand is
pasted to the selected group folder.
This function is only enabled if a machine data
set was copied and is to be added to a plausible
level in the tree structure (you cannot copy a
filmsetter resource to a platesetter resource).

718 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

0 "Import press data set"

You can import a Prinect Signa Station press
data set to one of your custom press groups.
0 "Export Group"
"Don't Unpack"
The elements of the selected group are copied
to the defined folder.
"Unpack"
The elements of the selected group are copied
to the defined folder.
A separate folder is created for each exported
machine. A ".html" file is filed with the actual
machine. This file shows the machine data.
0 "Lock/Unlock Group"
Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser"
groups can lock or unlock group folders for
other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock
groups he/she locked. You can find more
details about User Management in the User's
Guide.
0 The following functions are found in the context-
sensitive menu when machines are selected (third
level in tree structure):
0 "Rename press data set"
You can give the press data set a different
name.
0 "Edit press data set"
Displays the editor responsible for the selected
machine.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 719

Resources and Machines ABC

0 "New press data set"

Displays the relevant editor without any
machine parameters for creating a new
machine data set.
0 "Delete press data set"
The selected machine is deleted.
0 "Copy press data set"
The selected machine data set is copied and
afterwards can be added with "Paste Press Data
Set", for example, to another folder.
Note: You can copy a "machine data set" in a
2 read-only Standard folder and paste it then to a
folder you created (that is not write-protected).
In this folder, you can modify and save the
"machine data set" as you want.
0 "Lock/unlock press data set"
Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser"
groups can lock or unlock machines for other
users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock machines
he/she locked. You can find more details about
User Management in the User's Guide.

Filmsetters
You will find shipped Heidelberg filmsetter data sets
in the "Standard" folder in the "Filmsetters" machine
resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 717 for your own filmsetters. Mark the
new folder, display the context-sensitive menu and
select "New Filmsetter Properties". The Filmsetter and
Platesetter Editors, page 1170 displays and you can
now define your own filmsetter.

720 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

Platesetters
You will find shipped Heidelberg platesetter data sets
in the "Standard" folder in the "Platesetters" machine
resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 717 for your own platesetters. Mark the
new folder, display the context-sensitive menu and
select "New Platesetter Properties". The Filmsetter and
Platesetter Editors, page 1170 displays and you can
now define your own platesetter.

Sheetfed Presses
You will find shipped Heidelberg sheetfed press data
sets in the "Standard" folder in the "Sheetfed Presses"
machine resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 717 for your own sheetfed presses. Mark
the new folder, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "New Sheetfed Press Properties". The Sheet-
fed Press Editor, page 1172 displays and you can now
define your own sheetfed press.

Web Presses
You will find shipped Heidelberg web press data sets
in the "Standard" folder in the "Web Presses" machine
resource.
Create a folder as described in To create a group
folder, page 717 for your own web presses. Mark the
new folder, display the context-sensitive menu and
select "New Web Press Properties". The Web Press Edi-
tor, page 1173 displays and you can now define your
own web press.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 721

Resources and Machines ABC

MDS
The "MDS" tab is only active if you enabled "Show MDS
Resources as Table" in "File > Preferences > Import".
This tab shows all available MDS resources in a clear
structure.
The MDS resources display in the usual folder struc-
ture if the check box is not enabled.
This modification is designed solely for an easy, clear
view of the MDS resources.
Old view

722 Edition March 2010

ABC Resources and Machines

New view

Prinect Signa Station Reference 723

ABC Graphic Window

8 Graphic Window

Graphic Functionality
The graphic view has five tabs showing you five differ-
ent views of the job currently selected.
The graphic view changes according to the tab you
selected ("Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block", " Page List", "Press Sheet List" and "Document"),
allowing you to check and edit the selected job.
To edit a job, you can display the inspector for the
part shown in the graphic view using the context-sen-
sitive menu. The context-sensitive menu presents the
inspector that matches the tab you are in. A change in
the inspectors window is also immediately seen in
the graphic window.
You can drag-and-drop elements from the Browser
window ("Contents" tab) and list window to the
graphic window and place marks from the Press
Sheet / Folding Sheet / Page Inspectors to the graphic
window. Dragging-and-dropping to the graphic win-
dow is an elementary step in the workflow. You can
find more details about drag-and-drop in What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.
Each of the tabs has practical graphic tools. More
details can be found in Graphic Tools, page 81.
On the pages which follow, you will learn how to han-
dle the graphic tools and about the wide range of
functions that you can use in each tab.

Graphic Tools

Measured Data
The measured data are shown in the "Press Sheet",
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Document" tabs.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 81

Graphic Window ABC

The "X", "Y" coordinates show the current mouse cur-

sor position. You can set a measuring position or cre-
ate a frame with the shortcut "command key + Shift
key" while holding down the mouse button. The val-
ues in "W" and "H" refer to the width and height of the
frame.

Channel
The color channel is shown in the "Press Sheet", "Fold-
ing Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Document" tabs.

The "Channel" list box shows you which colors are

used on the active press sheet, folding sheet/assembly
block or single page.
You must have an imported, separated PDF file for the
multi-channel display to work.
To check single separations and any spot colors, select
the separation/spot color you want to check in the list
box. The selected color is displayed.
All colors are displayed when you select "colored"
(composite view).
Default setting: colored

82 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

Zoom
The zoom is shown in the "Press Sheet", "Folding
Sheet/Assembly Block", "Press Sheet List" and "Docu-
ment" tabs.

The "Zoom" list box shows you the zoom factor in

which the press sheet, the press sheet list, the folding
sheet/assembly block or single page will be displayed.
To change the zoom factor, select the one you want
from the list box or mark the box and type in a value.
"Auto" automatically calculates and shows the largest
possible full size of the press sheet or folding sheet/
assembly block in the window.
Default setting: Auto(matic)

Standard Tools

To select an object. Click an object that can be

selected. This object then has a yellow frame and you
can move it holding down the mouse button.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 83

Graphic Window ABC

To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the

magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom
down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass. You can
scale up a certain part of your work by drawing a
bounding box.
Hand tool: Lets you move scaled-up objects into the
view frame. Click and move the mouse to do so. You
can also select the tool by holding down the space
bar and clicking the mouse.
To set a measuring point and create a frame: This
tool lets you set measuring points or create a frame
and read off the values in the read-only boxes on the
bottom left. You can now also create internal marks
the size of the frame you created. See Creating Inter-
nal Marks, page 88 for details.
As an alternative to the tool: "command key + Shift
key"

84 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

User-defined dimensions:
This tool lets you measure from one defined edge
(e.g. paper edge, page edge, etc.) to another defined
edge.
Example:
You are going to measure the distance between the
edge of a page and that of the paper.
0
Move the mouse pointer to the page edge.
0
The starting edge is shown as a red bar.
0
Hold down the mouse button and drag the
mouse pointer to the paper edge.
0
The target edge is shown as a green bar.
0
Let go of the mouse button.
0
The distance from the page edge to the paper
edge is shown along a line between the red and
green bar.
Note: The "Dimensions" option below "View Prop-
erties" must be enabled.
0
Use the shortcut "Alt + click" to delete the dimen-
sions.
Dimensions on/off:
Click this tool to show or hide the values of the "user-
defined dimensions" tool (see above). All the parame-
ters enabled in "View Properties > Dimensions" are
also shown. See View Properties and Enable/Disable
Layers, page 86 for details.

Front/Back

The "white" button lets you view the front and back
sheets side by side. The "green" and "yellow" buttons
let you view the front or back sheet respectively.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 85

Graphic Window ABC

You can trigger the same function as the "white" but-

ton with a double click on the colored caption bar of
the front or back sheet. See Mouse and Keyboard
Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 24.

View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers

Click the "View Properties" button to display a dialog

where you can configure the way the graphic window
will appear on your screen.
The "View", "Dimensions" and "Grid" tabs are available
for the configuration of the graphic window.
The "Save as Default" button at the lower part of the
window lets you save a setting immediately in the
preferences. This setting is effective even after the
program is exited.
Note: When you work with several languages, the
2 active layer is displayed in the "View" tab.

Select the layer you want if several layers can be

shown. The active layer is shown directly in the
graphic window. Several or even all the layers can be
shown.
Files are imported to different layers in the Browser
window > "Contents". You will find an example in the
User's Guide.

86 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

In the "View" tab, you can show or hide the following

items in the graphic window:
0
Contents of Page/1up
The page content appears as a preview.
You can cut down computing time if the contents
are hidden in documents with a large number of
pages.
0
Outline mode display
You can hide all symbols that are not relevant for
output.
0
Imaging Window
The blue-and-white line is shown or hidden.
0
Tiling Numbers
0
Background Marks
0
Foreground Marks
0
Ruler
0
Ink Zones
The ink zones defined for a press are shown as
lines. The press selected in the plate template is
taken as the basis for this. The values for "Number"
and "Width" in "Ink Zones" in the Press Editor are
used.
This functionality facilitates the positioning of
color control bars, for example.
Default: All the parameters with the exception of the
ink zones are shown.

In the "Dimensions" tab, you can show size data for the
following parameters in the graphic window:
The size data shown can also be displayed in different
colors. To do this, click the color button and change
the colors, using the sliders, to the color you want.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 87

Graphic Window ABC

Press Sheet
0
Paper Position
0
Paper Size
0
Subject Position
0
Subject Size
0
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Positions
0
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Size
0
Page/1up Positions
0
Positioning across folding sheets
0
Page/1up Size
0
User-defined
Displays "User-defined dimensions:, page 85".
0
Shows small values
Also shows very small measured data.
Default: Dimensions are hidden.

In the "Grid" tab, you can show a grid in the graphic win-
dow:
You can set the size (in the selected unit of measure)
and the color of the grid.
The grid is not magnetic and is only a visual aid.
Default: Grid is hidden.

Creating Internal Marks

The "Frame" tool (display with the shortcut "com-
mand key + Shift key") lets you create all Prinect Signa
Station mark types as internal marks. The bounding
box defines the position and size of the mark.

88 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

You can use the following marks tools in the graphic

window to create "internal marks". These internal
marks are not filed in the marks resources and are
only available in the current job.
You will find the marks that are assigned to the job in
the "Browser window > Internal Resources" or in the
relevant inspectors in the "Marks" tab.
To add an "internal mark" to the global resources, go
to the "Browser window > Internal Resources", select
the mark and display the context-sensitive menu.
Select "Copy Internal Mark to Clipboard" and paste
the mark in "Marks Resources" in an inspector with
"Paste Mark".

Marks Editor

This tool allows you to display the Marks Editor the

size of a rectangle you created beforehand and to cre-
ate and position a mark. See the Marks Editor,
page 1131 to learn how this function works.

Text mark

This tool allows you to create and position a text

mark the size of a rectangle you created beforehand.
0 Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle
whose size and position are that of the text mark
you want. (To do this, press the command and
Shift keys and create the rectangle holding down
the left mouse button. Release the mouse button
first).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 89

Graphic Window ABC

0
When the rectangle is created, a toolbar appears
at the bottom of the graphic window.
0
Click the text mark button.
0
The Text Mark Editor opens, displaying a text
mark the size of the rectangle you created. See Cre-
ating a Text Mark, page 1138 for details on what
to do next.

Creating an ink pickup bar

This tool allows you to create and position an ink

pickup bar the size of a rectangle you created before-
hand. See the Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool,
page 1321 to learn how this function works.

Creating a cover mark and other internal marks

This tool button allows you to create a cover mark, a

cutting die mark, a line type mark for the glue area. a
color control bar or a special color control bar. You
can also import a mark that you can then create and
position and whose size is defined by the frame you
created beforehand.
0 Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle
whose size and position are that of the mark you
want. (To do this, press the command and Shift
keys and create the rectangle holding down the
left mouse button. Release the mouse button first).

810 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

0
When the rectangle is created, you are now able to
use the above tool button at the bottom of the
graphic window.
0
Select the tool you need.
0
If you are creating cover marks, see Cover Marks
(Job-internal Cover Mark / "CoverClippath"),
page 1317, Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines,
page 1321 and Define cover mark from line type
for glue area, page 1321. In the other cases, the
Marks Editor, page 1131, the Color Control Bar
Editor, page 1147, the Color Control Bar Special
Editor, page 1149 or the Marks Import Editor,
page 1151 displays, depending on what you
selected, where you can then edit your mark. The
mark displays in the size you created the rectan-
gle.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 811

Graphic Window ABC

Press Sheet
The "Press Sheet" tab shows you a graphic of the press
sheet of the product part currently selected, with all
the objects placed on the press sheet.
You need the Press Sheet Inspector to edit a press
sheet. The Press Sheet Inspector displays when you
double-click the press sheet (or select it in the con-
text-sensitive menu). A change in the inspectors win-
dow is also immediately seen in the graphic window.
You can display other press sheets in the product part
by double-clicking them in the Browser window or
list window. A simple click on a press sheet is enough
if the graphic window is already active.

Functionality
0
Display of the press sheet with the option of show-
ing front and back at the same time. See Tile Front
/ Back, page 827 for details.
0
Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping
them from the Browser window or list window.
For more details, see the User's Guide or What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.
0
Import of pages to different layers. See View Prop-
erties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 86 for
details.
0
Creation of "internal marks" for the job currently
open. See Creating Internal Marks, page 88 for
details.

812 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

0
Configuration of the graphic view as you like it
and display of the units of measure for objects. See
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers,
page 86 for details.
0
Selection of color layers. See Channel, page 826
for details.
0
Setting zero on the ruler
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.
0
Working with measurement tools.
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.
0
Setting magnetic snap lines
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu

The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet"
tab in the graphic window:
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Print Press Sheet..."
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print
Job ..., page 1217 window displays.
0
"Align"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Montage"
working mode.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 813

Graphic Window ABC

You must have selected at least two assembly

blocks. You align them based on the first assembly
block you selected.
You select and deselect assembly blocks with the
shortcut "command key + mouse click".
You can align to the top, bottom, left and right.
0
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector"
Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 966
or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 980 in the
inspectors window.
0
Falzbgen/Montageblcke neu anordnen...
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Imposi-
tion" and "Montage" working modes.
The folding sheets/assembly blocks can be rear-
ranged automatically but also manually by enter-
ing gap data.
0
"Swap Front and Back Folding Sheet"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Imposi-
tion" and "Montage" working modes. Front and
back must also have been defined. This function is
not designed for "Work-and-tumble" or "Work-and-
turn".
You can, for example, match plates to certain col-
ors with this function.
0
"Swap Folding Sheet"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Imposi-
tion" working mode.
You can, for example, match plates to certain col-
ors with this function.
0
Falzbogen verschieben

814 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Imposi-

tion" working mode.
You can, for example, match plates to certain col-
ors with this function.
0
"Delete folding sheet/assembly block"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Imposi-
tion" and "Montage" working modes.
Deletes the active folding sheet/assembly block.
0
"Create new assembly block"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Montage"
work mode.
Creates a new assembly block. This function is
identical to that in the Assembly Block Inspector,
page 980.
0
"Duplicate Assembly Block"
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Montage"
work mode.
The active assembly block with all its contents is
duplicated. The duplicated assembly block lies
directly on top of the original assembly block.
0
"Fit Marks and Bleeds"
Prinect Signa Station checks the spacing between
the folding sheets or assembly blocks on the
selected press sheet. Any cut marks and/or bleed
on adjacent blocks are automatically deleted.
It's a good idea to use this function after moving
blocks manually because overlapping elements
can be overlooked in the graphic window.
In addition, the color control mark is fit to the
subject (AutoClip to subject).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 815

Graphic Window ABC

0
"Marks"
"Enable Clip Path"
The clip path of a mark is now active and dis-
played accordingly. A mark with a clip path is
highlighted by a blue line. The clip path is high-
lighted by a green/black line if a mark is selected.
"Disable Clip Path"
The clip path of a selected mark is ignored.
"Edit Mark..."
You can open and edit a selected mark with the
relevant editor for that mark.
You will find more details about the various
marks editors in the chapter "Editors, page 111"
or in the chapter "Working with Marks" in the
User's Guide.
Marke duplizieren
You can duplicate one or more selected marks.
The "Duplicate Mark..." window opens where you
can enter the following data:
- Number of copies you want to create
- Offset of the copies in horizontal direction (X)
- Offset of the copies in vertical direction (Y)
It's also possible to enter negative values for an off-
set.
"Delete Mark"
The mark you selected is deleted after you confirm
an alert message.

816 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

0
"Graphic"
"Save as..."
You can save the current press sheet as a graphic
file in the Portable Network Graphics Format
(.png).
"Print..."
You can output a copy of the current press sheet to
a printer.
"Print All..."
You can output a copy of each press sheet in the
job to a printer.
0
"Preview"
Generates previews (72 dpi) of the pages. You can
set general view properties. See Preview
Attributes, page 429 for details.
0
"Hires Preview"
Generates high-resolution previews (144 dpi) of
the pages. You can set general view properties. See
Hires Preview, page 429 for details.
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the
job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer have any
assigned content.
0
"Paste Pages from Clipboard"
If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to the
clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the Browser win-
dow, you can paste it in anywhere you want. See
"Paste Pages from Clipboard", page 69 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 817

Graphic Window ABC

0
Nutzennummer zuweisen...
Prerequisite: Can only be selected in the "Montage"
and "Packaging" working modes.
The function only works in conjunction with the
"StationNumber" mark. See Step 1: Assigning the
"StationNumber" mark to the 1up, page 1313
and Step 2: Assigning the station numbers,
page 1314 to learn how to use and handle this
function.

Display and Functions

818 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

1. Blue-and-white line
Marks the maximum imaging window. The imaging
window is based on the properties of the selected
filmsetter or platesetter types.
2. Gray area (color can be selected)
Marks the plate size. This is based on the plate size
defined in the plate template.
3. White area (color can be selected)
Marks the defined paper size. The paper size is
defined in the Product Part Inspector in the "Plates"
tab.
4. Green line
Marks the defined paper margin (cut block) of the
folding sheets / assembly blocks.
5. Blue line
Marks the lead edge of print (baseline + gripper mar-
gin)
6. Red bars (color can be selected)
Marks the critical printed area.
7. White punches
Displays the press punches. The punches are only
symbolic and don't reflect the shape they really have
at the press.
8. Yellow line (not in the screenshot)
An object is selected and shown with a yellow frame
when you click in the graphic window.
An object can be a folding sheet, assembly block, page
or a mark.
Example:
You first select a folding sheet in the graphic window
> "Press Sheet". After this, you can select a page on the
folding sheet with another click.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 819

Graphic Window ABC

9. Dark gray area (pages)

Marks the page (imposition) or 1up (montage). The
light gray area around the page or 1up indicates the
trim.
10. Page numbers
0
White/black numbers: The page number is white
if pages are not assigned and with a gray back-
ground. The page number is black if pages with or
without a preview are assigned. Magenta marks
without a preview.
0
Green page number: The page numbers of special
master pages and tiles are green to tell them apart
more easily.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block

In the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab, you will
see the first folding sheet or assembly block of the job
currently selected, with all the marks relating to the
folding sheet.
You need the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector
to edit a folding sheet/assembly block. You can display
the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector using the
context-sensitive menu in this tab.
You can also display the Page/1up Inspector if you
selected a page/1up on a folding sheet/assembly
block.
A change in the inspectors window is also immedi-
ately seen in the graphic window.
You can display other folding sheets/assembly blocks
in the job by double-clicking them in the Browser
window or list window.

820 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

The "clip path" tool is enabled if a 1up is selected in a

packaging job ("Packaging" working mode). See the
chapter Packaging, page 131 for information about
working with the "clip path" tool.

Functionality
0
Display of the folding sheet or assembly block
with the option of showing front and back at the
same time. See Tile Front / Back, page 827 for
details.
0
Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping
them from the Browser window or list window.
For more details, see the User's Guide or What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.
0
Import of pages to different layers. See View Prop-
erties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 86 for
details.
0
Editing a packaging job with the "clip path" tool.
See the chapter Packaging, page 131 for details.
0
Creation of "internal marks" for the job currently
open. See Creating Internal Marks, page 88 for
details.
0
Configuration of the graphic view as you like it
and display of the units of measure for objects. See
View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers,
page 86 for details.
0
Selection of color layers. See Channel, page 826
for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 821

Graphic Window ABC

0
Setting zero on the ruler
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.
0
Working with measurement tools.
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.
0
Setting magnetic snap lines
See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic
Window, page 220.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu

The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window:
0
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector"
Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 966
or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 980 in the
inspectors window.
0
"Page/1up Inspector"
Displays the Page/1up Inspector, page 991 in the
inspectors window.
0
"Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector, page 998 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.

822 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

0
"Hires Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Hires Preview, page 429
for details.
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) or
1up(s) in the job. The pages or 1ups in the job no
longer have any assigned content.
0
"Paste Pages from Clipboard"
You can paste the selected page/1up that you cop-
ied to the clipboard, for example, in the "Job" tab >
"Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page
List" tab to anywhere you want.
0
"Clip Path (Packaging)"
You can select this function in the "Packaging"
mode and in the "Montage" mode if the "Packag-
ing" option is enabled. See Editing the Clip Path,
page 136 for details.
0
"Create New Profile"
This function can only be selected in the "Packag-
ing" mode. See the Functions in a 1up Context-sen-
sitive Menu, page 1310.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 823

Graphic Window ABC

0
Change or Create Station Number...
This function makes it easy for you to rearrange
the 1ups to match any changes made to a job.
Mark the 1ups you wish to change. The possible
station indices display in a list box. You have two
options here. Change the selected 1up(s) to an
existing station number or select the last index in
the list and use it to create a new station number.
The "Adjust Back Automatically" check box also
gives you the option of assigning a station index
automatically to the back as well. The station
index of the back then always corresponds to that
of the front plus 1.
0
"Marks"
"Edit Mark..."
You can open and edit a selected mark with the
relevant editor for that mark.
You will find more details about the various
marks editors in the chapter "Editors, page 111"
or in the chapter "Working with Marks" in the
User's Guide.
Duplicate Mark
You can duplicate one or more selected marks.
The "Duplicate Mark..." window opens where you
can enter the following data:
- Number of copies you want to create
- Offset of the copies in horizontal direction (X)
- Offset of the copies in vertical direction (Y)
It's also possible to enter negative values.

824 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

"Delete Mark"
The mark you selected is deleted after you confirm
an alert message.
0
"Graphic"
"Save as..."
You can save the current folding sheet/assembly
block as a graphic file in the Portable Network
Graphics Format (.png).
"Print..."
You can output a copy of the current press sheet to
a printer.
"Print All..."
You can output a copy of each press sheet in the
job to a printer.
0
3D View
This function is no longer necessary as a result of
migrating to the PDF 3D format (automatic 3D dis-
play). This requires Adobe Acrobat as of version 9
and that you have purchased a license for "Prinect
Signa Station Packaging Pro".

"Assign Station Numbers..."

Can only be selected in the "Montage" and "Packag-
ing" working modes. The function only works in
conjunction with the "StationNumber" mark. See
Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the
1up, page 1313 and Step 2: Assigning the station
numbers, page 1314 to learn how to use and
handle this function.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 825

Graphic Window ABC

0
Open Folding Sheet Animation
This displays the folding sheet animation of the
active product part. See Folding Sheet Animation
with Data Pages, page 1227 for details.

Display and Functions

Measured Data
See Measured Data, page 81 for details.

Channel
See Channel, page 82 for details.

826 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

Zoom
See Zoom, page 83 for details.

Tile Front / Back

See the Front/Back, page 85.

View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers

See the View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers,

page 86.

Display the Marks Editor

See the Marks Editor, page 1131.

Creating a Text Mark

See the Text mark, page 89.

Creating an ink pickup bar

See the Creating an ink pickup bar, page 810.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 827

Graphic Window ABC

Creating a cover mark and other internal marks

See the Creating a cover mark and other internal

marks, page 810.

Move Content Data

Only in the "Packaging" mode if the "Packaging"

option is enabled.
The cursor changes when you click this tool, and you
can position the content of the 1up as required by
clicking and moving it.

Define line type for the clip path

Only in the "Packaging" mode if the "Packaging"

option is enabled. See the chapter Packaging,
page 131 for details.

Define cover mark from line type for glue area

Only in the "Packaging" mode if the "Packaging"

option is enabled. See the chapter Packaging,
page 131 for details.

828 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

Clip Path Tool

Only in the "Packaging" mode and in the "Montage"

mode if the "Packaging" option is enabled. See the
chapter Packaging, page 131 for details.

User-defined dimensions

See the User-defined dimensions:, page 85.

Page List
The "Page List" tab shows you in graphic form all the
pages defined for the selected product part. The pages
are shown as empty pages if contents were not yet
assigned or as previews after they were assigned con-
tents.
The page list does not show the pages on the press
sheet or folding sheet but only the content of the
placeholders.

Functionality
0
Deletion of page assignments using the context-
sensitive menu.
0
View of the assigned PDF file in the PDF reader.
Double click on the preview.
0 Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping
them from the Browser window or list window.
For more details, see the User's Guide or What's
Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 151.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 829

Graphic Window ABC

0
Import of pages to different layers. See View Prop-
erties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 86 for
details.
0
"Pages per Row": Selection of how many pages are
to be shown side by side in a row.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu

The following functions are available when you click
a page/1up and display the context-sensitive menu in
the "Page List" tab in the graphic window:
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with
Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables,
page 49.
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the
job. The pages in the job no longer have any
assigned content.
0
"Paste Pages from Clipboard"
You can paste the selected page/1up that you cop-
ied to the clipboard, for example, in the "Job" tab >
"Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page
List" tab to anywhere you want.
You can also use this function in the Browser win-
dow using the context-sensitive menu in "Jobs >
Page List" >.

830 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

0
"Assign Blank Page"
Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
matic Imposition" working modes.
A blank page is pasted before the selected page.
The page size defined in the scheme is used auto-
matically. The subsequent pages with their con-
tents shift back one page.
This method is used when, for example, blank
pages that were not in the PDF document must be
pasted to certain positions.
You can also use this function in the Browser win-
dow using the context-sensitive menu in "Jobs >
Page List" >.
0
Show Page in Press Sheet
This shows the first press sheet on which the
selected page is positioned. This function is
designed to help you check a page if changes to it
are made.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 831

Display

Pages per Row

Selection of how many pages are to be shown side by
side in a row.

Press Sheet List

Display of all the press sheets for front and back print-
ing of the product part currently shown.
All the press sheets in the job are shown if "All Press
Sheets" is set.
ABC Graphic Window

Functionality
0
Selection of a press sheet for viewing or editing in
the "Press Sheet" tab.
Double-click the press sheet you want to display it
in the "Press Sheet" tab for viewing and, if neces-
sary, editing it. The Press Sheet Inspector also dis-
plays
0
Output of a selected press sheet (highlighted by a
yellow frame) via the context-sensitive menu.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu

The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet
List" tab in the graphic window:
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Print Press Sheet..."
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print
Job ..., page 1217 window displays.
0
"Print Product Part..."
Prints the currently selected product part. The
Print Job ..., page 1217 window displays.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 833

Graphic Window ABC

Display and Function

Zoom
See Zoom, page 83 for details.

In the press sheet list, the auto display is set perma-

nently to 8% in contrast to all other tabs.

Tool bar
See Graphic Tools, page 81 for details.

All Press Sheets

This shows the press sheets of all product parts in the
job.

834 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

Document
Display of the single PDF document pages in the job
or imported PDF document pages in the Browser win-
dow.
You can view the single pages of a PDF file in the "Doc-
uments" tab and, if necessary, correct the trimmed
size.

Functionality
0
The trim box has a blue-and-white frame when it
displays, and you can change it interactively. You
can position the selected trim box (yellow frame)
by clicking and moving it to any position you
want or you can make it bigger or smaller. You can
see the data of these changes in the Document
Inspector in the "Page" tab. See Document Inspec-
tor, page 998 for details.
0
The Document Inspector displays when you dou-
ble-click a page so that you can edit it.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu

The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Document"
tab in the graphic window:
0 "Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector, page 998 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 835

Graphic Window ABC

0
"Hires Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Hires Preview, page 429
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with
Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables,
page 49.

Display and Functions

Measured Data
See Measured Data, page 81 for details.

836 Edition March 2010

ABC Graphic Window

Channel
See Channel, page 82 for details.

Zoom
See Zoom, page 83 for details.

Tool bar
See Graphic Tools, page 81 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 837

ABC Inspectors Window

9 Inspectors Window

Where You Can Select Inspectors

0 In the menu bar > "Inspectors"
0 Directly in the toolbar
0 In the Browser window either with the context-
sensitive menu of a selected item or a double click
on the selected item
0 In the graphic view, with the context-sensitive
menu in certain displays or by double-clicking a
selected section.
0
In the list view, in certain tabs, by selecting a row
in the list and then selecting the item in the con-
text-sensitive menu.

Details in the Inspectors

There are eight inspectors. Each inspector has its own
special task. For example, the Job Inspector is
designed for administrative tasks and consequently
can be used for all jobs. The Product Part Inspector
contains data for the selected product part. In other
words, the data are applicable not just for one press
sheet or folding sheet but for all such sheets in the
product part.
You can, of course, make changes to single elements
in the Folding Sheet, Press Sheet or Page Inspector
and then apply them to all the elements in the prod-
uct part. A summary of the details can be found in the
following inspector descriptions:

Job Inspector
Opening an existing job template
Administrative data about the job and customer.
Info boxes showing the "customer number" and job

Prinect Signa Station Reference 91

Inspectors Window ABC

history.
Input for the new versioning with the "Versions" box.
Setting the colors that will be printed in the JDF work-
flow.
Information about the separation colors in the job.
Configure attributes as placeholders

Product Part Inspector

Six tabs can display, depending on the working mode
you selected. The tabs correspond to the six successive
steps in the Job Assistant (the "General" tab is the
same as that in the Job Inspector). Only the "General"
and "Plates" tabs appear in the "Montage" working
mode. The "General", "Plates" and "Packaging" tabs
appear in the "Packaging" working mode.
0
General
Opening an existing product part template
Input of job details for each product part
Details about the work mode in the product part:
Imposition: Only with a set number of pages
Automatic Imposition: Imposing without a set
number of pages
Montage: Creating assembly sheets
Packaging: Creating a packaging job
Defining the start conditions (press sheet, folding
sheet and pages)
Naming the pages
0
Master Pages
Details about the page type, trimmed size, addi-
tional space, trim and positioning of the pages.
0
Binding
Details about the binding methods
Details about creeping
Automatic bottling
Details about the gripper saddlestitcher

92 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Definition of a cover bonding or glue line

Setting parameters for automatic gap computa-
tion
Assignment of cut blocks
0
Marks
Setting and removing automatic marks (e.g. cut
marks, folding marks) with a "click" on the appro-
priate check boxes
Colors and scaling for automatic marks
Data for Collating Mark
Fixed cut marks
0
Plates
Opening of a product part template
Selection and display of plate templates
Plate template as a gang run form
Selection of the placement rule for the back (sin-
gle side, work-and-tumble, work-and-turn)
Paper definition
Position of the subject
0
Schemes
Selection of schemes
Details about page spacing and gaps
Assigning special master pages
Defining the folding sheet order
Creating folding sheet groups
Details about bottling (from the "Binding" tab)
Creating the gang run form
Press Sheet Layout
0
Packaging
Selection of the CFF2 file
Information about the profiles and setting the
profiles required
Definition of the placement rule for the 1up
Launching the licensed "Packaging Pro" option

Prinect Signa Station Reference 93

Inspectors Window ABC

Folding Sheet Inspector

Details about the folding sheet/folding scheme. You
can enter/change some of the parameters such as the
folding sheet name, positioning, sheet sizes and page
spacing and gaps.
You can copy settings of the current folding sheet to
similar folding sheets.
Details about the marks on the folding sheet are also
displayed. You can add, change and delete marks.

Assembly Block Inspector

Details about the assembly block and 1up. You can
enter/change some of the parameters such as the
assembly block name, copies, positioning, 1up for-
mat and placement rules.
Details about the marks on the assembly block are
also displayed. You can add, change and delete marks.
Cut marks can be created automatically.

Press Sheet Inspector

Details about the press sheet. You can enter/change
some of the parameters such as the sheet name, plate
width, press sheet data like the number of colors
used, selected template and paper sizes and center
offset.
In addition, there is a list with the folding sheets/
assembly blocks assigned to the press sheet and their
details.
You can copy settings of the current press sheet to
similar press sheets.
Details about the marks on the press sheet are also
displayed. You can add, change and delete marks.

94 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

The Press Sheet Inspector has special control ele-

ments for optimization of jobs that were created with
the "Sheet Optimizer" option enabled. See Sheet Opti-
mization, page 141 for details.
The Press Sheet Inspector has options for modifying
versions preallocated for output if you have jobs that
were created with the enhanced versioning function.
See Version Preallocated for Versioned Output (Ver-
sioning Only), page 988 for details.

Page/1up Inspector
Details about the trim size, about working with dif-
ferent layers and creeping.
Individual placement options for page and 1up con-
tents.
You can copy the placement settings of the current
page to all pages of the product part.

Details about the marks on the press sheet are also

displayed. You can add, change and delete marks.

Document Inspector
Details about the PDF documents assigned to the job,
e.g. name, size, number of pages and separations in a
document.
Details about the trimmed size and separation colors
for every data page.
Placement rule in the placeholder (offset, orienta-
tion).

Packaging Inspector
See section Product Part Inspector - "Packaging" tab,
page 132 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 95

Inspectors Window ABC

Parameters of the Inspectors in Prinect Signa Station

The inspectors are the main control elements for cre-
ating a job in Prinect Signa Station. The changes you
make in the inspectors always affect all the parts in
the job.
You can find some parameters at several different
places in Prinect Signa Station, for example, data
about the folding sheet/folding scheme or press
sheet/plate:
0
In the relevant inspectors, e.g. Folding Sheet
Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector
0
In the Product Part Inspector, in the Schemes,
Plates tabs
0
In the Job Assistant, in the successive steps, e.g.
folding schemes, plates
The inspectors are set up in the order you would nor-
mally work with.

When Do I Use What?

You can create a new job only with the Job Assistant.
You then use the inspectors to check and correct your
data or make additional specific settings.

96 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

You can also create just one part of the job with the
Job Assistant and generate certain parameters later
and then add them to the job, for example, a new
folding scheme with the Folding Scheme Editor.
In addition, you can also turn an existing job into a
new one with the inspectors. As you can see, you use
them as it suits you.

Job Inspector
Displays, for example, when you select "Job Inspector"
in the "Inspectors" menu.

Administrative Data

Job from Template

You can save the job data as a template. Do this in
the Browser window by calling up the context-sen-
sitive menu and selecting "Save job as 'Resources/
Job Templates'". You can then display this job
again with "Job from Template" or list it in
"Resources > Job Templates". The job template con-
tains all the Prinect Signa Station job data, except
for the job number, job name, customer name and
customer ID.

Job and customer

Job Number
By default, the job number is part of the full job name
and is used for finishing, e.g. in the JDF workflow
with the Prepress Manager and Prinect Prinance. It
can be made up of alphanumeric characters, e.g.
"49rs".

Prinect Signa Station Reference 97

Inspectors Window ABC

Job Name
Is used to spot a job easily and by default is part of the
full job name, e.g. "labelsSM102".

Customer Name
Is also used to spot a job and can be part of the full job
name.
Details about the customer. You can save customer
data as a template and call them up again when
required.
0
Folder button
You can save it as a template in "Choose Customer"
and call it up again with this button when
required.

Customer ID
Additional customer code (e.g. customer number).
The customer ID is not a default part of the full job
name.
0
Info box
Details about the customer.

Full job name

The full job name is made up as follows:
Job number_job name.extension
In our example, the full job name is as follows:
"49rs__LabelsSM102.sdf"

98 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Note: In "File > Preferences > Names" you can select

2 and add single placeholders in the "Job File Name"
group. Afterwards, these placeholders appear auto-
matically in the full job name. See Job File Name,
page 411 for details.

Job Details
Details about the target date, volume, number of lay-
ers and planned colors.
In addition, an enhanced versioning option was
added. If you select more than one layer, you can use
the many enhanced options in "Versions". Details of
this can be found in the User's Guide or below in Ver-
sion, page 910.
You can set the "target date" using a calendar that you
display by clicking the arrow on the right. Click the
arrow again to quit the calendar without changing
the date.

Number of Layers
In certain cases, PDF documents must be placed on
different layers so that they can be printed one on top
of the other in a job, for example, if it has several lan-
guages. The list box to the right will be enabled and
the layers displayed if you enter more than one layer.
You can now change a layer name in this box, e.g. by
entering the language. You can output this name on
the press sheet using a text mark. A maximum of 50
layers can be used.
You can assign the layers certain names in "Prefer-
ences > Names" that can then be used as default layer
names when you enter several layers in the Job
Inspector. You can change these names at any time in

Prinect Signa Station Reference 99

Inspectors Window ABC

the Job Inspector. You will find more details about

working with several layers in Default Layer Names,
page 49.
Example of a bilingual document:

Layers Level
Images Base
German Text
English Text

Level
"Level" is an additional identifier of the content of a
layer. It is not mandatory to enter it.
The "Level" parameter is submitted in the JDF work-
flow and, for example, allows proofing of the level in
question.

Version
The following description should help you decide
whether you will work with the new versioning as of
Prinect Signa Station 4.0 or whether you will use the
"old" layer versioning.
The new versioning variant is set if you enter a num-
ber greater than '1'. If you don't, the old method is
used, and the new functions do not appear in the user
interface.
New versioning:
The combination of "layers" and "versions" now gives
you a wide range of options. Click the button on the
right beside the option chooser. The "Version Editor"
opens.

910 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

You will see the defined "layers" in the left column.

The middle column shows the defined versions (it
does not have to be a language version). The right col-
umn shows the selected combination of layers in a
version.
After you mark a version, you can then assign the lay-
ers you want to the version or you can let them be
assigned automatically.
You will find an example with a detailed description
of the new functions in the User's Guide.

Prevent Resource Balancing

When this check box is enabled, the active job is
saved and its current, implemented resources are fro-
zen.
When you open the job later, the obligatory question
of "Update resources..." would not appear and there is
no update.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 911

Inspectors Window ABC

This setting can be useful for repeat jobs in order to

base your work on the original resources.

Default for JDF and job ticket

This option lets you define how many colors will be
used in printing when you create layouts in "JT" or
"JDF". For a PDF marks layer, the combi mark that
matches the colors set here is then used.
It only makes sense to define colors if no content
pages were positioned. If they were, the colors set for
the content pages are used during output.

History

Created on/Modified on
Prinect Signa Station shows the dates in these boxes.
You cannot change them.
0
Info box
Displays all the details about the job history.

Created by/Modified by
The name of the user logged in to Prinect Signa Sta-
tion appears automatically in this box. You cannot
change the name afterwards.

Job Notes
This box allows you to enter additional information
about a job. You can define the note as a text mark
placeholder. This allows you to position and print it
out. See Creating a Text Mark, page 1138 for details.

912 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Colors
List of the colors of all PDF pages placed on the press
sheets. This list is empty if no PDF page is placed so far
and all the press sheets are still empty. This is where
you define how layers will be output.

Color Definitions

Allow Spot Colors to BCMY

The handling of color control bars has been
enhanced. It is now possible to map spot colors to the
"BCMY" process color code when this option is
enabled. By doing this, you can avoid gaps in the con-
trol control bar.
Default: The option is set by default for new jobs, it is
disabled by default for existing jobs (older than ver-
sion 4.5).
Issues arose in the Heidelberg workflow due to a rigid
order of colors if a job did not have all the process col-
ors but spot colors as substitutes or even only had
spot colors.
Now it is possible that color mapping is done auto-
matically by Prinect Signa Station. In this process, the
spot colors are mapped to the BCMY placeholders.

Use Global Mark Color Mappings

"Global Mark Color Mappings" is disabled by default
when you create a new job.
When this option is disabled, color mapping of all the
press sheets with the relevant surfaces (front and
back) is done in the Press Sheet Inspector.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 913

Inspectors Window ABC

When the option is enabled, color mapping can be

done for the entire job, either automatically or man-
ually. In this case, you cannot use the function in the
Press Sheet Inspector.

Automatic Color Mapping

"Automatic Color Mapping" is the default setting. The
system automatically tries to avoid gaps in the color
control bar.

User-defined Color Mapping

The "Color Definitions" window displays. You can
now set all separation colors manually to mark color
placeholders. Click the "In mark" code and select the
link you want.
We recommend that you use "Automatic Color Map-
ping" in the workflow.

Available colors
Colors that are in the PDF pages assigned to the prod-
uct part.

output as
Click an element in this column to display the output
options for spot colors. This parameter lets you
replace spot colors by C, M, Y or K or by another spot
color in the PDF document and print them. In this
way, for example, you can replace similar looking
spot colors by another color, thus saving ink/inking
units.
0
as process colors
The spot color is converted to the process colors C,
M, Y and/or K that are written and printed to the
plates.

914 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

0
is ignored
The spot color is removed from the list and not
printed.

Ignore in Mark
Only if "Ignore in Mark" is enabled in "File > Prefer-
ences > General".
You can disable spot colors in marks manually. The
spot color is ignored in color control bars in combi
marks and also in the workflow with "Allow Spot Col-
ors to BCMY". See Column for "Ignore in Mark",
page 44 for details.

Dark
Only if "Column for Darkest Color" is enabled in "File
> Preferences > General". See Column for Darkest
Color, page 44 for details.

Cutting Die
Only if "Column for cutting die color" is enabled in
"File > Preferences > General". See Column for cutting
die color, page 43 for details.

Background color
Only if "Column for 'Background Colors" is enabled
in "File > Preferences > General". This is where you can
define which colors will be the background colors.
See "Background Colors":, page 1132 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 915

Inspectors Window ABC

Default Screen Angles

Default Screen Angles for RIPs

Settings in this group do not affect the Heidelberg
workflow (MetaDimension, etc.). The values are used
only when you output to third-party RIPs.
You can define the screen angle manually for each
single color in the color table that then appears (may
be necessary for some third-party workflows).
To change a color, click the "Angle" column and key
in the value you want.
The modified screen angle is taken into account dur-
ing output.

Attributes
You can define specific job attributes in "File > Prefer-
ences > Names". These display in this group and can
be filled with job-specific data. See Free Text Replacer
Names, page 411 for details.
Procedure:
Create a text mark with the Text Mark Editor, add, for
example, "FreeReplacer 1" or the name entered in
"File > Preferences > Names" ("printer") as the place-
holder. The relevant variable then appears, in our
example "$[FreeReplacer1]".

After you save the text mark, position it, for example,
on the folding sheet.

916 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

After you positioned the text mark, you can change

the placeholder text at any time in "Attributes" in the
Job Inspector. Simply type in your text that then auto-
matically appears immediately in the text mark. You
can check the modified text at once in the graphic
window.

This means that you can change the text of a text

mark at any time without having to first position a
new mark.

Product Part Inspector

When you create a new job, in the Job Assistant select
the working mode that you need for your product
part in the "Product Part Definition" tab. You can also
select a template from your resources with "Product
Part from Template, page 918". The following work-
ing modes are available: "Imposition, page 919",
"Automatic Imposition, page 920", "Montage,
page 921" and "Packaging, page 922".
The mode you select is shown in the "General" tab in
the Product Part Inspector.
The tabs that are displayed depend on the working
mode you selected.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 917

Inspectors Window ABC

Six tabs appear when you select "Imposition" or "Auto-

matic Imposition": "General", "Master Pages", "Bind-
ing", "Marks", "Plates" and "Schemes".
Only the "General" and "Plates" tabs appear when you
select "Montage".
The "General", "Plates" and "Packaging" tabs appear
when you select "Packaging".
The "General" and "Plates" tabs display in all the work-
ing modes.
Note: Individual changes you made to a product part
2 with other inspectors (e.g. folding sheet offset with
the Press Sheet Inspector) can be lost if you modify
this product part with the Product Part Inspector!
You should give much thought to how you will create
a product part, and only make changes to single
objects in the product part when you are sure that
you don't have to make any further inputs/changes
with the Product Part Inspector.

Definition

Product Part from Template

You can save the product part as a template. Do
this in the Browser window by calling up the con-
text-sensitive menu and selecting "Save product
part as 'Resources/Product Part Templates'." You
can then display this product part again as a tem-
plate (by clicking the folder button on the right) or
list it in "Resources > Product Part Templates". The
product part template contains all the Prinect
Signa Station product part data without data
pages. The administrative data of the job are not
part of the product part. See also the Job Inspector,
page 97.

918 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Main Features

Name
You can type/change the name of the selected prod-
uct part in this box.

Job Details in Product Part

Active
This is where you can name specific job details for
each product part in a job with several product parts.
You will find a description for an efficient workflow
with gang run forms in the User's Guide.

Work Mode
The work mode you select defines the structure of a
product part. The content of a job is shaped by what
or how many working modes you selected. A job can
have different working modes (product parts).

Imposition
A certain number of pages are imposed based on a
folding scheme you selected. You only create as many
sheets as you need for the number of pages. You
define the number of pages in "Page Total". In con-
trast to automatic imposition, no sheets are added or
removed automatically.
In this mode, you can process different folding
schemes and paper and plate templates in one job.
This is important, for example, if the page total can-
not be processed with one folding scheme (20 pages
can be imposed with a 16 folding scheme and a 4 fold-
ing scheme).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 919

Inspectors Window ABC

This option lets you modify a page total you defined

with the Job Assistant.
Note: Changing the page total subsequently does not
2 mean that the number of sheets are automatically
matched to this total. The user must change this man-
ually.
You can change the number of sheets in the Product
Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab in "Number" in the
table so that the value shown in "Unplaced Pages" is
"0". You can also add another, suitable scheme for the
"unplaced pages" using the folder button.
You can also change the names of single pages, for
example, to make it easier to tell the cover of a job
from the body. This makes it much easier in some
documents to place single data pages correctly on the
press sheet. To do this, you must select the row with
the page you want or a page range and then choose
"Change Page Names" in the context-sensitive menu.
A consecutive number is automatically added to the
page name you entered (I becomes I1, I2, I3, ...) if you
selected several pages. If the page name you entered
is a digit, consecutive numbers are generated as page
names starting with this number (32 becomes 32, 33,
34, ...). You can find more details in the User's Guide.
Different folding sheets can be placed on the plate
template if you enabled the "Gang run form" option
(in the Product Part Inspector in the "Plates" tab or in
the Job Assistant in "Printing Plates".

Automatic Imposition
In this working mode, an undefined number of pages
are imposed automatically based on the folding
scheme you selected. You do not have to define a set
number of pages.The required number of press

920 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

sheets is created automatically (duplicates of the first

sheet) when you assign data pages later. In this mode,
it's not possible to combine different folding
schemes.
You can use this mode, for example, if you wish to
assign documents with a large number of pages to a
layout in the Prinect Prepress Manager. The process-
ing of books in particular is a typical case for an auto-
mated workflow.

Montage
In this working mode, pages are not imposed on the
basis of a selected folding scheme, but single pages,
also known as 1ups, are created in assembly blocks/
sheets.
In this mode, Prinect Signa Station assumes that only
one sheet will be needed for the assembly. An exam-
ple here would be a large-format film. You can fill this
sheet with 1ups of the pages or place the pages freely
on the sheet by dragging-and-dropping them there.
The Product Part Inspector has two tabs if you
selected "Montage" when creating a job: "General" and
"Plates". The "General" and "Plates" tabs are the same
as in the "Imposition" and "Automatic Imposition"
modes.
This working mode is very suited for the production
of postcards, business cards or labels.
In addition, "Sheet Optimization" is also found as an
option in "Montage". See Sheet Optimization,
page 141.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 921

Inspectors Window ABC

Packaging
The option is only available if you have a license for
"Packaging". Details about packaging are found in
Packaging, page 131.

Comment
It's a good idea to comment the special features of a
product part if you wish to use it as a template.

Start Conditions

First Press Sheet

In automatic press sheet generation, you can change
the starting number of the first press sheet manually.
All following press sheets are incremented accord-
ingly.
Defines the start of the first press sheet in a product
part. Enter a five if you want the number of the first
press sheet in the product part to be a five (can be
seen immediately in the graphic window and is part
of the sheet label in output).

First Folding Sheet

This defines the number of the first folding sheet in
the product part. The folding sheet number affects
calculation of the collating marks (starting position)
and the folding sheet label.

First page
You can change the number of the first page. Page
numbers and page name are affected by this.

922 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Pages in Product Part / Page Names

For a description, see the section Imposition,
page 919.

Master Pages
"Master Pages" contain data about the page formats
for the "Imposition" or "Automatic Imposition" work
modes.
This is where you can define the trimmed size, the
trim, the page size for special master pages and the
position of the page content for every master page.
You can also define whether just one master page,
two master pages or special master pages will be used
in the product part. The values apply to all the pages
of the product part.

Master Page Types and Trimmed Size

Types
In this list box, you can select whether you need one
or more master pages in the product part. You will
only need one page type if all the pages in the job
have the same trimmed size and if the user data (PDF
pages) that will be assigned later have a similar struc-
ture. In other words, that they can be handled the
same when they are being positioned within the mas-
ter page. In this case, the "Current Type" list box is
dimmed.

Current Type
0
Right page / Left page
Select "Left pages" if the user data (PDF pages) have
different positions for the right and left pages. You
now can specify the values for this page. Now

Prinect Signa Station Reference 923

Inspectors Window ABC

select "Right pages". Except for the placement rule,

the values for the left page also apply to the right
page.
This may be necessary, for example, if different
positions for a left and right page were assigned in
Quark XPress and there is no trim box in the PDF
document.
Note: Only one page type must be created if the PDF
2 document has a trim box because contents/pages
with different positions are automatically aligned
using the trim box. You can view the trim box of the
PDF documents in the Document Inspector and, if
necessary, correct it there.
0
Custom
Select "Custom" if a folding scheme has different
formats, e.g. a letterfold with shorter pages. The
display/input options below are then enabled. You
can also define any number of special master
pages. This allows you to use different formats in a
scheme. You can assign a special master page to a
page in the scheme either in the Folding Sheet
Inspector > Scheme display, page 967 or in the
Product Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab > "Gaps and
Master Pages, page 955". The page then has a
green page number.
A case where you would use a special master page
is with a larger page in an advertising leaflet or
with fold-out pages in a magazine.
To override the automatic bleed:
There are special cases where a bleed must jut into
the adjacent page. You can allow this by creating a
special master page with a custom bleed because
the automatic bleed cannot be applied to special
master pages.

924 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

0
Setup of a special master page
Click the icon below to display a dialog where you
can enter a name for the special master page. The
values shown or modified below it then apply to
the special master page with this name.

You can click the folder button and select an exist-

ing format from the resources. The name is then
automatically used for the special master page.
You can delete the displayed special master page
and its values from the list by clicking the trash-
can icon.

Width/Height
You can select DIN formats and other standard sizes
directly using the folder button on the right in the
"Choose Page or Paper Size" dialog. You can generate
and/or call up other non-standard formats in this dia-
log. You can also create or modify page sizes in the
"Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" menu in
"Page and Paper Sizes", see also Page and Paper Sizes,
page 712.
You can change the values of a page manually in the
text boxes.

Enter the target size you want (trimmed size) of the
single segment (e.g. size of the small-format, square
book).
The trimmed size changes automatically in "Master
Page Types".

Segment Order on Folding Sheet

Copies X, Y: Enter the number of segments that are to
be side by side (X) or one below the other (Y).
A layer is created automatically for each segment
(copy) in "Job Inspector > Number of Layers. The layers
can then be filled later several times with the quan-
tity you want.

Copying is possible in one direction only. A value is

automatically reset to "1" if your input is wrong.
The trimmed size changes automatically in "Master
Page Types", the copies are added up corresponding
to the trimmed size.
Gaps X, Y: Enter the gap spacing if segments are to be
side by side (X) or one below the other (Y).

Placement rule for assigned pages

This is where you set how the PDF page content will
be placed within the trimmed size.
A trim box for the PDF page is always defined at Pri-
nect Signa Station. This box is then matched to the
trimmed size.

Creeping
For saddlestitch-bound publications (such as maga-
zines), the paper thickness makes the inner pages
shift outward (i.e., away from the spine). If the publi-
cation is trimmed after binding, the inside pages will
have narrower outer margins than the outside pages.
The same is true for perfect binding when large
sheets with many pages must be folded often.

936 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

This schematic diagram shows how the required

value for creeping is determined in saddlestitching.

Creeping off
The function is disabled and ignored.

Automatic (paper thickness)

The creeping values are calculated automatically
from the paper thickness if you select this option. You
can generate or modify the paper definitions in the
Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab or in "Papers
(Printing Materials)" in the "Jobs & Resources" menu >
"Resources & Machines". See also Papers (Printing
Materials), page 712.

Paper Thickness Factor

The paper thickness is multiplied by this factor to get
the creeping you want for each sheet. See above.

Manual
Enable this option if you wish to enter your own
inner/outer creeping values. The values refer to all
the folding sheets in the product part. The data for
"Inner" and "Outer" always refer to the first scheme of
the product part. The program calculates creeping
per sheet from these values and applies it to the
entire product part.
For more details about enabling creeping for a single
page, see Creeping, page 995.

Creeping Value Inner

This is where you enter the value by which the inner-
most pages of the first scheme have to be offset to
compensate for their creeping.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 937

Inspectors Window ABC

(Creeping value) Outer

This is where you enter the value by which the outer-
most pages of the first scheme have to be offset to
compensate for their creeping. The difference
between the internal and external adjusted margins
is the creeping margin. By entering positive values,
you will shift the pages outward; by entering negative
values, you will shift the pages toward the spine.
The distances between all the other pairs of pages in
the book will be calculated according to these
extreme values. The creeping margin values are
related directly to the page spacing you have set in
the scheme, see also Folding Scheme Editor,
page 1110. These values will be added to or sub-
tracted from the page spacing.
The scheme used determines whether automatic
creeping is possible or whether manual creeping is
necessary.
Generally, the program can calculate the required
creeping margin values itself.

Creeping by
Offset
Is set by default and described above.
Scaling
Makes the pages bigger or smaller depending on their
position in the scheme, while staying the same at the
back margin and matching them to the nominal posi-
tion on the outer edges.

AutoBottling
Remember the following conditions when you enable
this function:

938 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

0
Binding Methods
Automatic bottling is not allowed with "Come &
Go" and "Cut & Stack" binding methods.
0
Folding Sheet
The folding rule must end with a cross fold, e.g.
"x1Y1", and may not have a minus sign.
0
You may not make any changes or corrections to
the scheme after you enabled the automatic func-
tion.
0
In web presses with ribbons, combinations with
single pages and 3/4 pages may result in problems.
0
"AutoBottling" must be disabled if you use the
scheme "F16-11_li_4x2".
0
Fold types "zigzag" and "letterfold" can be problem-
atic.
0
Pagination
The "Accordion Fold" pagination mode may not be
selected in the Folding Scheme Editor.
More information about "bottling" and what manual
corrections you can make can be found in Bottling,
page 958.

Gripper Collator / Cover Bonding / Glue Line

Normally, a strip of paper/material is used to pull the
folding sheets on to the saddle if a saddlestitcher is
used to collate the sheets. The position of this strip on
the sheet depends on the folding sheet scheme and
basically means that the folding scheme is slightly
asymmetric on the paper sheet.
Prinect Signa Station's automatic gap computation
includes the values you enter for this option and cal-
culates all the gaps so you have the correct front and
rear gripper fold after folding.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 939

Inspectors Window ABC

0
No rear fold/front fold
There is no gripper margin for the saddlestitcher or
there is a page offset for a gripper margin for the rear
or front fold. You must enter the values in "Size of
Gripper Margin".
0
Size of gripper margin
This is where you define the size of a page offset
for the rear or front fold for the gripper margin of
the saddlestitcher.

Cover Bonding
Only displays if "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" is enabled in "File > Preferences > Gen-
eral".
In "Cover Bonding", paper is added to the folding
sheet. In book production, this additional space must
be created at the lower edge of the cover so that resid-
ual glue can be absorbed when gluing the cover to the
book and that it does not flow into the pages.
Note: The function is available as of Prinect Signa Sta-
2 tion
jobs.
version 3.x. It is not possible to use it on older

0
None
0
On the First Folding Sheet
Paper is added to the first folding sheet of the
product part.
0
On the Last Folding Sheet
Paper is added to the last folding sheet of the prod-
uct part.

940 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Glue Line
Only displays if "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" is enabled in "File > Preferences > Gen-
eral".
A glue line is needed when producing booklets with
web presses. A glue line is automatically applied
before folding. This serves the purpose that no fur-
ther gluing is needed after folding.
The folded double pages are glued together at the
sides along a narrow strip in the back margin. This
line is not noticed when leafing through the pages.
There should be no color in the glue line as this could
impair adhesion.
This can be done in one of the following ways:
0
By Moving
You can move the content of each page affected
away from the back margin by the value set in
"Glue Line Width". The page bleed becomes
smaller.
0
By Scaling
The visible page content is retained and scaled
(made narrower) so that the glue line in the back
margin of each page is kept free by the value set
for width.
0
Options
Normally, the glue line is defined on the outer-
most pages. However, in certain production condi-
tions, it may be wanted also on the innermost
pages (for example, to glue a cover to a booklet).
Choose the option accordingly.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 941

Inspectors Window ABC

Parameters for Automatic Gap Computation

0
Use routing margin
Use this option to define whether or not a routing
margin will be included. You must do this if a job
with thread-stitching is imposed as a job with per-
fect binding although there must be no routing
margin for thread-stitching (see also Binding
Methods, page 932).

Max. Head Gap/Max. Gap

The value entered is used for the automatic calcula-
tion of the gaps (in the Product Part Inspector >
"Schemes" tab) when you tick this option.
The value for the max. head gap only affects the page
head, the value for the max. gap all the gaps. The gaps
are created only up to the size entered, even any
larger head gap, if the max. gap is enabled. This
means that the folding sheet can be smaller than the
paper.
Remember that the extra space > "Master Pages" tab is
taken to be the minimum gap and the max. gap is
added to this. The automatic gap is used if you disable
the maximum gap. In this case as well, remember the
values you entered in the preferences > "Defaults" tab.
Gaps between a two-page spread such as routing mar-
gins are not affected by this.
For example, if the gap at the head is always to be
exactly 10 mm, then enter 5 mm in "Master Pages >
Trim Allowance for Pages > Top", set the max. head
gap to 0 mm and tick the box. The head gap is now
automatically exactly 10 mm when the gaps are cal-
culated automatically.

942 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Cut Block Assignment

In the "Imposition" and "Automatic Imposition"
modes, it is also possible to customize the cut block to
meet your different needs.
Cut blocks that are defined as described below are
written to the data for a CIP3 or JDF output and as a
result their data can be used by cutters.
Cut blocks are shown as a "green line" in the graphic
window.

To pages/1ups
The single pages on a folding sheet automatically
become cut blocks.
This can be a good idea if a scheme with the same
page numbers, e.g. when you create postcards, was
selected. Generally, however, the "Montage" mode
covers this type of production.

To folding sheets
Folding sheets including their margins automatically
become cut blocks.
This is what you normally want and is the default.

To scheme
Only the scheme without the folding sheet margins
becomes a cut block.
The margins must not be in the cut block if the fold-
ing sheet is to be trimmed to size before folding.

Marks
You can set the following parameters in the "Marks"
tab:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 943

Inspectors Window ABC

0
Set/remove automatic print control marks
0
Define parameters for automatic print control
marks
0
Define fixed cut marks (for "Creeping")

Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks

Cut marks, folding marks, folding crosses, folding
sheet cuts, folding sheet labels, fold lay marks and
collating marks are automatically set for the product
part if you enable one of these options.
Note:
2 0
When cut and folding marks are set, the program
always checks whether the gaps on the folding
sheet/assembly block are big enough for the auto-
matic marks and for the page bleed. If necessary,
the marks are deleted and the bleed reduced so
that they don't jut into the adjacent page. This
applies for front and back printing.
0
You can make space for the marks or the bleed
with the "Fit Marks and Bleeds" function in the
context-sensitive menu in the graphic view if
there is not enough space because you moved the
assembly blocks so close together.
0
The automatic fit for bleeds is not used if a custom
bleed is set on a special master page. There are spe-
cial cases where a bleed must jut into the adjacent
page. You can allow this by creating a special mas-
ter page with a custom bleed ("Master Pages" tab).
The cut marks and folding sheet labels are set in rela-
tion to the page and are listed in the Page/1up Inspec-
tor in the "Marks" tab (see Marks, page 995).

944 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

The folding marks, folding crosses, folding sheet cuts,

fold lay marks and collating marks are set in relation
to the folding sheet and are listed in the Folding
Sheet Inspector in the "Marks" tab (see also Folding
Sheet Inspector, Marks, page 967).
You can select and modify all seven types of marks in
the lists of the inspectors just named or in the
graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block"
tab.
In "Preferences > Resources > Marks Default" you can
assign marks for these seven types of marks that are
then set automatically. See also Marks Default,
page 419.

Notes on Using Marks

Manually set marks are handled in the Product Part
Inspector based on the following rule:
The Product Part Inspector generates all folding and
press sheets again if you change the layout, e.g. page
size, gaps, paper size. etc. In this case, any manually
set marks are lost. The layout is not recalculated and
the marks are kept with other types of changes such
as creeping on/off, position of the page contents, etc.
You can only select automatically set marks in the
Product Part Inspector. You can set manual marks in
the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block Inspector and Page/1up Inspector.

Marks Colors/Scaling and Collating Values

Colors for automatic marks

This is where you can select which separations will be
printed with marks.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 945

Inspectors Window ABC

Data for Collating Mark

The collating mark is a control device that allows you
to check whether the folding sheets have been assem-
bled completely and in the correct order.
You can use the default mark CollatingMark, a line
approximately 11 mm long and 1 mm wide contain-
ing the folding sheet number, if you wish to use a col-
lating mark. You may, however, use any mark, includ-
ing marks created by yourself for this purpose.
0
Position: Back margin - At foot - Outer - At head
This is where you select on which edge of the out-
ermost page the collating mark will be found.
"Back margin" is set by default.
0
Distance: Automatic - Defined
This is where you can select the amount by which
the collating mark will be shifted per sheet. Select
"Automatic" for the offset to correspond to the
height or width of the unscaled mark, depending
on the direction and rotation. You can also define
your own offset.
0
Range: Automatic - From: To:
This is where you can define the first and last posi-
tion of a collating mark on your reference side.
Select "Automatic" if you want the height or width
of a page to be taken as the range, starting with
"0".
0
Direction: Ascending - Descending - Zigzag - Zagzig
In general, a thick rule is printed on the fold
between the first and last pages, which is then vis-
ible on the spine of the finished folded sheet. The
first collating mark is at the top of the first folding
sheet. For each subsequent sheet, the rule is offset

946 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

by its own length, so that for a correctly and com-

pletely assembled book, even steps are obtained.
This step can be ascending or descending. Collat-
ing is ascending - descending in the case of zigzag
and descending - ascending for zagzig.
Note: The position must always start with "Back
2 margin" if you select "Ascending".

Last sheet First sheet

Collating
mark

Sheet Label Parameters

Position the folding sheet label as you need it.

Other General Marks Definitions

Fixed Cut Marks in Creeping

The cut marks are not moved in creeping. This affects
the ProofColor layer, gives you a better check of the
proof.

Plates

Load Plates and Schemes from Product Part Template

You can now load a plate template incl. its scheme,
placing mode, paper definition, marks, etc. to the job
as a product part template.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 947

Inspectors Window ABC

You can only load product part templates that have

"Gang run form" enabled. You must enable this
option in "Product Part Inspector > "Plates > Selected
Plate Template".
You can file standard plate templates with additional
custom settings (scheme, marks, paper, etc.) as prod-
uct part templates and load them later to new jobs to
make work easier for you. See "Save product part as
"Resources/Product Parts Templates"...", page 66 for
details about saving product part templates.

List of Selected Plate Templates

The plate templates selected for the product part are
shown in the list.
Using the buttons on the right, you can load or
replace plate templates to the product part or remove
them from there:

Folder button
Click the folder button and select a created plate tem-
plate in the "Choose Plate Template" window that
then appears. You can now add it to the product part.

To replace a plate template

Click this button and then replace the plate template
selected in the list by another one.
Note: The paper size does not change. An error mes-
2 sage displays if the paper already defined has become
too big because of the different plate. In such a case,
first change the paper size and then replace the plate.

948 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Trashcan
You can delete the plate template selected in the list
and its values from the product part by clicking the
trashcan icon.

Selected Plate Template

This is where you can check and change the size of
the selected plate template.
You can also create or modify plate templates in
"Plate Templates" in the "Jobs & Resources" menu, see
also Plate Templates, page 710.

Gang run form

Can only be used in the "Imposition" mode.
You can place different folding sheets on the plate
template if you select this option.
A gang run form is different from normal plate tem-
plates in that only the exact number of press sheets
you set in "Number" is created. The folding schemes
are placed only on the first press sheet, the others are
generated automatically based on the same pattern.
The "AutoPosition Subject" function is disabled if
"Gang run form" is enabled.
The position and orientation of the folding schemes
is set in the Product Part Inspector in the "Schemes"
tab > Active Inspector Section "Press Sheet Layout".
See Press Sheet Layout, page 961 for details.

Number
Can only be edited if "Gang run form" is enabled.
This is where you define the number of press sheets
that will be created with the plate template.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 949

Inspectors Window ABC

Placement rule for perfecting

Placing Mode
This is where you can change the rule for generating
the back sheet (perfecting).
0
Single-sided
This is what you have when the front consists of
single plates and no plates will be created for the
back.
0
Work-and-turn
This is what you have when the front and back are
on one plate. As a result, you do not need a plate
for the back. The stack of paper is turned after
printing and printing is now on the reverse side.
The operator doesn't need to load a new plate.
Explanation of "Work-and-turn": The stack is
turned from right to left after printing. The side
that is not yet printed is printed now.
0
Work-and-tumble
See "Work-and-turn", the stack of paper, however,
is tumbled after printing.
Explanation of "Work-and-tumble": The stack is
turned from front to back after printing. The side
that is not yet printed is printed now.
0
Perfecting
Two plates are created for printing, one for the
front and one for the back. The stack is turned
from front to back after printing the front. A per-
fector in the press very often does this.

950 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

0
Sheetwise (front and back)
Two plates are created for printing, one for the
front and one for the back. The stack is turned
from right to left after printing the front.
Note: For the "Sheetwise" mode (work-and-turn as
2 well), the subject is always placed on the plate
beyond/above the gripper margin. The minimum
space between subject and gripper margin is
equivalent to the page trim of the left master
page. For the "Perfector" mode (work-and-tumble
as well), the subject is centered horizontally and
vertically on the plate. If you want centering for
"Sheetwise" as well, you must tick "Center subject"
in "Preferences > Defaults".

Separating Gap
Only active if "Work-and-tumble" or "Work-and-turn"
is selected
If several folding sheets are positioned on a press
sheet, you can push them apart by defining a separat-
ing gap in this box.

Paper Definition for Production

This shows the paper that may have been selected in
the Job Assistant and that you can change for the cur-
rent job.
In "File > Preferences > General", it is possible to make
the "Name" section editable. See Paper Name Editable,
page 43 for details.
The paper thickness affects creeping, see also Creep-
ing and Bottling, page 936.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 951

Inspectors Window ABC

You can assign the job a paper type or create one for
it by displaying the "Choose Paper" dialog using the
folder button to the right. You can also do the same
for the paper size.
You can also create or modify papers and paper sizes
in the "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines"
menu in "Papers" or "Page and Paper Sizes". See also
Page and Paper Sizes, page 712.

Multiple Web Widths

Prerequisite: "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" must be enabled in "File > Preferences >
General".
Only makes sense to use this in web printing.
You can define the width of each roll (list box beside
it) if you have multiple webs.

Center offset
Prerequisite: "Show check items for cover bonding
and glue line" must be enabled in "File > Preferences >
General".
See Paper Center Offset, page 986 for details.

Subject Position on Paper

AutoPosition Subject
The lower edge of the subject with the bleed size is
positioned on the lead edge (blue line).
You can change the subject position manually if the
option is disabled.
Center Subject
The subject is centered in vertical (Y) direction.

952 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Schemes
The tab is only enabled in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
matic Imposition" working modes.
This is where you check, modify and create all the
folding sheets for the current product part. Besides
selecting the folding scheme, you can modify gaps,
assign special master pages, use the bottling func-
tion, organize your press sheet, edit gang run forms
and create folding sheet groups.

Page Assignment & Master Schemes (only for the "Imposition" mode)

Placeable Pages
This refers to the number of pages specified for the
product part that are to be placed on the selected
folding sheets. You cannot change the number of
pages in this box. You define the number of pages in
the "Definition, page 918" tab, "Imposition" mode.

Unplaced Pages
This shows the number of pages that still are not
placed on the folding sheets created so far. In certain
cases, negative values are shown in this box, for
example, if the page total was reduced at a later point
and there are now more folding sheets than required.
If you increased the number of pages, you can match
the number of folding sheets accordingly in "Num-
ber" in the table.
The product part is ready when the number of
unplaced pages is zero.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 953

Inspectors Window ABC

List of Used Schemes

This list shows the schemes selected for the product
part with the number of placed folding sheets and
assigned plates.
Using the buttons on the right, you can load or
replace schemes to the product part or remove them
from there or single out folding sheets:

Folder button
Click the folder button and select a created scheme in
the "Choose scheme" dialog that then appears. It is
linked to the plate template selected in "Printing
Plate", and the press sheet with folding sheet displays
in the graphic window.

To replace a scheme (button)

Click this button and then replace the scheme
selected in the list by another one.
Note: The list only shows schemes with the same
2 number of rows and columns as the one you want to
replace. You can disable this filter function in the
selection dialog.

To single out a folding sheet (button)

You can also trigger this function using the context-
sensitive menu in the scheme list in "Press Sheet". See
Printing Plate, page 955 for a description.

Trashcan (button)
You can delete the scheme selected in the list and all
of its folding sheets from the product part by clicking
the trashcan icon.

954 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Editing Schemes in the List

This is where you can check and change the currently
displayed folding schemes and their folding sheets.

Scheme Name
Displays the scheme name. You cannot edit the name.

Number
This shows the number of folding sheets that the
selected scheme created. You can change this num-
ber, for example, to match page numbers that were
changed. Double-click the box below "Number" and
type in the new value.

Printing Plate
Display of the plate template that is linked or will be
linked to the selected folding scheme.
Select "Singularize Folding Sheets" (either with the
button on the right or in the context-sensitive menu)
if a folding scheme is to be placed on a different press
sheet (gang run form). A press sheet is not linked to
the folding scheme. Later you can place the folding
scheme on the "correct" press sheet.

Active Inspector Section

You can choose from the following four options in
the "Active Inspector Section" list box:

Gaps and Master Pages

The selected folding scheme displays when you select
this option. You now can:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 955

Fold Lay Mark Position (related to paper)

Folding sheets are positioned at the fold lay mark you
want with this automatic function. The fold lay mark
is marked by a bracket in the graphic window.
The folding sheets are positioned so that they are
always at the lower paper edge in keeping with the
fold lay mark. You can set the fold lay mark to be
"Centered" (pointing to the center of the paper), "Left"
or "Right" (pointing to the respective corner of the
paper).

Position and orientation of folding sheet 1up (gang run

form only)
AutoArrange
This function centers the folding sheets on the press
sheets if there is enough room. See also the Auto-
matic rotation, page 962 option.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 961

Inspectors Window ABC

Folding Sheet Copies Allowed

This option allows folding sheets to be duplicated
automatically on the plate as long as there is enough
space.
The option applies to the scheme selected in the
scheme list and by default is selected.
No copies of the selected folding sheet are generated
if the option is disabled for a scheme. However, you
can position a different folding sheet on the plate.

Automatic rotation
Used together with the "AutoArrange" function, this
option allows folding sheets to be rotated for optimal
utilization of the press sheet.

One Folding Sheet per Sheet

This option gives you more flexible handling when
generating press sheets. When this option is enabled,
you can only place folding sheets with the same num-
ber on a press sheet (copies). This is helpful, for exam-
ple when publishing books where, for technical rea-
sons (color, etc) one single sheet in the folding sheet
list has to be shifted. See also Move Folding Sheets,
page 958.
If several folding sheets are on a press sheet, they are
all shifted when you insert one because the whole
press sheet must not be changed and shifts as well as
a result. The "One Folding Sheet per Sheet" option pre-
vents folding sheets with different numbers from
being placed on one press sheet. In this way, you have
that only one folding sheet is shifted.

962 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

With Gripper Margin

Includes the gripper margin when the number of
1ups is calculated automatically.

Number Folding Sheets (gang run form only)

Defines how many folding sheets of the same kind
will be placed on the press sheet.

List box (1up, 2up, 4up, 8up) (gang run form only)
The folding sheet 1ups are increased by the number
you select. 1up is set by default.

Edit Table (gang run form only)

You can change the positions of the folding sheets
manually in X and Y direction. You can change the
orientation of the folding sheets clockwise by 90 in a
list box. Use the "swapped" option to position folding
sheets from the front to the back and back again.

Folder Button
Lets you load a resource from the "Plate Layout" sec-
tion.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 963

Inspectors Window ABC

Graphic

Each colored element marks a folding sheet.

The red line refers to the fold lay mark.
The yellow folding sheet indicates that the front of
the folding sheet is on the front of the press sheet.
The green folding sheet indicates that the back of the
folding sheet is on the front of the press sheet.

Input box(es)
You can define free spaces between the folding sheets.

Folding sheets rotated (button)

This function is required if you wish to change the
orientation between several folding sheets. The fold
lay marks are rotated by 180 when you click this but-
ton.

Swap front / back (button)

In practice, you generally want to use the separating
line as the lay mark for the folder if you have more
than one folding sheet. This is only possible if you can

964 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

place normal folding sheets together with folding

sheets with swapped front and back on one press
sheet.

Auto (list box)

The "Auto" list box controls the order of the folding
sheets on the press sheet.
The first folding sheet is always at the bottom left in
an automatic arrangement.
To change the order to suit your needs, you must
define all the list boxes correctly (no number twice,
no "Auto").

Packaging
The tab is only enabled in the "Packaging" working
mode.
See Packaging, page 131 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 965

Inspectors Window ABC

Folding Sheet Inspector

Attributes
You can:
0 Change the position of the folding sheet on the
press sheet.
0 Change the head, foot and back margins using the
miniature scheme display.
0
Apply the changes made here to all sheets of the
same type.

Folding Sheet Data

Folding Sheet Name

This displays the folding sheet that is selected in the
Browser window or in the graphic view. Details about
the last folding sheet selected are shown if you
haven't selected a folding sheet.

Position X/Y
This shows the position of the selected folding sheet
on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the
paper is the zero point for both directions.
You can change the values for these positions manu-
ally.

Sheet Width/Height
Size of the folding sheet, based on the page size and
gaps.

966 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Scheme display
You can:
0
Change the head, foot and back margins, see also
Product Part Inspector > "Master Pages" tab > Trim
Allowance for Pages, page 929.
You can also change these data in the Product Part
Inspector, page 917, Schemes tab, Gaps and Master
Pages, page 955.

Apply to folding sheets of same kind

Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/
changes you made to all other folding sheets of the
same type in the product part.

Marks
The "Marks" tab is the same in all the inspectors that
deal with marks. Make sure that the mark you have
set displays in its proper inspector.
This is where you can position any marks for the
selected folding sheet/assembly block. You can also
set cut marks, folding marks, folding crosses, folding
sheet cuts and collating marks in this dialog. The
width and height of the mark are shown in the
"Expert Mode". In addition, you can define the clip-
ping region of a mark (part that will be imaged) and/
or imaging in the background. You can apply all the
changes you made in this dialog to all surfaces and
folding sheets of the same type in the product part.
You can find more details about marks in the User's
Guide.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 967

Inspectors Window ABC

Marks List

Surfaces
This is where you can select which marks will be
listed:
For sheetfed offset such as "All Surfaces (front and
back) or only for front or only for back
or:
For web offset such as "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1,
web 2, web 3 or web 4
You can add or remove table columns (bold headings)
with "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu.
You can select columns in the "Customize List View"
dialog than then displays and click the button you
want. By defining the order in "View Fields", you
define the column positions in the list from left to
right. The column setup is saved in Prinect Signa Sta-
tion and is available for all jobs.
The list can have the following columns that can be
hidden if the inspectors window is not opened wide
enough. The scroll bar displays in this case.

No. Order in the list.

Icon The mark icon is displayed.
Name The mark name is displayed.
Reference Point This column displays the reference point for the
mark.
Hotspot Position of the hotspot in the mark (important for
the mark to snap to position in relation to the ref-
erence point).

968 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Hotspot XY Coordinates of the hotspot position in the mark.

Layer Shows whether the mark is set in the foreground
or background of the page content.
Absolute Offset Coordinates of the distance to the bottom left cor-
ner of the object for which a mark is set, for exam-
ple, in the Folding Sheet Inspector for the folding
sheet, in the Press Sheet Inspector for the paper,
plate or subject.
Margin The part of the mark that is cut off is displayed as
is shown later in "Clippath" in the inspectors win-
dow.
Color This column displays the separation on which the
mark will be printed.
Mark Type Shows the mark type as was selected in the prefer-
ences or in the Marks Editor.
Surface (only Folding This column displays the surface on which the
Sheet/Assembly Block mark is located:
Inspector and Press Sheet For sheetfed offset: Single-sided, all surfaces, front
Inspector) or back
For web offset: "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1, web
2, web 3 or web 4
Parent (only Press Sheet This shows whether the mark refers to the paper,
Inspector) plate or subject.

Except for the last two rows, you can select the other
rows in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector,
Press Sheet Inspector and Page/1up Inspector.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 969

Inspectors Window ABC

The folding and collating marks are the only auto-

matically set marks that are shown in the list. The
automatically set cut marks refer to the page/1up and
are listed in the Page/1up Inspector > "Marks" tab (a
page must be selected in the graphic window).
All the marks are displayed, irrespective of type and
reference, in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab. For more details about setting
marks, see Marks Resources, page 979.
The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are
enabled when you select one or more marks in the
list. These sections then show the data for the mark
selected. In multiple selection, the data of the first
mark selected are displayed. The selected mark is
highlighted by an orange square in the graphic view
in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.
You can also change the order of the marks by click-
ing a mark in the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
It may be a good idea to change the order in some sit-
uations because the mark listed first is the last one to
be imaged and hides other marks below it.
Click the folder button on the right and add a mark
from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that
then appears. You can also add marks by dragging
and dropping them from the marks resources in the
Browser window to the list. When you add marks,
they are shown in the list and in the graphic view
because they were set in relation to the folding sheet/
assembly block. Marks added in this way always have
"X=0/Y=0" as a reference point or "Lower left" in the
other inspectors.
Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that
2 reason, you can only set tiling marks with the Plate
Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.

970 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

You can apply the selected mark(s) and its data to all
surfaces (front or back) in the product part by clicking
the icon below.

You can copy all marks on the front to the back by

clicking the icon below (only in the Press Sheet
Inspector and Folding Sheet Inspector).

You can replace the selected mark(s) by a new one

that you will select by clicking the icon below.

You can edit the selected mark with the relevant edi-
tor by clicking the icon below.

You can delete the selected mark(s) from the list by

clicking the trashcan icon.
You can create or change marks as well using the con-
text-sensitive menu in the Browser window in
"Marks" in the "Internal Resources" tab or in the
"Marks Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up
Inspector.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 971

Inspectors Window ABC

Cut Marks - Folding Marks - Collating Mark - Folding

Crosses - Folding Sheet Cuts
The marks are automatically set for the folding sheet
if you enable one of these options. They are removed
if you disable the option. You can see which marks
are set or removed in the "Marks List" and in the
graphic window.
Cut marks (page-related) that you set or remove are
shown and hidden respectively in the "Page Inspector
> Marks".
Click the "Apply to folding sheets of same kind" but-
ton if the product part has other folding sheets that
are to be changed.
Note: A mark type must be set again if you change the
2 default for this mark type in the preferences for a par-
ticular job. You must do this so that the new mark dis-
plays in the graphic view, is added as an internal
mark of the job and displays in the Browser window.

Selected Mark
The following parameters of a mark selected in the
list are enabled and some of them can be changed if
needed:

Group/Name
This displays the resources group and the name of the
selected mark. The resources group and the name of
the first selected mark are shown if you selected sev-
eral marks.

Color
This is where you can select which separation will be
printed with the mark.

972 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

In addition, you can now set a mark on several color

layers. You can define color layers as knockout:

In the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet Inspector

and Page/1up Inspector, you can set a line mark and/
or text mark to "Dark Color" in the "Colors" tab. As a
result of this setting, this mark is always set automat-
ically to the darkest separation of the job. If a job is
output without black, a sheet lay mark, for example,
would automatically be set to the darkest color in the
job and output.
Note:
Like in a non-separated job, "black" becomes the dark-
est color in a separated job with a black separation.
The mark is set to the placeholder X only if there are

Prinect Signa Station Reference 973

Inspectors Window ABC

spot colors in the job. In this case, you can select the
darkest spot color manually in the "Colors" tab in the
Job Inspector.

Reference Point
This option lets you select one of the reference points
available for the selected mark. The bottom left cor-
ner of the folding sheet is the reference point, either
"Lower left" or "x=0/y=0". Starting there, you move in
single steps to the right (x direction) and/or to the top
(y direction) like in an axis system.
In the Folding Sheet Inspector, the reference points
have digits, e.g. "x=1/y=1" because every folding line in
the scheme can be a reference point. In the Press
Sheet and Page/1up Inspectors, words are used, e.g.
"Lower middle".

974 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Examples:

Upper left Upper middle Upper right

Middle left Middle Middle right

middle

Reference point

Lower left Lower middle Lower right

Reference point

Prinect Signa Station Reference 975

Inspectors Window ABC

Position X/Y
This option lets you position the selected mark as you
want it in x/y direction in relation to its assigned ref-
erence point. The selected reference point can be, for
example, x=1/y=0.
0
"Change" button
When this button is enabled, the offset values are
modified/shown in relation to the last position of
the selected mark. The offset values are modified/
shown in relation to the reference point as
described above when the button is disabled.
This function is also suited for multiple selection.

Block name
This box displays the block name that was assigned in
the Job Assistant and is selected in the Browser win-
dow or in the graphic view. You can enter a prefix for
all the block names if you haven't selected a block
name. You can change the name afterwards.
You can create a new assembly block by clicking the
icon below.

Click the folder button below to load a CFF2 file for

creating a new assembly block with a CAD single 1up.
You can then duplicate and arrange the 1up as you
want. You can edit the clip path in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. See Pack-
aging, page 131 for details.
The option is only available if the "Packaging" option
is enabled.

You can delete the assembly block from the list by

clicking the trashcan icon.

Same Content for All 1ups

When this option is set (default), all the 1ups are
assigned the same content. In the graphic window,
you will see that all the 1ups have the same number.
The 1ups of the first assembly block are all numbered

Prinect Signa Station Reference 981

Inspectors Window ABC

"1", those of the second assembly block "2", etc. When

you assign a content to a 1up to an assembly block, all
the 1ups in this assembly block are automatically
given the same content.
The 1ups are numbered consecutively, starting with
one ('1'), if the option is not set. In this case, you must
assign the contents separately for each 1up.

Copies X/Y
In these boxes, you can define how often a 1up in the
assembly block will be created in X (horizontal) or Y
(vertical) direction.

Fill Sheet
Starting from the present position of the assembly
block on the press sheet, as many 1ups as will fit on
the press sheet will be created to the right, left and/or
on top.

Gaps X/Y
If an assembly block has several 1ups, you can specify
the gaps between the 1ups in X and Y direction.

Position X/Y
This shows the position of the selected assembly
block on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of
the paper is the zero point for both directions.

Margin, left / right / top / bottom

You can enter a margin for the assembly block in
these boxes. A cut mark is not placed if this margin is
smaller than the cut mark. This allows the cut point
for assembly blocks to be set accurately without the
automatically set cut marks disturbing this setting.

982 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

1up Definition

Width/Height
The size of the 1up is specified.

Bleed
The bleed width is shown. Prinect Signa Station
makes sure automatically that bleeds do not overlap
in an assembly bock.

Name
You can rename the 1up selected in the graphic win-
dow, for example, one in a gang run form. The differ-
ent names help you keep track of your work better if
you have different 1ups. The changed name is taken
into account in the JDF workflow.

Custom Bleed Values

Enable "Use custom values".
You can define a custom bleed for all the pages of the
selected 1up.

Orientation
You can rotate the 1ups on the selected assembly
block by the specified degrees with this option.

Special angle
Click "On". You can then enter an angle by which the
1ups on the selected assembly block will be rotated.
Pivot is bottom left. This is used for envelopes, for
example, to align the rear flap of the envelope cor-
rectly (35).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 983

Inspectors Window ABC

Placement rule for assigned 1ups

You can find a description of this in the Placement
rule for assigned pages, page 930.

Lenticular Printing Settings

In lenticular printing, a lens foil and a specially
edited 1up (image) are needed for impositioning. The
lens foil is printed from the back and consists of par-
allel lenses (curvature of the foil). In addition, you
have to set other conditions for assembly:

Lenticular Scaling
Different lenticular effects need either a horizontal
or vertical orientation of the lens.

Mechanical Pitch (resolution of the foil)

Describes the resolution of the foil.

Image Scale
Matches the image to the recorder resolution.

Marks
You can find a description of this in the Marks,
page 967.
Difference to above description: In contrast to the
Folding Sheet Inspector, you can only change the
automatically set cut marks in the Assembly Block
Inspector but not the folding marks, collating mark,
folding crosses and folding sheet cuts.
You can now already assign automatic cut marks to a
color layer with the Job Assistant.

984 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Marks Resources
You can find a description of this in the Marks
Resources, page 979.

Press Sheet Inspector

Press Sheet

Management Data

Sheet Name
This displays the name of the press sheet that is
selected in the Browser window or in the graphic
view. A name change is also shown in the product
part (Browser window). The system checks whether
the job name is unique. A message displays if a name
was assigned twice. A unique name is important for
finishing, e.g. for tiled sheets.
Note: A change in the sheet name is also reflected in
2 the internal sheet name, e.g. in the .cip file for finish-
ing (0001#Sheet 1 #A__Name).

Plate Width / Height

The size of the plate is shown. You can also see these
data in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab.

Centering
The entire subject (not the single folding sheet) is cen-
tered automatically either horizontally, vertically or
in both directions on the press sheet.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 985

Inspectors Window ABC

Sheet Optimization (only in the "Montage" working mode)

This section is only active when jobs are open with
the "Sheet Optimization" option enabled.
You can find a description of "Sheet Optimization" in
the section Sheet Optimization, page 141.

Press Sheet Parameters

Used Colors
Number of colors/separations that will be printed on
the press sheet. This information only displays if data
pages are assigned to the job/product part.

Plate template
Display of the plate template name that was entered
in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab or in the
Job Assistant.

Papers
This shows the paper that was selected in the Job
Assistant or in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates"
tab and that you can change for the current job.

Paper Width / Paper Height

These boxes display the paper width / paper height
that you can change if required.

Paper Center Offset

The offset in this case is different to the center offset
of the folding scheme. In this case, it is the offset of
the paper from the middle of the press sheet (horizon-
tal) (see also X offset in the Plate Template Editor).

986 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Normally, the value is '0', and the paper lies at the

middle of the press sheet along the horizontal axis.
You can enter a horizontal offset in this box if the
normal case is not correct for printing reasons. Posi-
tive values shift to the right, negative values to the
left. The reverse side is matched automatically.

Baseline
Display and, if necessary, correction of the distance of
the paper from the leading edge of the plate. Positive
values move the paper away from the plate edge, i.e.
to the top, negative values move the paper down.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List

All the folding sheets/assembly blocks on the press
sheet are listed. Details about a sheet/block are
enabled when you select the sheet/block.

Name
This displays the folding sheet/assembly block that is
selected in the list.

Position X/Y
This shows the position of the selected folding sheet/
assembly block on the press sheet. The bottom left
corner of the paper is the zero point for both direc-
tions.

Orientation
You can rotate the folding sheet/assembly block with
this option.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 987

Inspectors Window ABC

Version Preallocated for Versioned Output (Versioning Only)

This section is only active if a number greater than '1'
was entered in "Job Inspector > Versions", enabling as
a result the new versioning.
Mark a folding sheet in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block List". You can then assign a version to it and add
or remove layers.

Assign Versions
A new editor for "assigning versions to folding sheets"
has been added.
You can use this editor for multiple selection of fold-
ing sheets that you can then assign to a version.
You will find a description of the new versioning and
the editor in the User's Guide.

Apply to press sheets of same kind

Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/
changes you made in the "Press Sheet" tab to all other
press sheets of the same type in the product part.
The function is available only in the "Imposition" and
"Automatic Imposition" working modes.

Marks
This parameter lets you position any marks in rela-
tion to the paper, plate or subject (bounding box
around printed area on the sheet). The width and
height of the mark are shown in the "Expert Mode". In
addition, you can define the clipping region of a
mark (part that will be imaged) and/or imaging in the
background. You can apply all the changes you made
in this dialog to all surfaces and press sheets of the
same type in the product part.

988 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

You can find more details about marks in the User's

Guide.

Marks List

Surfaces
This is where you can select whether the marks will
be listed or not:
For sheetfed offset such as "All Surfaces (front and
back) or only for front or only for back
or:
For web offset such as "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1,
web 2, web 3 or web 4
See the Marks List, page 968 for a description of the
list.
The list only shows marks that refer to the paper,
plate or subject (bounding box around printed area
on the sheet). The automatically set cut marks, fold-
ing marks and collating mark refer to the page/1up or
the folding sheet and are not displayed in this list but
only in the list in their respective inspectors. For
more details about setting marks, see Marks
Resources, page 979.
The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are
enabled when you select a mark in the list. These sec-
tions then show the data for the mark selected. The
selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in
the graphic view in the > "Press Sheet" tab.
You can also change the order of the marks by click-
ing a mark in the Context-sensitive menu.
Click the folder button on the right and add a mark
from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that
then appears. You can also add marks by dragging

Prinect Signa Station Reference 989

Inspectors Window ABC

and dropping them from the marks resources in the

Browser window to the list. The marks are set refer-
ring to what you selected, "Paper" "Plate" or "Subject".
You can of course change this reference.
Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that
2 reason, you can only set tiling marks with the Plate
Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.
You can delete the selected mark from the list by
clicking the trashcan icon.
You can apply the selected mark(s) and its data to all
surfaces in the product part by clicking the icon
below.

You can create or change marks as well using the con-

text-sensitive menu in the Browser window in
"Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks
Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block
Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspec-
tor.

Selected Mark
See Selected Mark, page 972 for a description.
In addition to the above description, you can also
select:

Parent: Paper / Plate / Subject

You can assign a mark that refers to the paper, plate
or subject (bounding box around printed area on the
sheet), for example, a sheet lay mark for the paper, an
ink pickup mark in web offset (random dot) for the
plate and a color control bar for the subject.

990 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

Expert Mode
See Expert Mode, page 977 for a description.

Apply to press sheets of same kind

Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/
changes you made in the "Press Sheet" tab to all other
press sheets of the same type in the product part.

Marks Resources
You can find a description of this in the Marks
Resources, page 979.

Page/1up Inspector

Attributes

Trimmed Format
This shows the current trimmed size of the selected
page or 1up. You cannot change this data.

Position X/Y
The position of the selected page refers to the bottom
left corner of the folding sheet.

Width/Height
In folding sheets, the values are the same as the data
of the master page, in assembly blocks as the data of
the 1up definition. They show the trimmed size.

Orientation
The setting is taken from the defined master page or
from the 1up definition.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 991

Inspectors Window ABC

Active Layer
This is where you can select a layer to be able to make
a change to it. The selected layer is shown in the
graphic view. You can create the layers for the prod-
uct part in the Job Inspector > "Administrative Data"
tab or in the Job Assistant. A maximum of 12 layers
can be used.
You will find more details about working with several
layers in Number of Layers, page 99 or View Proper-
ties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 827.

Version Preallocated for Versioned Output

Active version
You set the active version in the "Press Sheet Inspec-
tor" in "Version Preallocated for Versioned Output".
In the active version, you can assign or remove indi-
vidual layer contents to or from a page marked in the
graphic window with the "Include/Exclude Layers"
list box.
You will find a description of the new versioning in
the User's Guide.

Bleed
This box displays the value for the selected page, and
you can change it if required. Generally, you don't
need to change this value because it was calculated
correctly on the basis of the master page. Positive val-
ues move the trim away from the page, negative val-
ues move it in towards the page.
The bleed specified in the master pages refers to all
the pages in the product part (see also Product Part
Inspector > Master Pages, page 923).

992 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

All pages/1ups with same index

The changes you made to a page/1up are applied to all
other pages/1ups with the same page number or con-
tent (1up).

Include back
You can confine your changes just to the front if you
disable this function.

Clip path
Can only be used in the "Packaging" mode.
More details can be found in the "Packaging" chapter,
1up Inspector, page 135.

Placement rule for assigned page/1up

You can find a description of this in the Placement
rule for assigned pages, page 930.

Additional functions for the Page/1up Inspector

0
Measurement tool button
The Page/1up Inspector has a "Measurement tool"
button on the right besides the text boxes for "Off-
set X/Y" in the "By user (view options) > Offset >
Custom" option.

This tool lets you define an exact visual offset for a

selected page/1up in the graphic window > "Fold-
ing Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 993

Inspectors Window ABC

0
Click the selected page/1up you wish to move
while holding down the command + Shift keys.
0
Holding down the mouse button, now create a
square that defines the offset in X and Y direc-
tion (the opposite edge defines the new posi-
tion).
0
The measurement tool button is enabled when
you release the mouse button and then the two
keys.
0
Now click the button to apply the data of the
square you created to the boxes and trigger the
offset.
Only one page may be selected with this function.
Note: This function is a very useful one especially
2 incutting
the packaging mode to match the 1up to the
die. In the punch outline of the 1up, select
a certain feature (e.g. intersection of two lines) and
use the measurement tool on the corresponding
feature of the CFF2 outline (magenta-colored line).
The 1up is positioned exactly to the CFF2 punch
outline if you follow the procedure described
above.
0
Offset/scaling with the arrow keys
You can use offset or scaling accurately, with
visual control in the graphic window, when you
click the offset or scaling box with the mouse but-
ton and then use the arrow keys. Offset/scaling
goes in the opposite direction if you hold down
the Alt key at the same time.
0
Scaling / orientation
Scaling and orientation of the contents are only
applied to the scheme and not to the document.
An advantage of this is that when you assign a new

994 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

document to the scheme the pages are loaded to

the scheme with defined settings.

Creeping

On
The creeping values currently applicable for a page
are shown and a tick is set if creeping was enabled
when you created the product part, In some cases,
however, creeping must not be enabled (image runs
over back margin). You then disable this option by
removing the tick from the box (see also Creeping
and Bottling, page 936).

Scaled creeping
A tick is set and the creeping values are shown if
creeping and "Scaling" as the creeping mode were
enabled when you created the product part. You can
find more details about this subject in Creeping and
Bottling, page 936.

Apply Rule to All Pages

The settings you defined for the selected page are
applied to all pages in the product part.
Note: Remember the "Restrict 'Apply' functions in
2 Page Inspector" check box in "File > Preferences >
Defaults > Several Switches". You can restrict the func-
tion to the selected folding sheet/assembly block with
it.

Marks
This is where you can position any marks for the
selected page/1up. The width and height of the mark
are shown in the "Expert Mode". In addition, you can

Prinect Signa Station Reference 995

Inspectors Window ABC

define the clipping region of a mark (part that will be

imaged) and/or imaging in the background. You can
find more details about marks in the User's Guide.

Marks List
See the Marks List, page 968 for a description of the
list.
Automatically set cut marks that are shown in the
list. The automatically set folding and collating
marks refer to the folding sheet/assembly block and
are listed in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspec-
tor > "Marks" tab. However, all the marks are dis-
played in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab. For more details about setting
marks, see Marks Resources, page 979.
The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are
enabled when you select a mark in the list. These sec-
tions then show the data for the mark selected. The
selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in
the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly
Block" tab.
You can also change the order of the marks by click-
ing a mark in the Context-sensitive menu, page 213.
Click the folder button on the right and add a mark
from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that
then appears. You can also add marks by dragging
and dropping them from the marks resources in the
Browser window to the list. When you add folding
and collating marks, they are shown in the list and in
the graphic view because they were set in relation to
the page/1up.
Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that
2 reason, you can only set tiling marks with the Plate
Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.

996 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

You can delete the selected mark from the list by

clicking the trashcan icon.
You can create or change marks as well using the con-
text-sensitive menu in the Browser window in
"Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks
Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block
Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspec-
tor.

Selected Mark
See Selected Mark, page 972 for a description.
In addition to the above description, you can also
select:

Expert Mode
See Expert Mode, page 977 for a description.

Apply changes

To all pages/1ups
Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/
changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all other
pages/1ups in the product part.
Note: Remember the "Restrict 'Apply' functions in
2 Page Inspector" check box in "File > Preferences >
Defaults > Several Switches". You can restrict the func-
tion to the selected folding sheet/assembly block with
it.

To pages/1ups with same index

Click this button if you wish to apply all the page/1up
inputs/changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all
other pages/1ups with the same page number or con-
tent (1up).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 997

Inspectors Window ABC

Examples:
In the "Imposition" mode, all pages numbered '1' are
changed if you have copies. All the copies of a 1up are
changed in the "Montage" mode.

To left / right pages

Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
matic Imposition" working modes.
Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/
changes you made for a selected page (either left or
right) in the "Marks" tab to all other left or right
pages.

Marks Resources
You can find a description of this in the Marks
Resources, page 979.

Document Inspector

Document
This provides you with general information about the
document you have currently selected.

Properties
The properties of the selected PDF document are
shown. If your job has several PDF documents, then
information about the PDF selected in the Browser,
graphic or list window is shown. The information
comes from the layout application.
Note: Acrobat Distiller automatically starts if a Post-
2 Script document is to be processed with Prinect Signa
Station and converts it to a PDF document. You don't

998 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

have to remember any special settings in Acrobat Dis-

tiller because this is taken care of by the job options
in Prinect Signa Station.
You must enable the following options for your setup
in "Preferences > Adobe PDF Settings > Advanced" if
Acrobat Distiller runs on a different computer for the
conversion of a PostScript document to a PDF docu-
ment:
0
Process DSC Comments
0
Preserve Document Information from DSC

Available colors
The colors used in the entire document, including
spot colors, are shown in this list.
If you are working with separated PDF, you can
change the color names in the table by double-click-
ing the table item. The new name is then used in the
job.

Page
This provides you with information about the PDF
page you have currently selected. It is also possible for
you to modify or move the trim box of the PDF page.

Area of application
This parameter lets you define where the changes
will be applied if changes are made in "Trim box".
The default setting is "selected". The selected page and
PDF file are shown in the caption bar of the inspec-
tors window.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 999

Inspectors Window ABC

You can also select "even" where all even pages will be
changed, "odd" for changes to all odd pages and "all"
where all pages of the selected PDF file will be
changed.
If you select "all", each change to the trim box will be
applied at once and without confirmation to all the
pages/1ups in the PDF file. You can view the changes
right away in the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic win-
dow.

Trimmed Size (Trim Box)

Selection
The list box shows the bounding boxes defined in the
PDF file. Only different sized boxes are shown.
The trim box always forms the basis.
If you select a larger media box, for example, this is
used as the basis for offsets. The selected media box
becomes the trim box.
The list box changes to "user-defined" if you change
the values below because changing them means that
they are inevitably different to those of the trim box.

Rel. position X/Y

This option lets you move the trim box relative to the
content of a PDF page. As a result, the motif can be in
a different position in the trim box. The bottom left
corner is the reference point.
This can be used in PDF page assignment if the follow-
ing setting was selected for the master page in the
"Product Part Inspector > Placement rule for assigned
pages/1ups":

9100 Edition March 2010

ABC Inspectors Window

0
"Automatic" mode or
0
"By user (view options)" mode with "From trim
box" offset.
A change in the size of the trim box (in the graphic
view > "Document" tab) does not affect positioning.
Only the position of the bottom left corner is impor-
tant.
0
Offset with the arrow keys
You can use offset accurately, with direct visual
control of X and Y direction in the graphic win-
dow, when you click the offset box with the mouse
cursor and then use the arrow keys. Offset goes in
the opposite direction if you hold down the Alt
key at the same time.
You will find a description of the bounding boxes (e.g.
trim box) in the section Bounding Boxes, page 37.
You can read how Prinect Signa Station evaluates the
bounding boxes in the PDF file in the
section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930.

Width/Height
The size data for the trim box is shown in these boxes.
Use the folder button to the right to access standard
trim box sizes in the resources at any time.

Scale X/Y
The PDF page is scaled during placement but this is
only advisable if the placement rule for assigned
pages is set to "Automatic" in the master page.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 9101

Inspectors Window ABC

Orientation
The PDF page is rotated during placement but this is
only advisable if the placement rule for assigned
pages is set to "Automatic" in the master page.
Note: Scaling and orientation of the contents are only
2 applied to the document and not to the layout/
scheme as in the Page/1up Inspector. The advantage
of this, when working with the Prinect Prepress Man-
ager, for example, is that, if you want to use a differ-
ent scheme for the document, you only need to
replace the scheme without having to enter your data
again. You can assign the data described here to a PDF
page in the Prinect Prepress Manager as well. Prinect
Signa Station uses them and shows them in this
inspector.

Available colors
The colors used in the selected page, including spot
colors, are shown in this list.

9102 Edition March 2010

5. Taking the parameters configured in the screen shot

above, you will now see the parameters in your list
window as follows:

Functionality
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Press
Sheet Inspector is displayed
Opens that press sheet in the graphic window. The
same press sheet is marked in the Browser win-
dow. The Press Sheet Inspector displays in the
inspectors window so that you can edit the press
sheet.
The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet"
tab in the list window with a press sheet selected:
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Print Press Sheet..."
Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print
Job ..., page 1217 window displays.

0
"Save Table as HTML File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
HTML file (for checking purposes).
You can define preferences for the content of the
file in "File > Preferences > Reports". See Reports,
page 420 for details.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 105

List Window ABC

In addition, you can attach report files, report

marks and GIF files (e.g. company logo) for a more
complete picture in the "Save Table as HTML File"
dialog that appears.
Report Header: Image data: You can define report
marks as comments for image data.
Footer: You can define report marks as footers.
0
"Save Table as PDF File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
PDF file (for checking purposes). See previous item
"Save Table as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
Prints the listed information (tables) to a printer.

Folding Sheet
The "Folding Sheet" tab lists all the folding sheets in a
selected product part. The parameters of the sheets
are also shown.
You can configure which parameters will be shown in
the "Folding Sheet" tab as follows:
1. You can decide which columns will be shown by
selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive
menu (see List Functionality, page 101). The follow-
ing window displays:

106 Edition March 2010

ABC List Window

The left column shows you all the parameters that

can be displayed in the "Folding Sheet" tab. The right
column lists the parameters that are actually shown.
2. Continue as described in step 2 auf der page 104.To
add parameters:, page 104.

Functionality
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Fold-
ing Sheet Inspector is displayed
Opens that folding sheet in the "Folding Sheet/
Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. The
selected folding sheet is marked in the Browser
window. The Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspec-
tor displays in the inspectors window so that you
can edit the folding sheet.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 107

List Window ABC

The following functions are available when you dis-

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Folding Sheet"
tab in the list window with a folding sheet selected:
0
"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector"
Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 966
or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 980 in the
inspectors window.
0
"Press Sheet Inspector"
Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 985 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Save Table as HTML File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
HTML file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table
as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Save Table as PDF File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
PDF file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table as
PDF File...", page 106 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
Prints the listed information (tables) to a printer.

Page List
The "Page List" tab shows you all the pages that were
defined in the product part. The relevant parameters
are listed.
You can configure which parameters will be shown in
the "Page List" tab as follows:

108 Edition March 2010

ABC List Window

1. You can decide which columns will be shown by

selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive
menu (see List Functionality, page 101). The follow-
ing window displays:

The left column shows you all the parameters that

can be displayed in the "Page List" tab. The right col-
umn lists the parameters that are actually shown.
2. Continue as described in step 2 auf der page 104.To
add parameters:, page 104.

Functionality
0
A double click on a row or a single click if the
Page/1up Inspector is displayed
Displays that page or 1up in the "Page List" tab in
the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is
marked in the Browser window. The Page Inspec-
tor displays in the inspectors window so that you
can edit the page or 1up.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 109

List Window ABC

The following functions are available when you dis-

play the context-sensitive menu in the "Page List" tab
in the list window with a page selected:
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with
Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables,
page 49.
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the
job. The pages in the job no longer have any
assigned content.
0
"Paste Pages from Clipboard"
If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to the
clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the Browser win-
dow, you can paste it in anywhere you want.
You can also use this function in the graphic win-
dow in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >.

This function is really suitable for positioning cer-

tain pages/1ups several times. In the "Page List" tab
in the graphic window, select several pages/1ups
(command key and click) and paste the content of
the clipboard on the selected pages/1ups using the
context-sensitive menu.
0
"Assign Blank Page" (add a blank page)
Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Auto-
matic Imposition" working modes.
A blank page is pasted before the selected page.

1010 Edition March 2010

ABC List Window

The page size defined in the scheme is used auto-

matically. The subsequent pages with their con-
tents shift back one page.
This method is used when, for example, blank
pages that were not in the PDF document must be
pasted to certain positions.
You can also use this function in the graphic win-
dow in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >.
0
"Save Table as HTML File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
HTML file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table
as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Save Table as PDF File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
PDF file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
Prints the listed information (tables) to a printer.

Assigned
The "Assigned" tab shows you all the pages that were
imported and positioned in the current job. The rele-
vant parameters are listed.
You can configure which parameters will be shown in
the "Assigned" tab as follows:
1. You can decide which columns will be shown by
selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive
menu (see List Functionality, page 101). The follow-
ing window displays:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1011

List Window ABC

The left column shows you all the parameters that

can be displayed in the "Assigned" tab. The right col-
umn lists the parameters that are actually shown.
2. Continue as described in step 2 auf der page 104.To
add parameters:, page 104.

Functionality
0
Positioning of pages by dragging-and-dropping
them to the graphic window. Position to the "Page
List" tab if you wish to position several pages. This
tab shows you all the pages defined in the product
part, making a direct check very simple.

1012 Edition March 2010

ABC List Window

0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Doc-
ument Inspector is displayed
Displays that page or 1up in the "Document" tab in
the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is
marked in the Browser window. The Document
Inspector displays in the inspectors window so
that you can edit the page.
The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Assigned" tab
in the list window with a PDF file selected:
0
"Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector, page 998 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with
Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables,
page 49.
0
"Remove Document from Job"
The PDF file is deleted from the job.
0
"Reload Document"
The imported PDF file is updated in the job.
0
"Assign Pages"
The selected pages are assigned to the job. The
pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next
blank pages in the job.
0
"Save Table as HTML File..."

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1013

List Window ABC

You can save the listed information (tables) as a

HTML file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table
as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Save Table as PDF File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
PDF file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
In the List Functionality, page 101, you can print
the listed information (tables) to a printer.
The functions just named but without "Remove Docu-
ment from Job" and "Reload Document" are available
when you display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Assigned" tab in the list window with a page selected:
The following additional function is available:
0
"Delete Page Assignment"
Deletes assignment of the selected page(s)/1up(s)
in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer
have any assigned content.

Not assigned
The "Not assigned" tab shows you all the pages that
were imported to the current job but not yet posi-
tioned. The relevant parameters are listed.
You can configure which parameters will be shown in
the "Not assigned" tab as follows:
1. You can decide which columns will be shown by
selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive
menu (see List Functionality, page 101). The follow-
ing window displays:

1014 Edition March 2010

ABC List Window

The left column shows you all the parameters that

can be displayed in the "Not assigned" tab. The right
column lists the parameters that are actually shown.
2. Continue as described in step 2 auf der page 104.To
add parameters:, page 104.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1015

List Window ABC

0
A double click on a row or a single click if the Doc-
ument Inspector is displayed
Displays that page or 1up in the "Document" tab in
the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is
marked in the Browser window. The Document
Inspector displays in the inspectors window so
that you can edit the page.
The following functions are available when you dis-
play the context-sensitive menu in the "Not assigned"
tab in the list window with a PDF file selected:
0
"Document Inspector"
Displays the Document Inspector, page 998 in
the inspectors window.
0
"Preview"
Generates previews of the pages. You can set gen-
eral view properties. See Default User, page 47
for details.
0
"Open with Acrobat"
The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with
Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables,
page 49.
0
"Remove Document from Job"
The PDF file is deleted from the job.
0
"Reload Document"
The imported PDF file is updated in the job.
0
"Assign Pages"
The selected pages are assigned to the job. The
pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next
blank pages in the job.

1016 Edition March 2010

ABC List Window

0
"Save Table as HTML File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
HTML file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table
as HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Save Table as PDF File..."
You can save the listed information (tables) as a
PDF file (for checking purposes). See "Save Table as
HTML File...", page 105 for details.
0
"Print Table..."
In the List Functionality, page 101, you can print
the listed information (tables) to a printer.
The functions just named but without "Remove Docu-
ment from Job" and "Reload Document" are available
when you display the context-sensitive menu in the
"Not assigned" tab in the list window with a page
selected.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1017

ABC Editors

11 Editors

General
0 The following parameters are common to all edi-
tors:
0 "Group": Group name in the tree structure in
the Browser window. See To create a group
folder, page 75 for details.
0 "Name": Name of the object. This appears in the
relevant group in the Browser window and in
the caption bar of the editor.
0
"Save": Saves the object. You cannot edit, i.e.
overwrite, default objects. You also cannot cre-
ate new default objects with them.

Resources that cannot be changed are locked.

This is indicated by a lock.

0
"Close": The editor closes. The object is not
saved.
0 "Reset": The object version last saved is loaded.
0 "New" button:
Some dialogs for loading "Resources" and
"Machines" have a "New" button. The editor
matches the object that you are about to load. It
allows you to create a new resource or machine
without having to quit the current dialog.
Example: In the Plate Template Editor > "Plate Tem-
plate" tab, click the folder button to the right of
the "Press" text box. The "Choose Press" dialog dis-

Prinect Signa Station Reference 111

Editors ABC

plays. Click the "New" button (at bottom left in

window) to go to the press editor you want. You
can also decide to set up a new press if you wish.

Plate Template Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a plate tem-
plate that is saved as a resource in "Plate Templates".

Graphic Area
Graphic display of the plate template:
0
Plate: dark gray
0
Paper: light gray
0
Subject (area of paper with print data): purple
0
Ink zones: broken vertical lines
0
Imaging window: within blue-and-white frame
0
Baseline: blue line
0
Gripper margin: reddish-brown strip below base-
line
Display and input:
0 The "X", "Y" coordinates show the current cursor
position. The bottom left corner of the plate is the
origin. The coordinates are shown in the set unit
of measure.
0 "W", "H": The width and height of a frame you cre-
ate are shown in these boxes.

To select an object. Click an object that can be

selected. This object then has a yellow frame and you
can move it holding down the mouse button.

112 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the

magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom
down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.
Hand tool: Lets you move scaled-up objects into the
view frame. Hold down the space bar while doing so.
To set a measuring point and create a frame: This
tool lets you set measuring points or create a frame
and read off the values in the read-only boxes on the
left. As an alternative to the tool: "command key +
Shift key"
User-defined dimensions:
This tool lets you measure from one defined edge
(e.g. paper edge, page edge, etc.) to another defined
edge.
Example:
You are going to measure the distance between the
paper edge and the beginning of the subject.
0 Move the mouse pointer to the paper edge.

0 The starting edge is shown as a red bar.

0 Hold down the mouse button and drag the

mouse pointer to the beginning of the subject.

0
The target edge is shown as a green bar.
0
Let go of the mouse button.
0
The distance from the page edge to the paper
edge is shown along a line between the red and
green bar.
Note: Dimensioning in the following tool (View
Properties) must be enabled.
0
Use the shortcut "Alt + click" to delete the dimen-
sions.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 113

Editors ABC

View Properties:
You can use this tool to change the graphic display.
Working with layers, see View Properties and
Enable/Disable Layers, page 86.
0
"View" tab: For showing or hiding the various
objects.
0
"Dimensions" tab: For showing or hiding the
dimensions of various objects.
0
"Grid" tab: For showing or hiding a grid and set-
ting its color.
List box with zoom factors.

Plate Template Tab

When you go to define a plate template, you should
load a press that is already defined (see the
section Sheetfed Press Editor, page 1172 and
section Web Press Editor, page 1173). You will find
the presses in the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs &
Resources > Resources & Machines" menu.

Plate Dimension
0 " Press": Click the folder button beside this box to
load a press. You set up this press beforehand in
the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs & Resources >
Resources & Machines" menu. If this is not the
case, you can also load a standard press included
in the shipment.
0 "Width", "Height": The height and width are
already defined as parameters and are automati-
cally set when you load the press. You can, how-
ever, change the parameters in this box.

114 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Paper Definitions
To be able to follow the definitions below, bear in
mind the press parameters that you defined in
"Machines".
Some of the following parameters are computed from
the press data.
0
"Max. paper width":
Max. paper width = plate width - (2 x print margin)
0
"Max. paper height": In the definition of the max.
paper height, it is assumed that the end of paper is
the same as the end of print (related to the plate
start).
The following is applicable for the max. paper
height:
Max. paper height = end of paper - baseline
Baseline is calculated as follows:
Baseline = Lead edge of print - gripper margin
When calculating the end of paper, remember
that the "Tail Edge of Print" value refers to the end
of the plate. This means that the end of paper is
calculated as follows:
End of paper = Plate height - tail edge of print
To summarize, the max. paper height is defined as
follows:
Max. paper height = Plate height - tail edge of print
- lead edge of print + gripper margin
0
"Baseline":
Baseline = Lead edge of print - gripper margin
0
"Gripper Margin": This value is already defined as a
machine parameter and is automatically set when

Prinect Signa Station Reference 115

Editors ABC

you load the press. You can, however, change it in

this box.
0
"X Offset": Horizontal offset of the paper in rela-
tion to the plate.

Output
0
"Output parameters": You already defined the out-
put parameter set beforehand as a resource. These
output parameters are used in this box.
The selected output parameter set is set by default
for output of the job.

Imaging Window
0
"Width", "Height": Size of the imaging window
"Width": Slow scan direction
"Height": Fast scan direction
0
The origin of the imaging window ("X", "Y") is at
the bottom left.
Note: If you want your output to be centered, make
2 sure that the imaging window is centered with
regard to the plate template. Set the position of
the imaging window with X, Y values.

Marks Tab
The "Marks List" contains all the marks that you posi-
tioned on the plate template. The list is sorted by "Sub-
ject", "Paper", "Plate". Within one group, the mark last
positioned is at the top. The list is then in the same
order as for printing.

116 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

This lets you display the "Marks" resource where you

can select a mark. The mark is positioned at the bot-
tom left of the graphic (origin) and is added to the
"Marks List".
Replace the selected mark by another one. The
selected mark is overwritten.
Delete selected mark.

Moves a selected mark up in the list (sorting func-

tion). The printing order is also defined.
Moves a selected mark down in the list (sorting func-
tion). The printing order is also defined.

0
"Group/Name": This displays the resources group
and the name of the selected mark.
0
"Color": Separations which will have the mark.
0
"Reference Point": Reference point on which the
mark will be placed. The hotspot of the mark
snaps accurately into position above this spot. The
reference points appear when you move a mark in
the graphic, holding down the mouse button.
Depending on what is set as the parent, the refer-
ence points for paper, plate or subject are shown.
0
"Position X, Y": Mark coordinate relative to the
selected reference point. Refer also to "Change"
button, page 976.
0 "Scaling X, Y": Scaling factor of the mark (mini-
mum = 10%, maximum = 500%).
Color control bars that are used for ink zone con-
trol may not be scaled in X direction. See also the
"Proportions" button, page 976.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 117

Editors ABC

0
"Orientation" of the mark.
0
"Parent": A mark is assigned to the paper, plate or
subject. If you change the size or position of one of
these objects, the position of the assigned mark is
matched automatically.
Expert Mode:
0
"Foreground": The mark is either on top of (= fore-
ground) or below the page content.
0
You can assign each mark to a certain surface
(front, back) or to "All Surfaces" using the "Surface"
list box.
0
"Width", "Height": Shows the mark size.
0
"Clippath": This parameter lets you define the part
of a mark that can be cut out. You can do this in
one of the following two ways:
a) You define the margins in "Clippath". When you
click a mark with the right mouse button, a yellow
rectangle surrounding the mark appears. The
margins defined refer to this rectangle.
0
"Margin left": A value of "0" corresponds to the
left margin of the rectangle surrounding the
mark. A value you enter is the distance starting
from the left margin and extending into the
mark. This part of the mark is cut out when
you hit the Tab key or click another text box.
0
"Margin bottom", "Right", "Top": See "Margin
left". You can cut the mark accordingly from
the bottom, right and top margin.
b) You can draw a bounding box within the mark.
This bounding box surrounds the part of the mark
that will remain after the other part is cut out.

118 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

To do this, press the command key + Shift key and

create the box holding down the mouse button.
First let go of the mouse button and then the com-
mand + Shift keys. Some of the bounding box
must be within the selected mark.

The function is only applied when you click this but-

ton.

You can find other tips in the User's Guide.

Marks Resources Tab

In this tab, you can drag-and-drop marks in the
graphic to the position you want. You will see refer-
ence points for paper and subject if you move an
object in the graphic holding down the mouse but-
ton.
All reference points (paper, plate, subject) are shown
while you drag-and-drop from the marks resources. A
mark relates to a certain reference point (parent)
when you position it on this reference point. Paper is
always taken as the reference if you do not place the
mark on a reference point.
Only the reference points of the relevant parent are
shown when you move a mark.
You can find more details in Selected Mark,
page 972.

Notes on Marks
0 The "TilingLine_Horizontal" and
"TilingLine_Vertical" marks must have "Paper" as
their parent as tiling will not work if they don't.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 119

Editors ABC

0
In tiling, the start of imaging can be defined by
setting the "TilingLine_Horizontal" and
"TilingLine_Vertical" lines:
a) The outer tiling line is within the paper: In this
case, the plate defines the start of imaging. The til-
ing line tiles the sheet and the appropriate tile
numbers are displayed.
b) The outer tiling line is outside the paper or at
the start of it: In this case, imaging starts at the
position of the tiling line. The sheet is not divided
by this tiling line.
0
The "TilingRegister" and "TilingText" marks are set
automatically.

Loading the "Plate Templates" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the resource to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

Folding Scheme Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a folding
scheme that is saved as a resource in "Schemes".
You have a list box at the top right in the "Matrix"
group that you can use to create or edit a scheme for
web offset. You can choose between sheetfed offset
and web offset (up to 8 webs). A list box displays at the
bottom of the window beside the "Save" button if you
have two or more webs, allowing you to switch
between the webs. To start the "Fold Assistant for
Web", click the button in "Scheme Generated from
Folding Rule". See Fold Assistant for Web, page 1128
for details.

1110 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

For a three-dimensional view of a folding scheme, see

also Folding Sheet Animation, page 1225.

Folding Scheme Data

0
"Folding Scheme Name": Exact name of a fold type
listed in Heidelberg's fold type catalog that will be
used in this scheme.
The folding scheme name is saved for automatic
finishing (default at the folding machine).
The folding scheme name is defined in the stan-
dard schemes. It should only be edited if special
defaults will be defined at the folding machine.
0
"Folding Type (CIP4)": Folding using the CIP4 fold
type catalog automatically displays for the default
schemes for finishing in the workflow.
0
"Comment": This is where you can enter com-
ments about the scheme. They will not be evalu-
ated.
0
"Center Offset": Normally (symmetric binding), the
value is "0" (see Center offset below). The system
sets implausible values for the center offset back
to "0".
0
"Insert at Index": The next sheet is inserted after
this number of pages (e.g. for saddlestitching).
This box and the center offset each base their cal-
culations on the other. In addition, the pages
before the insertion point are darker and the
pages after it lighter.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1111

Editors ABC

Center offset

What is center offset?

In asymmetric binding with fold-out pages, center off-
set defines in which fold binding will be.
The purpose of center offset is to calculate page num-
bering and creeping correctly. Creeping is not used
on fold-out pages.

When is center offset used?

Center offset is used only with products that have the
following criteria:
0
The scheme is single-lined.
0
There are fold-out pages. In other words, binding
is asymmetric with regard to the folding scheme.
0
The selected binding method is saddle-stitching or
mixed binding. Creeping must be calculated cor-
rectly.

1112 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Example: A book will have the following folding

sheet:
Folding scheme F04-01_ui_2x1

Pagination and orientation

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1113

Editors ABC

This is to contain a sheet with one fold-out page. The

sheet has the following folding scheme:
Folding scheme F06-04_ui_3x1_P (not a standard scheme)

Pagination and orientation

The left leaf can be folded out on this sheet. Binding

must be in fold 2.
The "Center Offset" parameter defines in which fold
binding will be.

Calculation of the center offset

1. The reference point for center offset is the theoretical
center of the scheme. You determine the theoretical
center of the scheme by dividing the number of all
the sheet pages (front and back) by two.
In our example, the theoretical center of the sheet
with the fold-out page is "3".
2. Now count the front and back pages from left to right
until you come to the fold where binding will be.

1114 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

In our example binding is in fold 2. The number of

front and back pages until fold 2 is "4".
3. The center offset is the difference between the num-
ber of these pages and the theoretical center.
In our example, the value is "1" (4-3). The center offset
is positive in this case. This means that the fold where
binding will be is to the right of the theoretical cen-
ter.
0
Positive center offset: The fold is to the right of the
theoretical center.
0
Negative center offset: The fold is to the left of the
theoretical center.

Matrix
0
"Columns": Number of columns in the scheme
0
"Rows": Number of rows in the scheme
0
List box for printing process (sheetfed or web with
the number of webs)
0
"Back by Tumble": The default setting is that the
back is created by work-and-turn. You must check
this option if you wish to create the back by work-
and-tumble.

Customize
0
"Generate Back": You generated the page numbers
and orientation for the front. The page numbers
and orientation for the back are generated auto-
matically if you check "Generate Back".
0
"Use Prototype": You have an imposition scheme
with many identical 1ups.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1115

Editors ABC

0
Front: With "Use Prototype", you can copy the
number and orientation of the bottom left 1up
that is marked "(1,1)" to all 1ups on the front.
0
Back: With "Use Prototype", you can copy the
number and orientation of the 1up that is
marked "(1,1)" to all 1ups on the back.
Sheetwise: The prototype is the bottom right
1up.
Perfector: The prototype is the top left 1up.
0
"Push Together": This function is used if you wish
to exclude positions from pagination in the fold-
ing scheme and yet keep numbering consecutive.
This is required, for example, when only parts of a
web are used in printing (see Push Together
below).

Push Together
A press with two webs will now be used as an example
of how you proceed with "Push Together". The second
web width is half the size of the first web.
1. In the "Matrix" group, create a 2x2 scheme and select
"Double Web Press".
2. Enter folding rule "X1Y1".

1116 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

All other settings remain as they are. You then have

the following page setup:
Web 1 without 'Push Together'

Web 2 without 'Push Together'

3. Web 2 is half as wide as web 1. This means that pages

14, 3, 13 and 4 would not be positioned on paper in
the scheme. Set these page numbers to "0".

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1117

Editors ABC

4. Click "Push Together". The page numbers are now cor-

rected. The correct scheme is now as follows:
Web 1 with 'Push Together'

Web 2 with 'Push Together'

Scheme Generated from Folding Rule

In principle, page numbering and page orientation
always depend on all the other parameters in this
group.
0 "Folding Rule": You can type in the folding rule
manually in this box (see the Folding rule,
page 1119 below).
0 Fold Assistant: Start the Folding Assistant by click-
ing the icon on the right. The Fold Assistant is a

1118 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

graphic tool for creating folding rules (see the Fold

Assistant / folding sheet animation, page 1124
below).
0
"Pagination":
0
"Normal": The pages of the product you want to
fold are numbered consecutively like a book.
All the pages have the same orientation.
0
"Calendar": The pages of the product you want
to fold are numbered consecutively like a book.
Every second page has the opposite orienta-
tion.
0
"Accordion Fold": This type of pagination only
affects single-lined schemes. Viewed from page
1, page numbering is to the right and circular
(including the back) and in ascending order.
All the pages have the same orientation.
0
"Orientation of Top Page after Folding": Click the
middle of the side edge to change the orientation.
0
"Web 1 on Bottom": On most web presses, web 1 is
on top. You must click this option if web 1 on your
press is on the bottom.
0
"First Page on Back": This is where you set whether
page 1 lies at the front or back after folding.
0
"Apply Folding Procedure to Front": Some prod-
ucts require that the back is printed first and then
the front. In such cases, the front lies on top after
printing. You must then apply the folding rule to
the front.

Folding rule
The folding rule elements are "X", "x", "Y", "y", "." and
digits after the letter. The "-" sign is used in special
cases and is placed at the start of a folding step.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1119

Editors ABC

The fold lay mark is always at the bottom left. Folding

is always from left to right and from bottom to top.
0
X: Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on top;
the left pages lie on top of the right pages after
folding.
0
x: Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on bot-
tom; the left pages lie below the right pages after
folding.
0
Y: Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on top;
the lower pages lie on top of the upper pages after
folding.
0
y: Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on bot-
tom; the lower pages lie below the upper pages
after folding.
0
".": Stands for Cut & Stack. The sheets are cut and
stacked on top or to the bottom.
0
Digit: Number of pages up to the fold from left to
right or from bottom to top.
0
"-": If there is a "-" sign in the folding rule, all fold-
ing steps after the "-" are ignored in finishing. The
sheets are not actually folded after the "-". How-
ever, the steps after the "-" still run through the
folding rule so that the page numbers can be cal-
culated correctly. Refer also to Example for fold-
ing rule "X1-Y1", page 1122 and Example for
folding rule "X1X2-x1" for a double gate fold,
page 1123.
You cannot create the "-" sign with the Fold Assis-
tant.

1120 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Example for folding rule "X2x1Y2y1"

The standard scheme "F32-08_li_4x4" is used:
Folding scheme F32-08_li_4x4

Show:
Fold broken line down.
Fold continuous line up.
The folding rule in this case is "X2x1Y2y1".
1. X2: Go two pages to the right. You are now at fold 1.
Fold your sheet so that the two left pages lie on top of
the two right pages.
2. x1: Go one page to the right. You are now at fold 2.
Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie below
the right pages.
3. Y2: Go two pages to the top. You are now at fold 3.
Fold your sheet so that that the lower pages lie on the
upper pages.
4. y1: Go one page up. You are now at fold 4. Fold your
sheet so that that the lower pages lie below the upper
pages.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1121

Editors ABC

Example for folding rule "X1-Y1"

In this example, we'll use standard scheme "F08-
07_li_2x2". The folding rule in this case is "X1Y1".
Folding scheme F08-07_li_2x2

Change the folding rule to "X1-Y1". Folding is as

shown below if you enter this folding rule. What is
special about this folding rule is that step Y1 is not
done after the "-" sign.

1. X1: Go one page to the right. You are now at fold 1.

Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie on the
right pages.
2. "-": The "-" sign means that the next step "Y1" is ignored
in finishing.
3. Y1: Go one page up. You are now at fold 2. You would
now fold your sheet so that the lower pages lie on top
of the upper pages.

1122 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Practical example for "Come & Go" binding method:

Instead of folding in fold 2, the cutter is used at this
point when all the sheets are stacked. The lower stack
is packed on the top stack by work-and-tumble.

Example for folding rule "X1X2-x1" for a double gate fold

The standard scheme "F06-03_ui_3-4x1" is used:
Folding scheme F06-03_ui_3-4x1

The folding rule in this case is "X1X2-x1".

1. X1: Go one page to the right. You are now at fold 1.
Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie on the
right pages.
2. X2: Go two pages to the right. You are now at fold 2.
Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie on top of
the right pages.
3. "-": The "-" sign means that the next step "x1" is ignored
in finishing.
4. x1: Go one page to the right. There is no fold here in a
double gate fold. You would now fold your sheet so
that the left pages lie below the right pages.
In a double gate fold, there is no middle fold. For that
reason, step "x1" is ignored in finishing.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1123

Editors ABC

Fold Assistant / folding sheet animation

Start the Fold Assistant by clicking the icon to the
right of the "Folding Rule" text box.
Depending on your input in "Matrix", you will see a
simplified graphic of the scheme. The fold lay mark is
at the bottom left.
Lower down in the window, you can see a three-
dimensional animated graphic that simulates folding
to you at the same time. Make your window bigger to
view both. You can edit in a two-dimensional or three-
dimensional view as suits you best. The two view
options will now be described.
Both tools are linked together. Any editing you do in
the Fold Assistant is shown at the same time in the
fold animation and vice versa.

Fold Assistant
There are two symbols before every possible fold. They
indicate whether folding is up or down. It is also pos-
sible to cut the folding sheet along the symmetrical
axes into same-sized halves:

"X": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on top;

1124 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

"y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on bot-

tom; the lower pages lie below the upper pages after
folding.
"Y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked to "bottom";
the sheet to the left of the cutting edge lies below the
right part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.
"y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked to "top"; the
sheet to the left of the cutting edge lies above the
right part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.
"X": Cut in open sheet length and stacked to "top";
the sheet below the cutting edge lies above the other
part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.
"x": Cut in open sheet length and stacked to "bot-
tom"; the sheet below the cutting edge lies below the
other part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.

A part of the light-green scheme disappears after

every fold or cut. Each fold or cut is documented as
part of the folding rule in the "Folding Rule" text box
and the small graphic above it. At the end, you should
be left with a dark green box representing the top-
most page.
0
"Back One Step": Undoes the last fold.
0
"Reset": Undoes all folds.
0 "Apply": The current folding rule appears in the
"Folding Rule" box of the Folding Scheme Editor.
The Fold Assistant is exited. Any implausible fold-
ing rules are marked red.
0
"Cancel": The Fold Assistant is exited. No folding
rule is applied.
You cannot create the "-" sign with the Fold Assistant
(see Folding rule, page 1119).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1125

Editors ABC

Fold Animation
The fold animation shows you a three-dimensional
graphic of the scheme on the folding sheet. Enable
the edit mode with a click on the button described
below.
The following functionalities are implemented:

Deselects the other tools.

Resets a rotated folding sheet to the way it originally

was.
Rotates, moves and scales up/down the animation.
To rotate: Click the animated graphic while holding
down the mouse button and move the mouse
pointer.
To move: Click the animated graphic while holding
down the alternative mouse button (PC: right but-
ton, Macintosh: command key) and move the mouse
pointer.
To scale up/down: Click the animated graphic and
rotate the wheel on the mouse.
To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the
magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom
down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.
Enables the edit mode.

After you enable the edit mode, two symbols appear

before every possible fold (green: front, yellow: back).
They indicate whether folding is up or down. It is also
possible to cut the folding sheet along the symmetri-
cal axes into same-sized halves (red, blue):

1126 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

"X": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on top;

the left pages lie on top of the right pages after fold-
ing.
"Y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on top;
the lower pages lie on top of the upper pages after
folding.
"x": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on bot-
tom; the left pages lie below the right pages after
folding.
"y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on bot-
tom; the lower pages lie below the upper pages after
folding.
"Y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked to "bottom";
the sheet to the left of the cutting edge lies below the
right part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.
"y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked to "top"; the
sheet to the left of the cutting edge lies above the
right part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.
"X": Cut in open sheet length and stacked to "top";
the sheet below the cutting edge lies above the other
part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.
"x": Cut in open sheet length and stacked to "bot-
tom"; the sheet below the cutting edge lies below the
other part, only applicable on symmetrical axes.

The animation shows you how a part of the scheme is

folded or cut each time you define a fold or cut and
how the sheets are stacked on top or to the back. Each
fold or cut is documented as part of the folding rule
in the "Folding Rule" text box and the small graphic
above it. At the end, you should be left with one box
representing the topmost page.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1127

Editors ABC

0
"Back One Step": Undoes the last fold.
0
"Reset": Undoes all folds.
0
"Apply": The current folding rule appears in the
"Folding Rule" box of the Folding Scheme Editor.
The fold animation is exited. Any implausible fold-
ing rules are marked red.
0
"Cancel": The fold animation is exited. No folding
rule is applied.
You cannot create the "-" sign with the fold animation
(see Folding rule, page 1119).

Fold Assistant for Web

You start the Fold Assistant for Web after you set web
in the list box in "Matrix" and by clicking the button
to the right of the "Folding Rule" text box
After you set web in "Matrix", you will see a simplified
graphic of the scheme with the number of possible
ribbons (web width), number of webs and number of
possible vertical rows.
In the Fold Assistant, you define how the webs will be
cut and how the resulting ribbons will be positioned
at the former.
We will now describe the tools in this window:

Cut:
The web is cut into ribbons in running direction of
the web. The ribbons are yellow and light-yellow.

1128 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Stack:
The webs with the various ribbons are placed in the
former with the "Stack" button.

Turn:
You can turn the ribbons in the former. Ribbons that
are turned are green.

Position:
This tool lets you reposition the ribbons at the
former.

Parts of a web: If you have webs that do not go across

the full width of the paper, do not stack ribbons that
don't match the web at the former.
0
"Apply": The Fold Assistant displays to define the
horizontal and parallel folds. See Fold Assistant /
folding sheet animation, page 1124 for details.
0
"Cancel": The Fold Assistant for Web is exited.

Naming Used in the Standard Schemes

The elements of scheme "F06-04_dd_3x1_P" are taken
as an example to explain the naming in standard
schemes:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1129

Editors ABC

F06-04 d d 3x1 P
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

0 (1): Name of the scheme as listed in Heidelberg's

fold type catalog.
First digit: Number of pages per folding sheet
Second digit after the hyphen: Consecutive num-
ber
0
(2): Orientation of the top page after folding:
u: upright
d: head down
l: head to left
r: head to right
0
(3): Numbering order
i: increment, 1st page is in front after folding
d: decrement, 1st page is at back after folding
0
(4): "Number of columns" x "Number of rows"
0
(5): Numbering is for a brochure if a "P" is added to
the scheme name. The "Accordion Fold" pagina-
tion mode in the Folding Scheme Editor is for bro-
chure numbering.

Double Gate Fold as a Special Case

The following scheme names are designed for double
gate folds:
0
F06-03_ui_3-4x1
0
F06-03_ud_3-4x1_P

1130 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

The difference to all other names used for standard

schemes is found in the number of columns specified
in item (4), see above.
In this case, the number of columns is defined as "3-
4". "3" stands for the number of unfolded pages. "4"
stands for the number of numbered pages.

Loading the "Schemes" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the resource to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Folding Schemes"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Schemes"

Marks Editor
Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a mark that is
saved as a resource in "Marks".

"General" Group
0
"Group Name": Displays the assigned group
(folder) of the mark. You cannot edit the group
name.
0 "Mark name": Displays the name of the mark. The
name appears after the mark is saved to the
resources. You can edit the name.
0 "PPF Name": Displays the mark name in conjunc-
tion with the PPF name (alias name).
0
"Mark Type":
Displays the mark type. List box for setting the
type: "Register Mark", "Color Control Mark", "Scav-
enger Mark", "Ink Pickup Mark" and "Plate Control
Mark". The mark type you set is saved for finishing.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1131

Editors ABC

The two mark types, Ink Pickup Mark and Plate

Control Mark, were introduced because of the new
color control bar workflow. More details can be
found in Allow Spot Colors to BCMY, page 913.
0
"Hotspot": A scheme or plate template has refer-
ence points. These are magnetic alignment spots
that help to position the marks correctly. The
hotspot of the mark snaps accurately into position
above this spot. You must define the correct posi-
tion of the hotspot within the mark.
If you enabled "Grid" in the graphic area, you will
see that the grid has a violet hotspot.
0
"Marks Layer": Displays the layer on which the
mark is positioned; list box for setting marks to a
layer, possible options: Undefined (Automatic is
used), Foreground, Background.
0
"Background Colors":
This option lets you assign a number of back-
ground colors (max. 24) to the mark. The back-
ground of the mark is colored in the background
colors selected in "Job Inspector > Colors". The
background colored corresponds to the size of the
clip path of the mark.
Prerequisite: The "Background Colors" column
must be enabled in "File > Preferences > General".
There may be issues if you have non-white printing
material because DIPCO color control bars are
always set to knockout.
0
"Number of Additional Fields": You can define the
number of color patches that will project beyond
the subject if you have color control marks with
AutoClip to subject.

1132 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

0
"Ink Coverage in Proof":
Display and setting of the ink coverage of a color
mark for proofing. You can reduce the ink cover-
age of color marks, for example, to save ink when
proofing.
The following requirements must be met to out-
put marks with less ink:
0
The "Options > Proof > Print Proof Marks with
Less Ink" check box must be enabled in the out-
put parameter set for the job output.
0
The "General > Workflow > MetaDimension"
workflow with the "MetaDimension 7 and
higher (via JobTicket)" variant must be selected
in the output parameter set for the job output.
0
The ink coverage of a set mark in the job must
be less than 100%.
The mark can be proofed with less ink if these
three requirements are met. Plate output is not
affected by the reduction of ink.
0
"Color": Displays the separation on which the
mark is positioned; list box for setting marks to
separations.
0
"More details for marks with AutoClip":
This function lets you fit the color control mark to
the subject even better.
Existing geometry data are applied automatically
when you import DIPCO marks as of version 3.1.
You can define the geometry data manually for
other color control marks.
0
"Fixed position for front and back": The mark posi-
tion in relation to the origin is generally different

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1133

Editors ABC

for front and back. For work-and-turn, for exam-

ple, it is mirrored so that the mark is in the right
position for the pages.
There are cases where the mark position has to be
the same for the front and back. You must set this
option in such cases. Barcode marks for plate iden-
tification is such a case.
0
"Mirror Mark":
Mirrored positioning of marks is necessary, for
example, when creating plate templates for flexo
plate production (coating plate).
Note: In conjunction with "Mirror mark on back",
you can logically select only one or no option.
0
"Output Mark on Paper Only":
If a mark is positioned on "paper", it is also output.
If it is not, it will be suppressed.
0
"Mirror mark on back":
The mark content generally will not be mirrored if
the mark position is mirrored on the back.
You must only set this option if the mark content
is to be mirrored on the back.
Note: In conjunction with "Mirror Mark", you can
logically select only one or no option.
0
"AutoClip Mark"
Automatic marks are trimmed so that they do not
jut into the content. This was always the case so
far, now you can disable the option.
0
"Cover Mark Background":
The background of the mark is covered the size of
the clip path of the mark and as a result is not
transparent.

1134 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

0
"Copy Mark to Front Only"
A mark is copied only to the front when it is cop-
ied to other plates.

Graphic Area

Tools for Creating Marks

To select several graphic objects, hold down the Alt
key and click the relevant objects with the mouse.

Edit tool: Edits a selected object. Click a handle with

this tool to change the object.
Hand tool: Moves selected objects. Click an object
with this tool to move the object.
Creates a circle or ellipse.

Creates a straight line.

Creates a square or rectangle.

Colors the object below the mouse pointer black.

Colors the object below the mouse pointer white.

Inserts text. Enables the placeholder list box.

Deletes selected objects.

Copies selected objects.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1135

Editors ABC

Centers selected objects.

Fits canvas to bounding box. The canvas is centered

in the bounding box.
Brings selected objects to the front:
The objects are brought to the front in the order they
were selected.
Zoom up graphic is set by default. A "+" appears in
the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to
zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.

Text Boxes
0
"Grid": This option lets you display a grid and
hotspot (violet circle) as a visual guide. The
hotspot always appears at the center of the grid.
0
"Snap lines": Snap lines are seen if you set this
option. Snap lines help you position objects. In a
defined area, the objects are aligned magnetically
to the snap line and remain attached to it.
You can change the shape and size of the object at
the snap line if you selected it with the edit cursor
(e.g. a circle can become an ellipse). You can only
change the object position at the snap line if you
selected the object with the hand cursor.
0
To create snap lines: Click the ruler with the
edit tool and drag the snap line to the graphic
holding down the mouse button.
0
To delete snap lines: Click the snap line with
the edit tool and drag it out of the graphic
holding down the mouse button.

1136 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

0
To position snap lines: Click the snap line with
the edit tool and position it holding down the
mouse button.
0
"Line weight": This is where you define the line
weight for circles, rectangles and lines.
0
List box with all the objects that are found in the
graphic. You can select "All" or single objects in
this box. The objects are shown in the order they
were created.

Properties dialog for a selected graphic object. You

can define properties such as size, position, line
weight, fill color, etc. and paste placeholders in this
dialog. The dialog can vary depending on the object
you selected (graphic, text).
The properties dialog for a canvas opens if an object is
not selected. You can set the size and color of the can-
vas and the grid size in this dialog.
"Undo" function: Undoes the last action.

"Redo" function: Redoes the last action deleted with

"Undo".

Other text boxes are needed for creating text marks.

You can find a description of these boxes in the next
section Text Mark Editor, page 1138.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1137

Editors ABC

Text Mark Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a pure text
mark that is saved as a resource in "Marks".

"General" Group
0 More details can be found in the "General" Group,
page 1131.

Font
0
Details about the font type and size, ink coverage
and font running direction (horizontal, vertical).

Text
0
Selection of a placeholder that you can paste with
"Insert placeholder".

Creating a Text Mark

To create "internal text marks", see Creating Internal
Marks, page 88
1. You can open the Text Mark Editor to create a new
mark in two different ways:
0 Main menu: "File > Create Resource > New Mark >
Text Mark Editor"
0 Main menu: "Jobs & Resources > Marks", > right-
click group name > "New Mark > Text Mark Editor"
(2.) "General": Give your new text mark a name. The
group name shows you the folder in which the text
mark will be saved.
(3.) "Font": This is where you can select the "Font Type"
and "Font Size" of the text mark.

1138 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

(4.) "Ink Coverage": This is where you can select the gray-
scale of the text mark.
0
Click "Save" to view your inputs in the graphic
without closing the editor.
0
You can also create text marks directly in the
"Marks Editor" dialog. Use the list boxes for font,
font size and placeholders for this. Click the "Text"
tool to enable the text mode. You can now define
text properties after you click the "Open Proper-
ties dialog for selected object" button. Proceed as
described for the Text Mark Editor (see above).
(5.) "Running Direction": Define the direction of your
text. In the list box, you can set that the text will run
vertically (from top to bottom) or horizontally (from
left to right).
6. Enter your mark text in "Text".
You can mix your edited mark text with placeholders
as you want (see next two steps).
7. There is a list box above the text box with all the
placeholders such as "Job Number", "Output Date",
etc.
For example, select "Job Number" and confirm your
selection by clicking the "Insert placeholder" button
on the right.
As you progress in your work, the placeholders are
replaced by their respective contents (see the
section Placeholders for Text Marks, page 1139).

Placeholders for Text Marks

There are three groups of placeholders that are sepa-
rated by horizontal lines in the list box (for list box,
see the section Creating a Text Mark, page 1138,
step 10):

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1139

Editors ABC

First group:
Placeholders that are replaced by the Prinect Prepress
Manager in a Prinect Prepress Manager workflow, even if
Prinect Signa Station is started from the Prinect Prepress Reference required by
Manager. placeholders in
These placeholders are replaced by Prinect Signa Station Prinect Signa Station so
in a workflow without the Prinect Prepress Manager. that they can be replaced.
Asir code (Mller Martini) $[ASIR] Press Sheet
Job Name $[jobname] Press Sheet
Job number $[jobid] Press Sheet
Output date $[Date] Press Sheet
Output time $[Time] Press Sheet
Sheet $[Sheet] Press Sheet
Layer name $[LayerName] Press Sheet
Trim Box (width) $[PageTrimSizeX] Page
Trim Box (height) $[PageTrimSizeY] Page
Trim Box (offset horizontal) $[PageOffsetX] Page
Trim Box (offset vertical) $[PageOffsetY] Page
Separation $[color] Press Sheet
Color for Proof $[color all] Press Sheet
Customer name $[customername] Press Sheet
Customer ID $[customerid] Press Sheet
Layout bleed size (width) $[ImpBleedSizeX] Page
Layout bleed size (height) $[ImpBleedSizeY] Page
Layout Name $[ImpPlanName] Folding Sheet

1140 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

First group:
Placeholders that are replaced by the Prinect Prepress
Manager in a Prinect Prepress Manager workflow, even if
Prinect Signa Station is started from the Prinect Prepress Reference required by
Manager. placeholders in
These placeholders are replaced by Prinect Signa Station Prinect Signa Station so
in a workflow without the Prinect Prepress Manager. that they can be replaced.
Version Index (e.g. for Barcode) $[VersionIndex] Page
Calibration $[ProcessCalCurve] Page
Page rotation (0, 90, 180, 270 $[PO] Page
degrees)
Page List $[PageSetName] Page
Name of the page $[PageName] Page
Layout Page Number $[PagePositionName] Page
Page scale (width) $[PageScaleX] Page
Page scale (height) $[PageScaleY] Page
Product Part $[ProductName] Press Sheet
Version Name (Language Ver- $[VersionName] Press Sheet
sion)

Second group: Reference required by

Placeholders that are always replaced by Prinect Signa placeholders in
Station in every workflow, even if the job/product part is Prinect Signa Station so
edited with the Prinect Prepress Manager. that they can be replaced.
Absolute Job Path $[JobPath] Press Sheet
Application $[Application] Press Sheet
Required Material (Total $[RequiredReelArea] Press Sheet
Area)

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1141

Editors ABC

Second group: Reference required by

Placeholders that are always replaced by Prinect Signa placeholders in
Station in every workflow, even if the job/product part is Prinect Signa Station so
edited with the Prinect Prepress Manager. that they can be replaced.
Required Material (Total $[RequiredReelLength] Press Sheet
Length)
Binding Methods $[Binding] Press Sheet
Sheet Number $[Sheetno] Press Sheet
Page Document $[PageDocumentName] Press Sheet
Printing Type $[PrintType] Folding Sheet
Created by $[Creator] Press Sheet
Folding sheet number $[Sheetregionno] Folding Sheet
Folding Rule (HDM) $[StahlFold] Press Sheet
Folding Scheme Name $[SchemeName] Folding Sheet
Collating Number $[SheetregionGroupno] Folding Sheet
Collating Number as $[SheetregionGroupnoAs Folding Sheet
Letter Character]
Placing mode $[PrintWorkstyle] Press Sheet
Replacers $[FreeReplacerXY] Press Sheet
Number of 1ups on $[PressSheetPageCount] Press Sheet
Sheet
Modified by $[Modifier] Each reference
Max. Folding Sheet $[MaxSheetNumber] Folding Sheet
Number
Press Name $[PressName] Press Sheet
Job Notes $[OutputComment] Press Sheet

1142 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Second group: Reference required by

Placeholders that are always replaced by Prinect Signa placeholders in
Station in every workflow, even if the job/product part is Prinect Signa Station so
edited with the Prinect Prepress Manager. that they can be replaced.
Collating Group Num- $[CollatingGroupno] Folding Sheet
ber
Station Number $[StationNumber] Page
OPP/OPC $[OPP] Press Sheet
Paper thickness $[PaperThickness] Press Sheet
Paper Size $[PaperFormat] Press Sheet
Paper Grammage $[PaperGrammage] Press Sheet
Position on Paper $[PositionOnPaper] Press Sheet
Report Page Number $[ReportPageNo] Press Sheet
Web Name $[WebName] Press Sheet
Front and Back / Top $[SurfaceName] Press Sheet
and Bottom
Number of Pages $[PageCount] Press Sheet
Page Cut Index $[PageCutIndex] Press Sheet
Page Number in Docu- $[PageNumberInDocu- Press Sheet
ment ment]
Part number $[Tile] Press Sheet
Product Part Comment $[JobpartComment] Press Sheet

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1143

Editors ABC

Third group:
Placeholders that are not replaced by Prinect Signa Are not replaced. Should
Station but by the Prinect Prepress Manager. refer in
Prinect Signa Station to the
press sheet.
Resolution (X Direction) $[ResolutionX] Press Sheet
Resolution (Y Direction) $[ResolutionY] Press Sheet
Sheet Variant Name $[VariantName] Press Sheet
Sheet ID $[SheetID] Press Sheet
Surface Comment $[SurfaceComment] Press Sheet
ICC press profile $[ICCPressProfile] Press Sheet
ICC proofer profile $[ICCProoferProfile] Press Sheet
Customer Approval Com- $[CustomerApproval- Press Sheet
ment Comment]
Customer Job Name $[CustomerJobname] Press Sheet
Customer Job Number $[CustomerJobID] Press Sheet
Linearization group $[LinearizationGroup] Press Sheet
Linearization curve $[LinearizationCurve] Press Sheet
MetaDimension Inter- $[Interpreter] Press Sheet
preter
Name of the sequence $[SequenceTemplate- Press Sheet
template Name]
Plate Date $[PlateDate] Press Sheet
Plate ID $[PlateID] Press Sheet
Plate ID All Plates $[PlateID all] Press Sheet
Plate Code $[PlateCode] Press Sheet

1144 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Third group:
Placeholders that are not replaced by Prinect Signa Are not replaced. Should
Station but by the Prinect Prepress Manager. refer in
Prinect Signa Station to the
press sheet.
Production Approval $[ProductionApproval- Press Sheet
Comment Comment]
Proof Date $[ProofDate] Press Sheet
Proof ID $[ProofID] Press Sheet
Proof Code $[ProofCode] Press Sheet
Process Calibration Group $[ProcessCalGroup] Press Sheet
Dot shape $[DotShape] Press Sheet
Screen system $[ScreenSystem] Press Sheet
Screen Frequency $[ScreenRuling] Press Sheet
Page Source Job Number $[PageSourceJobID] Press Sheet
Page Comment $[PageComment] Press Sheet
Signature number $[Signature] Press Sheet
Submit Comment $[SubmitComment] Press Sheet

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job

The marks are also loaded indirectly with the "Plate
Templates" resource. On the plate template, the
marks set refer to the plate, paper or subject.
This is where you load the "Marks" resource to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Binding Methods" > "Automatic
Placement of Print Control Marks" The cut marks
and folding sheet labels that are set relate to the
pages, and the folding and collating marks to the

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1145

Editors ABC

folding sheet. The marks are selected in the prefer-

ences.
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Binding"
0
Folding Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks
Resources"
0
Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"
0
Page Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"
0
Direct assignment by dragging and dropping the
resource from the "Marks Resources" tab of the
inspectors named above.

Ink Pickup Bar Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit an ink pickup
bar that is saved as a resource in "Marks".

"General" Group
See the "General" Group, page 1131 in the "Marks
Editor" section.

Graphic Area
The graphic shows the defined ink pickup bar.
0 "+" magnifying glass: Zoom up graphic display
0
"-" magnifying glass: Zoom down graphic display
0
"Width", "Height": Size of a color element in the
ink pickup bar.
The height of internal marks is set by default and
cannot be changed. See also page 88. The height

1146 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

of each color is computed from the overall height

divided by the number of colors.
0
"Cycle": Duplication of the selected color layers.
0
"Ink Coverage": Ink coverage corresponds to the
grayscale and is indicated in percent. Ink coverage
refers to the whole ink pickup bar.
0
"Vertical Color Strips": The ink pickup bars are
arranged vertically.
0
"Overlay Colors": Single colors are placed one on
top of the other. In addition, an "Ink Coverage" col-
umn was added to "Choose Color Layer". You can
define the ink coverage manually for each color in
this column.
0
"Show Color Name in Strip": The color names are
written to the strip.
0
"Choose Color Layer": This is where you can select
the number of colors to be in the ink pickup bar.
Do this by ticking the boxes in front of the color
codes.
An "Ink Coverage" column was added. See above in
"Overlay Colors".
You can find more details about color layers in
Color Definitions, page 913.

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job

See Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job,
page 1145 for details.

Color Control Bar Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a color con-
trol bar that is saved as a resource in "Marks".

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1147

Editors ABC

The color control bar always shows at least one

sequence of all the colors. You can vary the number of
colors and the elements per color for the ink cover-
ages.
The graphic below is an example of a bar with four
colors, each with three elements. The elements have a
black frame and are labeled.
Example: Color control bar

"General" Group
See the "General" Group, page 1131 in the "Marks
Editor" section.

1148 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

0
"Element Height":
0
"Choose Color Layer": The ink coverage is shown
for every element of a color. The values of the sin-
gle elements are identical for all colors.
0
Table with "ink coverage": This table lets you
define the ink coverage that will be shown for
each element.

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job

See Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job,
page 1145 for details.

Color Control Bar Special Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a custom
color control bar that is saved as a resource in
"Marks".
The following items are different in the "Special Color
Control Bar":
0
You can vary the number and order of the color
elements of a sequence as desired.
0 You can define an ink coverage value for each
color element in a sequence.
0 You can define a grayscale. The ink coverage val-
ues of the single CMYK separations can be set for
the grayscale.
Example: Special color control bar

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1149

Editors ABC

"General" Group
See the "General" Group, page 1131 in the "Marks
Editor" section.

Graphic Area
0
"+" magnifying glass: Zoom up graphic display
0
"-" magnifying glass: Zoom down graphic display
0
"Suppress Description": Show, hide labeling of the
elements (color code and ink coverage).
0
"Elements without Frame": Show, hide the black
frame around an element.
0
"Width": Overall width of the color control bar. If
necessary, the value is rounded off so that only
integral multiple sequences are produced.
0
"Number of Elements": Number of elements (col-
ors) per sequence with respective ink coverage val-
ues. The colors appear at the bottom of the table
when this number is defined.
0
"Element Width", "Element Height": The color con-
trol bar is displayed when the element size is
defined.
0
Table with ink coverage values: "Number of Ele-
ments" must be defined in order for the colors to
be displayed.
The following display is the default setting: The
first four items are the standard colors CMYK. Spot
colors follow as of the fifth item.
You can change the order and number of colors as
desired. A list box with all the colors you can select
displays when you click a color item with the left

1150 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

mouse button. You can set any ink coverage value

for each color element in "D".
You will also see the item "CMYK" in the colors list
box. This item symbolizes the grayscale. You can
edit the "D-C", "D-M", "D-Y" and "D-K" boxes for the
grayscale. These are the ink coverage values of the
single CMYK separations.

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job

See Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job,
page 1145 for details.

Marks Import Editor

Use this editor if you wish to import different types of
color marks and save them as a resource in "Marks".
Acrobat Distiller starts when you import a PostScript
mark and the mark is converted to a PDF mark.
You can start the Marks Import Editor at the follow-
ing points:
0
In the main menu: "File > Create Resource > New
Mark > Marks Import > Source"
0 In the main menu: "Jobs & Resources > Marks" > in
the context-sensitive menu > "New Mark > Marks
Import > Source"

"General" Group
See the "General" Group, page 1131 in the "Marks
Editor" section.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1151

Editors ABC

Graphic Area
The default for marks import is always set to "AutoDe-
tect colors". To import "line marks", select the Marks
Import Editor (Line Mark) or switch to "Ignore color
comments".
1. Click "Source" in the "Marks Import Editor".
2. In the Open window, select the mark you wish to
import and click "Open".
Acrobat Distiller starts and the mark is converted to a
PDF mark.
A graphic display of the mark appears in the Marks
Import Editor.
3. Click "Save" in the Marks Import Editor.
The mark is filed as a resource in the relevant group.

Marks Import Editor (Line Mark)

Use this editor if you wish to import different types of
line marks (without color data) and save them as a
resource in "Marks". Acrobat Distiller starts when you
import a PostScript mark and the mark is converted
to a PDF mark.
You can start the Marks Import Editor (Line Mark) at
the following points:
0 In the main menu: "File > Create Resource > New
Mark > Marks Import (Line Mark) > Source"
0
In the main menu: "Jobs & Resources > Marks" > in
the context-sensitive menu > "New Mark > Marks
Import (Line Mark) > Source"

1152 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

"General" Group
See the "General" Group, page 1131 in the "Marks
Editor" section.

Graphic Area
The default for marks import (line mark) is always set
to "Ignore color comments". To import "color marks",
select the Marks Import Editor or switch to "AutoDe-
tect colors".
1. Click "Source" in the "Marks Import Editor".
2. In the Open window, select the mark you wish to
import and click "Open".
Acrobat Distiller starts and the mark is converted to a
PDF mark.
A graphic display of the mark appears in the Marks
Import Editor.
3. Click "Save" in the Marks Import Editor.
The mark is filed as a resource in the relevant group.

Combi Marks Editor

This is where you insert the various ink pickup bars
that you need. Use the folder button for this.
A combi mark is positioned on a plate template, for
example, if 4-color, 6-color or 8-color printing is possi-
ble. The combi mark automatically detects from the
job during output how many colors will be used in
printing and selects the matching ink pickup bar. You
can find more details about combi marks in "Working
with Marks" in the User's Guide.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1153

Editors ABC

"General" Group
See the "General" Group, page 1131 in the "Marks
Editor" section.

More details for marks with AutoClip

0
Use Additional Geometry Data
This function lets you fit the color control mark to
the subject even better.
Existing geometry data are applied automatically
when you import DIPCO marks as of version 3.1.
You can define the geometry data manually for
other color control marks.
You need the shipped DIPCO marks, version 4, for
the "Allow Spot Colors to BCMY" workflow.

Graphic Area
0
"Adds another mark to the combi mark list": Loads
a mark to the combi mark list.
0
"Updates marks found in the combi mark list"
0
"Edits the selected mark": Opens the relevant
Marks Editor so that you can edit the mark.
0
"Copies the selected mark to the clipboard"
0
"Deletes the selected mark from the combi mark
list"

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job

See Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job,
page 1145 for details.

1154 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Paper Editor
Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a data set
that defines a paper. It is saved as a resource in
"Papers (Printing Materials)".
The paper data are saved for finishing. They don't
have any control function. They are only displayed at
the press for your information.
See MDS (Master Data Store), page 428 for working
with an MDS.
0
"Group":
0
"Name":
0
Mark Name"
0
"Grammage": Paper weight in g/m:
0
"Volume": Paper volume (density) in cm/g
0
"Thickness"
0
"ISO Paper Grade"
0
"Width"
0
"Height"

Loading the "Papers (Printing Materials)" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the "Papers" resource to the
job:
0 Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates" > "Paper Defini-
tion for Production"

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1155

Editors ABC

Format Editor
Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a data set
that defines a paper format (page size, page-related
extra space, trim). This is saved in the "Page and Paper
Sizes" resource.

Loading the "Page and Paper Sizes" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the "Page and Paper Sizes"
resource to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Master Pages"
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
"Document Inspector"
Select the "Select page size for trim box from the
resources..." button.
This is where you can define the page and paper sizes
independently of the resource:
0
Trim Allowance for Pages: "Product Part Inspector
> Master Pages"

Plate Layout Editor

Use this editor if you wish to define the position of
folding sheets on a press sheet (plate) to suit your
needs. See the Graphic, page 964 to learn how this
function works.

Customer Data Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a new cus-
tomer data set that is saved as a resource in "Customer
Data".

1156 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Loading the "Customer Data" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the "Customer Data" resource
to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Job Data"
0
Job Inspector > "Administrative Data"

Output Parameter Set Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a new set of
output parameters that is saved as a resource in "Out-
put Parameter Sets".

"General" Tab
0
"Name": Displays the group folder name and the
name of the output parameter set that you can
edit.
0
"Imagesetter data set": This is where you select a
filmsetter or platesetter in "Filmsetters" or "Plate-
setters" in the Browser window. To do this, click
the folder button on the right. All installed film-
setters or platesetters will then be shown.
The name in the "Data set" box comprises
a) the group folder name of the imagesetter
resource and
b) the name of the imagesetter.
0 "Material": You cannot edit the material but only
select it from the list box. The "Width" and
"Height" show the size of the imaging window.
"Width": Slow scan direction
"Height": Fast scan direction

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1157

Editors ABC

You can only change the imaging window of the

materials in "Resources & Machines" in
"Machines".
0
"Workflow":
You select the workflow in the list box in "Device".
Then only the outputs possible in combination
with the device are shown in the list box in "Vari-
ant".
Possible combinations:

Output (Variant)
Post-
PDF JobTicket Script JDF
Device (Workflow) -
MetaDimension X X - -
Prinect Prepress Man- - - - X
ager
Prinergy - X - -
NexPress - X - -
OEM device X - Level 3 X
and
Level 2

0
"Output folder for PDF, JDF, JT": Click the folder
button to the right and select the output folder for
your output data in the Browser window.

1158 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Options Tab

Output
0
"All in one job": All the press sheets are output in
one job.
0
Advantage: High processing speed.
0
Disadvantage: If the output in large complex
jobs is faulty, the entire job must be output
again after the error is eliminated.
0
"One job per press sheet or web": One job per front
and back printing or per web is output.
0
Advantage: If the output in large complex jobs
is faulty, only a part of the job must be output
again after the error is eliminated. This saves
you time and material.
0
"One job per surface": A job is created for every
front and every back.
0
Advantage: If the output in large complex jobs
is faulty, only a small part of the job must be
output again after the error is eliminated. This
saves you time and material.
0
Disadvantage: The capacity of your output
device is not always used optimally.
0
"Print press sheets in reverse order": Output starts
with the last press sheet.
0
"Rearrange Back": For the back, you can switch
from "Sheetwise" to "Perfector" or vice versa as the
placement rule. This option lets you change your
output fast and simply without having to modify
the job settings.
This setting is used for finishing.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1159

Editors ABC

Orientation
0
"Best fit": The press sheets are rotated automati-
cally by 90 if they do not fit the output material.
0
"Portrait": The sheets are output in portrait for-
mat.
0
"Landscape": The sheets are output in landscape
format.

Visual Effects
0
"Separated Output (only PostScript workflow;
result depends on RIP)": Composite data can be
output as separated data.
0
"Convert Spot Colors to CMYK": Spot colors in a job
are not printed as they are but are converted to
CMYK and printed with the corresponding CMYK
values.
You cannot use this function in the PDF workflow
with separated data.
0
"Mirror horizontal" / "Mirror vertical" You can mir-
ror the sheet horizontally and/or vertically.

Proof

Snap lines in ProofColor

Snap lines for the trimmed pages are set and also out-
put during ImpositionProof.

Dimensions in Proof Color

The dimensions currently enabled in the graphic win-
dow are also output as Proof Color during Imposition-
Proof.
This requires that the previous item, "Snap lines in
ProofColor", is also enabled.

1160 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Print Proof Marks with Less Ink

You can output marks with less ink during Imposi-
tionProof.
You can enter a reduced value in percent in the Marks
Editor in "Ink Coverage in Proof".
See "Ink Coverage in Proof":, page 1133 for details.

Scaling
You can scale the sheet up or down in percent (mini-
mum=10%, maximum=500%) in x direction (horizon-
tal) and y direction (vertical) for your output.
The X and Y values must be the same in tiled sheets.

OPP and OPC parameter sets

These parameter sets allow you to set RIP parameters
such as screening or resolution.
Meta Dimension: You can also control process calibra-
tion by selecting an appropriate parameter set.
Only for the following workflow:
0
OPP: MetaDimension workflow

Imaging Size

Imagesetter Imaging Window

The imaging window you have for output results
from the imaging window of the plate template.

Paper
The imaging window you have for output results
from the paper dimensions.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1161

Editors ABC

Tiling
Tiled sheets will be output. The imaging window
results from the number of tiling marks on the paper.
0
"Don't generate tiling marks": You can select to
output your tiled sheets without any tiling marks.
These are eight registration marks and a text mark
that identifies the tile. All these marks are placed
automatically in the "Extra space" (see below).
0
"Extra space": Extra space defines the width of the
margin that fully surrounds each tile. This margin
is required for the tiling marks that are set auto-
matically ("TilingRegister" and "TilingText"
marks).
You increase the tile size by defining extra space.
You must make sure that the maximum output
format for the imagesetter is not exceeded when
you do this.

Alternative Plate Template

You can select a different plate template for output.
The imaging window of the alternative plate template
is used, and all the marks of the original plate tem-
plate are replaced by those of the alternative plate
template. The changes only affect output and not the
job itself.
This makes it easy for you to change the target device
you want for output.
The imaging window you have for output results
from the imaging window of the new plate template
you selected.

1162 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Back Offset
In the "Horizontal" and "Vertical" boxes, you can enter
the values by which the press sheet for the back will
be moved in relation to the center. For example, this
lets you offset tolerances in machines that print front
and back at the same time.
You can check the result in the "Print Job..." dialog in
the "View" function.

Punches Tab
0
"Mode": This is where you can select whether the
punch settings will apply to the entire press sheet
or only to single tiles of the sheet.

Tiles
You can edit this section if you opted for the "Tiling"
mode.
0
In the list box, select the tile that is to have punch
settings.
0
"Rotated": The selected tile is output rotated by
180 if "Rotated" is enabled. Rotation causes the
tile to be punched on the opposite side.
Make sure that you rotate the correct parts if your
output is mirrored.

Punch format
The data in this group defines the imaging starting
point within the max. imaging area.
You must make sure that the tiles of a sheet do not lie
outside the maximum imaging area.
0
"Reference punch": The reference punch is used as
a reference point for defining the imaging start-

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1163

Editors ABC

ing point. The center of the punch hole is the zero

point for calculating the imaging start.
Select the punch in the list box that will be the ref-
erence punch. The reference punch selected is
shown in the graphic with a frame around it.
0
"Fast Scan Offset", "Slow Scan Offset": The offset
values in fast scan and slow scan direction are the
distance between the reference punch and the
imaging start.
The center of the reference punch hole is the zero
point for calculating the imaging start. Offset val-
ues counter to scan direction are negative, offset
values in scan direction are positive.
The reference point on the sheet is the lower left
corner of the sheet (for a non-centered output).
This means that the sheet is positioned with the
lower left corner on the calculated imaging start.
Calculation of the imaging start with a non-centered output

Start of exposure Maximum ima-

ging area
the Fast
Scan di- Start of the maxi-
rection Sheet mum imaging area

Offset in fast scan direction

Start of imaging

Offset in slow scan direction (ne- Reference punch

gative in this case)

the Slow Scan direction

1164 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

0
"Centered output": During output, the sheet is cen-
tered to the reference point if this option is
enabled.
In this case as well, offset values affect fast scan
and slow scan direction. In a centered output, the
reference point on the sheet is the middle of the
sheet edge concerned.
Calculation of the imaging start with a centered output

Imaging start with centered output Maximum ima-

ging area
the Fast
Scan di- Start of the maxi-
rection Sheet
mum imaging area

Offset in fast
scan direction
Reference point
center of lower
edge of document
Offset in slow
scan direction Reference punch

the Slow Scan direction

Finishing tab

Output folder for PPF files

You can generate additional PPF files.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1165

Editors ABC

These files only contain PPF files that were generated

by the Prinect Signa Station. This can be helpful if you
only need cutting data, for example, and not any data
about ink zone control. In this case, the PPF file is
much smaller.
There is the "Cip" folder that is created automatically
for these PPF files.
The PPF files are generated as follows, depending on
your output mode:
See "Output Parameter Set Editor > Options > Output":
0
"All in one job" and "One job per press sheet or
web":
A PPF file will be generated per press sheet or per
web.
0
"One job per surface":
A PPF file will be generated per surface.

Report Output Folder

Create Report
When this option is set, an output report in the form
of a table with all relevant output data is written as
HTML or PDF to a set folder (path).
To generate preferences for the reports, see Reports,
page 420.
The reports are used primarily in connection with a
WST barcode reader.

Saddlestitcher
Select the shape and number of staples for saddles-
titching in these two list boxes.

1166 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

Finishing
The system has to match certain job parameters for
DataControl and PECOM in the background:
0
"Undefined": All the parameter defaults are kept.
0
"with DataControl": In this case, the sheet name
must have a certain syntax that DataControl can
interpret.
If you are working with DataControl, you must
check this option so that the Prinect Signa Station
automatically generates the sheet name with this
syntax.
0
"with PECOM": In this case, the job name must
have a certain syntax that PECOM products can
interpret.
If you are working with PECOM products, you
must check this option so that Prinect Signa Sta-
tion automatically generates the job name with
this syntax.

Loading the "Output Parameter Sets" Resource to the Job

This is where you load the "Output Parameter Sets"
resource to the job:
0
The job output dialog displays for output of your
job ("File > Print job"). You assign the output
parameter set to your job in this dialog.
The output parameter set can be defined in the "Plate
Templates" resource and you can load it through this
resource:
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1167

Editors ABC

User Data Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit users of the
following user groups, "PrePress Administrators",
"PrePress Powerusers" and "PrePress Users", and save
them as resources in these groups.
See chapter 15 in the User's Guide for a description of
the permissions of each user group and general han-
dling.

Report Templates Editor

Displays when you select "File > Create Resource... >
New Report Header...".
Use this editor if you wish to create/edit HTML pages
(for example, "ReportHeader.html") that are saved as a
resource in "Report Headers". This allows you to edit
and create simple HTML files.
To open the "ReportHeader" resource in the Report
Templates Editor, go to "Resources" and double-click
the file you want, e.g. "ReportHeader_de", in "Report
Headers". Copy the resource first from the Standard
folder to one of your own folders that are not write-
protected.
The following tabs are available for editing and view-
ing the HTML file:
0 "View":
Is the editing and view section of the editor. If you
add the HTML file to an output from Prinect Signa
Station, what you see is identical to this view.
0
"Source Text":
Displays the HTML source code. In addition, you
can type in special HTML functions that are not

1168 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

available in the toolbar or as functions in the

"View" tab.

Graphic Area

Tools for the Report Templates Editor

You will find the following tools in the "View" tab for
creating or editing a HTML file:

Opens an existing HTML file.

Highlights selected text in "bold" type.

Highlights selected text in "italics".

Underlines selected text.

Crosses out selected text.

Superscripts selected text.

Subscripts selected text.

Aligns selected text to left.

Aligns selected text to center.

Aligns selected text to right.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1169

Editors ABC

Center justification of selected text.

Shows selected rows of text as a list.

Shows selected rows of text as a numbered list.

Selected text becomes a hyperlink (e.g.: www.heidel-

berg.com).
A table made up of two columns and two rows (stan-
dard) is inserted at the cursor position. You can mod-
ify this standard table. See last button.
A column is added to a table.

A column is deleted from a table.

A row is added to a table.

A row is deleted from a table.

Properties dialog: Lets you define the color of the

page background and set a table as the default.

Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors

Use these editors if you wish to create/edit a parame-
ter set for filmsetters/platesetters that is saved as a
"machine" in "Filmsetters" / "Platesetters".
0
"Mode for Imagesetter Definition": You should use
the machine data of an IPR/Query file. All subse-
quent boxes are then set automatically.

1170 Edition March 2010

ABC Editors

You will find the "Ipr_Qry" folder that is created

automatically for these machine data in "Prefer-
ences > Paths > Workspace".
Select the "Manual" mode only if there is no query
file.
In some RIP configurations, the IPR/Qry file may
supply inconsistent values for "Nominal Size",
"Imaging Window" and "X/Y Offset". You must then
correct the values manually.
0
"IPR/Qry File": All query files are saved in the
"Ipr_Qry" folder. A query file must be located in
this folder if you want the RIP to generate it.
If the job has a reference to an IPR/Qry file that is
not in this folder, the font color is red.
Click the folder button on the right to browse to
the "Ipr_Qry" folder.
0
"Imagesetter and RIP Type": Imagesetter and RIP
name. They don't have any control function.
0
"Material": Name of the output material. The
choice of material influences the "Nominal Size
and "Imaging Window" settings.
If the material name is taken from an IPR/Qry file,
it affects work down the line (material selection at
the RIP, calibration).
Material name "dummymat@-1" in the "Manual"
mode doesn't affect your workflow.
0
"Nominal Size": Size of the output material.
"Width": Slow scan direction
"Height": Fast scan direction
0
"Imaging Window":

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1171

0
"Width" and "Height" of the imagesetter's maxi-
mum imaging area.
0
"X/Y Offset": Horizontal or vertical offset of the
maximum imaging window in relation to the
output material. The X, Y origin is at the bot-
tom left.
0
"Punches": Displays the number of punch dies per
head, foot, left and right side.

Loading the "Filmsetter / Platesetter" to the Job

The filmsetter or platesetter is defined in the output
parameter set and is loaded with the "Output Param-
eter Set" resource.
0
The job output dialog displays for output of your
job ("File > Print job"). You assign the output
parameter set to your job in this dialog.
The output parameter set can be defined in the "Plate
Templates" resource and you can load it through this
resource. In this way, the "Filmsetter / Platesetter" is
loaded indirectly to the job:
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

Sheetfed Press Editor

Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a parameter
set for sheetfed presses that is saved as a "machine" in
"Sheetfed Presses".
0
"Ink Zone": "Number" and "Width" of the ink zones.
0
"Plate Size": "Width" and "Height" of the printing
plate.
ABC Editors

0
"Printable Area": The dimensions for "Lead Edge of
Print", "Tail Edge of Print", "Print Margin" and
"Gripper Margin" are taken from the respective
plate edge. In other words, "Tail Edge of Print"
refers to the upper plate edge.
0
"Module": Set the "Perfecting" option if your press
has a perfector. This option affects the data setup
for finishing.

Loading the "Sheetfed Press" to the Job

The press is defined when you are defining the plate
template and the default machine data are loaded.
This means that the press is assigned indirectly
through the plate template:
0
Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"
0
Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

Web Press Editor

0
"Track": Number and width of the tracks
0
"Ink Zone": "Number" and "Width" of the ink zones.
0 "Plate Size": "Width" and "Height" of the printing
plate.
0 "Printable Area": The dimensions for "Lead Edge of
Print", "Tail Edge of Print" and "Print Margin" are
taken from the respective plate edge. In other
words, "Tail Edge of Print" refers to the upper plate
edge.
0
"Module": Input of the number of available webs
and the name of the web by double-clicking the
name.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1173

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

12 Menus in Prinect Signa Station

File Menu

Open ...
You can open one or more job files for editing. You
then have all the tools you need to change the job.
You can open Prinect Signa Station files as of version
1.0 (*.sdf), converted Signastation version 9 files (*.sg9)
and JDF files (*.jdf).

Open with Browser ...

You can open one or more job files for editing. The
"Job Browser" opens, showing you details about the
job and making it easy for you to look for a file. In
addition, you can calculate the preview of a job.
You can sort jobs by parameter. You can set which
parameters will be shown as follows:
0
Right-click the parameter list shown in "bold".
0
Select "Edit...".
0
You can show or hide the parameters you want by
clicking the box in front of the parameter.
You can delete existing jobs in the Job Browser by
selecting them and clicking "Delete".
You can open Prinect Signa Station files as of version
1.0 (*.sdf), converted Signastation version 9 files
(*.sg9), JDF files (*.jdf) and ZIP files.

New ...
Select "File > New" to start the Job Assistant, page 51
that will guide you step-by-step through the data you
must enter to create a new job.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 121

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

The logical order for creating a job in Prinect Signa

Station is:
0
Define the job data (see Administrative Data,
page 97)
0
Define the product part (see Definition,
page 918)
0
Define the master pages (see Master Pages,
page 923)
0
Select the binding method (see Binding,
page 932)
0
Define marks (see Marks, page 943)
0
Define the plate (see Plates, page 947)
0
Define the folding scheme (see Schemes,
page 953)
You can find information about each inspector in the
chapter Inspectors Window, page 91.

Create Resource
You can create new resources that are filed in the
Browser window in the relevant folder in "Resources".
You cannot file new resources in the Standard folder
as this folder is read-only and holds only the shipped
resources.
To be able to create a new resource, you must first set
up your own group folder in the Browser window
where you can save your own resources. See
Resources, page 72 for details.

New Plate Template...

Creation of a new plate template with the help of the
Plate Template Editor, page 112.

122 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

New Scheme...
Creation of a new scheme with the help of the Fold-
ing Scheme Editor, page 1110.

New Mark

Marks Editor
Creation of a new mark with the help of the Marks
Editor, page 1131.

Text Mark Editor

Creation of a new text mark with the help of the Text
Mark Editor, page 1138.

Ink pickup bar

Creation of a new ink pickup bar with the help of the
Ink Pickup Bar Editor, page 1146.

Color control bar

Creation of a new color control bar with the help of
the Color Control Bar Editor, page 1147.

Special color control bar

Creation of a new color control bar with the help of
the Color Control Bar Special Editor, page 1149.

Marks Import
Import of different types of marks with the help of
the Marks Import Editor, page 1151.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 123

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Marks Import (Line Mark)

Import of line marks (without comments about col-
ors) with the help of the Marks Import Editor,
page 1151.

Combi mark
Import of different types of marks with the help of
the Combi Marks Editor, page 1153.

New Paper...
Creation of paper data with the help of the Paper Edi-
tor, page 1155.

New Format...
Creation of page sizes with the help of the Format
Editor, page 1156.

New Plate Layout...

Creation of plate layouts with the help of the Plate
Layout Editor, page 1156.

New Customer Data...

Creation of customer data with the help of the Cus-
tomer Data Editor, page 1156.

New Output Parameter Set...

Creation of output parameters with the help of the
Output Parameter Set Editor, page 1157.

New User Data...

Creation of new user data with the help of the User
Data Editor, page 1168.

124 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

New Report Header...

Creation of a new report header with the help of the
Report Templates Editor, page 1168.

Create Machine
You can create imagesetters and presses that are filed
in the Browser window in the relevant folders in
"Machines".
You cannot file new machines in the Standard folder
as this folder is read-only and holds only the shipped
machines. You must create your own machine folder
in the Browser window if you wish to create a new
machine. See Machines, page 715 for details.

New Filmsetter Properties

Creation of a setup for filmsetters with the help of the
Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors, page 1170.

New Platesetter Properties

Creation of a setup for platesetters with the help of
the Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors, page 1170.

New Sheetfed Press Properties

Creation of a setup for sheetfed presses with the help
of the Sheetfed Press Editor, page 1172.

New Web Press Properties

Creation of a setup for web presses with the help of
the Web Press Editor, page 1173.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 125

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Import

Documents ...
Can only be used when a job is open.
The "Documents..." menu item allows you to import
PDF files.
The PDF files appear in the "Contents" tab in the
Browser window. You can now assign these pages to
the open job by dragging-and-dropping them.

Import Job ...

You can reload a job (zipped) that was exported from
Prinect Signa Station without having to "unpack" it
beforehand.
This function facilitates the exchange of jobs.

JDF...
The "JDF..." menu item allows you to import JDF files.
If the JDF file is compatible, it will be displayed like a
Prinect Signa Station job.
The Job Assistant always opens for any necessary cor-
rections during import of the file.

Import Signa Resources...

Can only be used when no job is open.
You can re-import Prinect Signa Station resources
that were exported with "File > Export > Export Signa
Resources...", for example, to other workstations.
The files are imported as ZIPs.

126 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Marks Import Assistant

The Marks Import Assistant does away with the need
to open and save every single mark to be imported or
updated, something that had to be done so far.
This makes a mostly automated import of marks pos-
sible, for example, after updates. The update of Dipco
marks is the main function of the Assistant.
The Marks Import Assistant performs the following
four functions based on user input:
0
Add new marks
0
Update marks
0
Remove marks
0
AutoRefresh marks
You can open the Marks Import Assistant directly
from the main menu with "File > Import > Marks
Import Assistant". If you are in one of the inspectors,
you can open the Marks Import Assistant from the
"Marks Resources" tab by selecting the "Marks"
resource and displaying the context-sensitive menu.
A Browser window first opens where the directory of
the marks you wish to import or update is selected.
The following statuses are possible after an update or
import. These are located on the right side of the
table (target marks) of Prinect Signa Station:

The mark is new and is added after you confirm the

window with "OK".
The mark version is more recent than the existing
one and is updated after you confirm the window
with "OK".

Prinect Signa Station Reference 127

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

The mark version is identical and remains

unchanged after you confirm the window. The name
of the mark is listed again in the "Source" column.
The mark version is older than the existing one and is
reset to the older version after you confirm this.
The mark was marked with the "Remove" button and
is deleted irretrievably after you confirm the window
with "OK".
A step is run in the folder when the window closes.

The mark is write-protected, meaning it can't be

updated.

A list of folders and files displays on the left side of

the table so you can import new marks or update
older Dipco marks.
You can use the "Filter" list box to restrict or extend
the format you want.
In addition, you can set two self-explanatory options.
"Version Check for DIPCO Marks" (disable if there are
no Dipco marks; this saves computing time) and
"AutoRefresh Combi Marks after Save" (if marks in the
combi mark have changed).

128 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

AutoRefresh marks with "Automatic"

0
The button is always active.
0
All the Dipco marks in the source and target direc-
tories are refreshed when you click "Automatic".
0
The refreshed marks are marked by the appropri-
ate status. At this point, you can choose between
"Reset", "Cancel" or further interaction, see
graphic below.
0
The changes are applied only when you close the
window with "OK".
0
You can set the features that will be applied to "Do
not adopt" in the "Source" column as shown in the
graphic below:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 129

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

This lets you exclude single marks manually and

deliberately from an update.

Add new marks with "New"

0 Single or multiple selection of marks in the left
list (Source) enables the button.
0 Select the mark you wish to import and click
"New". The following dialog displays:

You can create a new group (folder) or, if "Use Par-

ent Folder as Group" is checked, you can automat-
ically use the relevant folder in the target.
0
The marks with their status display on the right
side of the table when you confirm with "OK".

1210 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Add marks with "Apply"

0
The button is active if a mark is selected both on
the left (source) and the right (target). The target
mark is updated by the source mark.

Remove marks with "Remove", "Undo Remove"

0
The "Remove" button is active if a mark is selected
on the right (target). The "Undo Remove" button is
active if a mark's status is "remove" (red cross) on
the right (target).
0
The mark you wish to remove is marked by a red
cross and is deleted irretrievably after you confirm
the window with "OK".
0
You can reset a mark with a red cross to its old sta-
tus with "Undo Remove".

Resource / Machine ...

The "Resource / Machine..." menu item allows you to
import resources or machine data sets to your own
environment.
You can select the resources or machine data sets. Pri-
nect Signa Station automatically recognizes the
selected resource or machine and suggests a folder in
the file structure. The file is then copied to this folder.

Paper or Customer Resource by CSV ...

Prerequisite:
No MDS may be enabled.
The "Paper or Customer Resource by CSV..." menu
item lets you import paper or customer data from a
configuration file (*.ini) and data file (*.txt) of, for
example, a paper manufacturer to your own environ-
ment. (CSV stands for "comma separated values").

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1211

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

The procedure is as follows if you have two such files:

1. Select a configuration file.

Resource Type:
This shows the resource type you will import ("Cus-
tomer Data" or "Papers (Printing Materials").
Supplier, Version:
This information will be shown if it is in the configu-
ration file.
2. Select the data file that matches the configuration
file. The data sets (in the rows) and their parameters
(in the columns) are described in the data file.
Filter:
You can and should use the filter function in most
cases to restrict the number of data sets you will
import by entering parts of the group name and
names of the resources. Many of the data files have
thousands of entries but not all of them are needed.

1212 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

For example, the import of 5000 paper data sets

would slow down Prinect Signa Station unnecessar-
ily.
3. Start the import.
If more than 100 data sets are found, a message dis-
plays asking whether you really wish to import them.
The data sets are imported automatically to the
appropriate resources folders if you confirm with
"Yes". Resources with the same name are overwritten.
After the import, a message shows you the number of
resources that were imported.

Creating a configuration and data file

We will now describe how you can create your own
configuration and data files:
Required format:
In general, the data you wish to import (only paper or
customer data) should be available as a table. You can
view this file with Excel, for example. One data set
(either a paper or customer data set) is described per
row. The various parameters are described in the col-
umns (e.g. height and width of a paper).
You can then export this data to a text file. It is impor-
tant that the single column entries are separated by a
defined delimiter, e.g. a comma, minus sign or a tab.
The file extension is not important. Export can be to
all text formats, e.g. "*.csv" or "*.txt".
There is no standardized type of table. Every table
type as described above can always be imported to Pri-
nect Signa Station. You need a configuration file,
however, to be able to map existing columns to
matching terms in Prinect Signa Station. The configu-
ration file defines the attributes from the data file
with which the resource names or group names are

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1213

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

created.
The following two sections (Main, Mapping) must be
defined in the configuration file.
Below is an example of a configuration file for papers
supplied by the company Schneider und Shne:
[Main]
ImportObject=Papers
Company=Schneidershne
ProducerVersion=
Version=1.0
Units=mm
UnitsAll=mm,pt,Inch
CellDivider=Tab
Note on CellDivider: For csv files, can be a ',' or ';'
(attention: The contents must not have these charac-
ters.)
Header=True
Fields=24
Record=ArtNo,oldArtNo,CommGroup,PapGrammage,Art-
Name,Add-onName,FormatWidth,For-
matHeight,LR,Color;Unit,Scale1Quantity,Scale1Price,Scale2Q
uan-
tity,Scale2Price,Scale3Quantity,Scale3Price,Scale4Quantity,Sc
ale4Price,QuantityUnit,QuantityCode,Grade,Pattern-
Book,MatGroup,LeNo,Saturation

[MAPPING]
Name=ArtName,ArtNo

Note on Name: Can be made up of n columns.

Group=CommGroup
GroupTip=Can be made up of n columns.
Width=FormatWidth

1214 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Height=FormatHeight
Thickness=
Grade=
Grammage=PapGrammage

JDF ...
You can import JDF files, for example, from the Stan-
dard folder "JDFConnectorOut". After the import, the
Job Assistant launches to check the JDF.

Preferences ...
The "Preferences..." menu item allows you to import
existing preferences, for example, from the network
environment to your own.

Export ...

Export Job...
The open and active job is filed together with the
imported PDF files and the job file (.jdf) in a folder
that is given the job name.
This function is for archiving jobs.

Export Job for Service...

The open and active job including all its elements (i.e.
imported PDF files, resources and machine data sets
that were used, log files, preferences and the job file
(.jdf)) is filed in a folder that is given the job name.
This function is primarily intended for servicing. If a
job encounters problems, all the parameters needed
for an analysis of the job are exported to a folder. This
folder can then be sent directly to the service point in
charge.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1215

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Export Signa Resources...

You can now export resources to exchange them. You
write the resources on your computer to a com-
pressed ZIP file. You then select "File > Import >
Import Signa Resources..." to import the resources to
another computer.

Recent Jobs
This item shows you the last, inactive jobs. When you
select a job, it opens at once and is active for editing.

Save
Save the changes you made to a currently open job
with "File > Save".

Save as ...
Give your job file a new name when you save it with
"File > Save as".
The folder in which you opened the job is suggested
as the file location.
Attention: The file names you can assign can be quite

1 long but make sure not to exceed the restrictions of

the operating system you use (Windows: 234 charac-
ters including file type, Mac OS X: 255 characters).
Data exchange in the network can also mean that you
cannot fully utilize the naming feature that Prinect
Signa Station offers. For data transfer with AppleTalk,
names are restricted to 31 characters.

1216 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Close
The open job closes after an alert message whether
you want to save the job or not. The job disappears
from the Browser window.

Last Version...
The open and active job is reverted to the version it
had when last saved. Any changes made in the mean-
time are lost.
The function is only enabled if changes were made
after the saved version.

Print Job ...

To output a job or product part, a print dialog dis-
plays where you can define the print setup.
Select an output parameter set. You can customize
this with "Options".
The press sheet list shows you the press sheets in the
job.
If you work with an interactive workflow, you can
now enable press sheets for viewing.
In addition, in the interactive workflow it is now pos-
sible to save a JDF to submit it to the Prinect Prepress
Manager.
More details about the print dialog can be found in
the User's Guide in "Working with the Prinect Pre-
press Manager".

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1217

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Print Assistant ...

The Print Assistant helps you enter your output set-
tings. You are guided through all your possible out-
put settings in a logical order (like in the Job Assis-
tant).
The Print tabs that display are context-sensitive. They
are shown or hidden depending on the content of the
job. You can also deselect single tabs.

Press Sheets
The Print Assistant starts with the "Press Sheets" tab.
In this tab, you can select the press sheets you wish to
print and disable any parameters you do not need
using the check boxes.
In "Active Stations", you can enable/disable the "Front
and Back", "Colors", "Layers", "Tiles" and "Parameters"
(this assigns output parameter sets) tabs to suit your
needs.
The tabs vary depending on which parameters are
enabled or disabled. You can then set any necessary
output parameters in the various tabs.
You can view the current version by clicking the
"View" button in all the tabs.

Front and Back

This lets you exclude front or back sheets from the
output by deselecting them.

Colors
Color can be ignored in the output.

1218 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Layers
You can select/deselect layers for output in jobs with
several layers (e.g. language-dependent jobs).

Tiles
You can select/deselect tiles for output in jobs where
tiling is enabled (e.g. large-format jobs).

Parameters
The "Parameters" tab is only active if you enabled
"Output Parameter Set Automatic" in "File > Prefer-
ences > Defaults".
You can assign different output parameter sets to the
single press sheets. You can also edit the output
parameter sets.
Note: The setting "One job per press sheet" in
2 "Options"
this case.
in the output parameter set is ignored in

Preferences ...
In the Preferences, you can set parameters that sim-
plify working with Prinect Signa Station.
You can save, cancel or reset your settings at any time
in the dialog:
The following tabs are available for your settings:
General, page 41
Paths, page 48
Names, page 49
Defaults, page 412
Resources, page 418

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1219

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Import, page 424

Processes, page 429
Option Chooser, page 431

Logoff
The user currently logged on can log off and a new
user can log on. Prinect Signa Station exits when you
click the "Exit" button.

Exit
Exits the Prinect Signa Station program.

Edit Menu

Undo
You can undo actions with this function.
The actions you undo are named in the menu. Up to
10 actions can be undone in an inspector window.
You can redo all actions you have undone. See next
menu item.

Redo
The actions you redo are named in "Redo".

Jobs & Resources Menu

The "Jobs & Resources" menu lets you go from the
active job to the resources and back again.

1220 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Current Job
The open job comes to the front and can be edited.
Same function as shortcut "command key + Shift key
+ 1" or "Alt + 1".

Active Job
All open jobs are displayed. The active job is marked
by a tick. Click a job in this list to enable it for editing.

Resources & Machines

Opens the path to all available resources and
machine data sets.
The "Resources" and "Machines" tabs give you an over-
view of all available resources and machines.
You can import "resources" or "machines" to the open
and active job using the folder buttons in the relevant
inspectors.
Display using shortcuts:
Resources & Machines: Alt + 2
Plate Templates: Alt + 3
Schemes: Alt + 4
Marks: Alt + 5

Plate Templates
Opens the path to the "Plate Templates" resource.

Schemes
Opens the path to the "Schemes" resource.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1221

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Marks
Opens the path to the "Marks" resource.

Inspectors Menu
Display of the different inspectors
An inspector window shows you the settings of the
open and selected job. You only see the settings of the
inspector that is currently displayed.
Shortcut to display the inspector:
Job Inspector: Command key + 1
Product Part Inspector: Command key + 2
Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector: Command
key + 3
Press Sheet Inspector: Command key + 4
Page/1up Inspector: Command key + 5
Document Inspector: Command key + 6

Job Inspector
More details can be found in Job Inspector, page 97.

Product Part Inspector

More details can be found in Product Part Inspector,
page 917.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector

The inspector that opens depends on the type of
active job ("Imposition" or "Montage").
More details can be found in Folding Sheet Inspector,
page 966 or in Assembly Block Inspector,
page 980.

1222 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Press Sheet Inspector

More details can be found in Press Sheet Inspector,
page 985.

Page/1up Inspector
More details can be found in Page/1up Inspector,
page 991.

Document Inspector
More details can be found in Document Inspector,
page 998.

Tools Menu

Background Processes
The window shows you the progress of the triggered
actions. Some very complex computing processes
that affect your computer capacity take place in the
background. Open the preview window to view how
the background processes are progressing.

Show Output Status

The window shows jobs sent for output and their cur-
rent states.
You can query the status of very time-consuming jobs
(e.g. output via network) or jobs with a large data vol-
ume at any time.
0
Active Jobs
The first job sent is marked active, the following
ones are waiting.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1223

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

0
Finished Jobs
Only canceled jobs or ones that finished with
error messages are shown. The job must be
marked to find out the reason for the failure in
"Status Message".
0
Status messages
Details about the marked print job are displayed.
The details can vary depending on your workflow
(defined in the output parameter set).
0
Print Next
Only applies to "Active Jobs". The priority of job
number three and following can be changed to be
printed after the active job. This job must be
marked.
0
Remove
A marked job can be deleted, an active one can-
celed.

Status of JDFConnector Jobs

The status of the JDF files you wish to import is shown
in the window if the JDFConnector launches auto-
matically in "File > Preferences > Import". In addition,
you can open the converted job in Prinect Signa Sta-
tion from this window.
0
Active Jobs
This shows jobs that are presently being converted
by the JDFConnector.
0
Finished Jobs
This shows all the jobs that were converted with-
out an error.

1224 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

0
Failed Jobs
This shows jobs that have errors. You cannot cor-
rect or open failed jobs.
0
Open
Opens finished jobs in Prinect Signa Station.
0
Delete
You can delete finished or faulty jobs.
0
Close
The "Status of JDFConnector Jobs" window closes.

Detach/Include Graphic View

To display the graphic view better on your screen, you
can detach the window from the normal view. The
graphic view then appears as a separate window, giv-
ing you a bigger display or making it possible for you
to work with two monitors. For more functions, see
Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window,
page 220.

Folding Sheet Animation

You can use this function to study existing folding
schemes or ones you created yourself in a three-
dimensional animated graphic. A three-dimensional
graphic is computed based on the rules created in the
Folding Scheme Editor, showing you the fold direc-
tion and what the pages look like when folded.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1225

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

The following functionalities are implemented:

Opens an existing folding scheme.

Deselects the other tools.

Resets a rotated folding sheet to the way it originally

1226 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Zoom up graphic is set by default. A "+" appears in

the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to
zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.
Colored presentation of the single components in
the animated graphic (e.g. front and back). Page
numbers can be shown or hidden.
Starts the automatic animation.

Starts the automatic, endless animation.

Slider below the animated graphic for manual start.

Click the slider while holding down the mouse but-
ton and move the mouse pointer to the right.

Folding Sheet Animation with Data Pages

In the graphic window in the "Folding Sheet/Assem-
bly Block" tab, you also have the option of appraising
the folding sheet animation with the pages of the
active job placed on it when you display the context-
sensitive menu and select "Open Folding Sheet Ani-
mation". The functions are described in the previous
section.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1227

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

3D Collating Mark Visualization

In the Browser window, you can view the collating
marks of your active product part when you select the
product part, display the context-sensitive menu and
select "3D Collating Mark Visualization" there.

1228 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

The following functionalities are implemented:

Deselects the other tools.

Resets a rotated folding sheet to the way it originally

was.
Rotates and moves the animation. Click the ani-
mated graphic while holding down the mouse but-
ton and move the mouse pointer. To move the ani-
mation, hold down the alternative mouse button
(PC: right mouse button, Macintosh: command key +
mouse button).
Zoom up graphic is set by default. A "+" appears in
the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to
zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1229

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

Colored presentation of the single components in

the animated graphic (e.g. front and back). Page
numbers can be shown or hidden.

3D Reader's Spread Visualization with Data Pages

In the Browser window, you can view the reader's
spread of your active product part when you select
the product part, display the context-sensitive menu
and select "3D Reader's Spread Visualization" there.

The following functionalities are implemented:

Deselects the other tools.

1230 Edition March 2010

ABC Menus in Prinect Signa Station

Resets a rotated folding sheet to the way it originally

Go to the first page.

Scroll back one page.

Scroll forward one page.

Go to the last page.

Help Menu

Help
Starts the context-sensitive Online Help. See also
Help!, page 214.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1231

Menus in Prinect Signa Station ABC

About Prinect Signa Station

Shows information about the currently installed ver-
sion and the installed Prinect Signa Station compo-
nents.
Click the About window to close it again.

Remote Service...
The "Remote Service" menu item will assist you if ser-
vicing is required. Access is remote in this case. Please
contact your local service unit for more information
about this service and its availability.
The "Remote Service" function allows you to access a
customer's computer directly for the purpose of error
analysis.

Current User
This shows the user currently logged on. You can find
more details about User Management in the User's
Guide.

1232 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

13 Packaging

Introduction
This chapter describes only functions that relate to
the "Packaging" mode.
You can find more information about advanced func-
tions in packaging printing in the "Packaging Pro"
option that you can purchase. You will find a work-
flow example with a description of the functions in
the User's Guide.
In the "Packaging" mode, Prinect Signa Station uses a
CAD file to layout 1ups on a sheet. The format of the
CAD file must be "CFF2" ("Common File Format
Revision 2"). This file has ".CF2" as its extension.
The CFF2 file defines the cutting die of a 1up. When
used in conjunction with packaging, the cutting die
is called a "profile". A CFF2 file may contain several
profiles, e.g. for different boxes.

Requirements
0 You have a license for the "Packaging" mode.
0 The "Option Chooser" window displays when Pri-
nect Signa Station first starts. You must set the
"Packaging" option in this dialog. See Option
Chooser, page 431 for details.

Definition of the "Packaging" Mode

You can define the "Packaging" mode at the following
points in the application:
0 Job Assistant > Product Part Definition
0 Product Part Inspector

Prinect Signa Station Reference 131

Packaging ABC

Job Assistant in the "Packaging" Mode

When you are creating a new job with the Job Assis-
tant, select the "Packaging" mode in the "Product Part
Definition" step. The Job Assistant then shows four
steps, of which the last one is called "Cutting Die
(CFF2)". This step relates specifically to packaging.
The settings in this step are identical to those in the
"Packaging" tab in the Product Part Inspector (see the
section "Packaging" Tab, page 132).

Product Part Inspector - "Packaging" tab

The Product Part Inspector has a "Packaging" tab if a
job was created in the "Packaging" mode. You will
find a description of the "Packaging" tab below.
You can find more information about advanced func-
tions in packaging printing in the "Packaging Pro"
option that you can purchase. You will find a work-
flow example with a description of the functions in
the User's Guide.

"Packaging" Tab

Cutting Die File and Main Settings

0 The CFF2 file can be seen in the first text box.
Click the folder button to the right of this box to
load the CFF2 file. You will find the "Packaging-
CAD" folder that is created automatically for the
CFF2 files in "Preferences > Paths > Workspace".
In the graphic window, the profiles of the loaded
CFF2 file have green lines.
0 "Same Content for All" When this option is set, all
the 1ups of a profile are assigned the same con-

132 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

tent. In the graphic window, you will see that all

the 1ups of a profile have the same white number.
The 1ups of the first profile are all numbered "1",
those of the second profile "2", etc. When you
assign a content to a 1up in a profile, all the 1ups
in this profile are automatically given the same
content.
The 1ups of a profile are numbered consecutively,
starting with one ('1'), if the option is not set. In
this case, you must assign the contents separately
for each 1up.
0 "Line Type for Clip Path": The default value is "90".
All the lines of this type in the CFF2 file are consid-
ered clip path lines. This should produce a closed
clip path.
0 "Cutting Die Orientation": The cutting die is
rotated counterclockwise by the selected angle on
the paper.

Information about Loaded CFF2 File ("Info")

The following data are read from the loaded CFF2 file
and shown:
0 "Version": Version of the CAD standard (generally
"V2" for CFF2).
0 "Info1", "Info2": General information. Frequently,
the name and address of the customer are shown.
0 "Design": The first box displays the name of the
entire layout. This contains all the profiles in this
CFF2 file.
Below "Design" you will see the table with all the
profiles:
0 "Profile Name": Name of the profile

Prinect Signa Station Reference 133

Packaging ABC

0 "Profile Size": This is the size of the bounding

box of a 1up.
0 "1up": Number of 1ups in this profile.

You will see the trashcan to the right of the table.

You can use this to delete profiles from the table.
Deleted profiles are no longer shown in the graphic
window.
A CFF2 file with many profiles for additional ele-
ments can fill up your graphic window. You can
delete these profiles to have a better overview of your
work.
If you bought the "Packaging Pro" option, start it by
clicking the button shown opposite. The "Packaging
Pro" option lets you use advanced functions for pack-
aging printing. You will find a workflow example in
the User's Guide or consult the description in the
Online Help.

Placement rule for assigned 1ups

This is where you define the placement for all the
1ups of the selected profile.
See the section Placement rule for assigned pages,
page 930.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector

"Attributes" Tab
0 Assembly Block Parameters (Packaging)
The block name of the imported CFF2 file displays.
You can modify this name manually here.

134 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

0 Same Content for All 1ups

When this option is set, all the 1ups of a profile
are assigned the same content. In the graphic win-
dow, you will see that all the 1ups of a profile have
the same number.
The same function is also available in the Press
Sheet Inspector.
0 "Position X" / "Position Y":
This allows you to enter the position of the
selected assembly block (yellow contour) relative
to the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the
paper is the zero point for both directions.
The same function is also available in the Press
Sheet Inspector. Using the parameters "Position x/
y", you can change the position of the selected
assembly block relative to the press sheet in this
tab as well.

1up Inspector
In the "Packaging" mode, the "Attributes" tab in the
1up Inspector also displays a "Clip Path" group with
the following functions:
0 "Set Original": When this option is set, the original
clip path from the CFF2 file is set for all the
selected 1ups.
0 "Copy": The clip path of the selected 1up is copied.
0 "Paste": A copy of the clip path is pasted for the
selected 1ups.
0 "Move Corners to Contour": This function is useful
if a clip path is a bounding box around the 1up.
When this option is set, the four corners of the

Prinect Signa Station Reference 135

Packaging ABC

clip path move in closer to the contour of the CFF2

cutting die of the 1up. In "Distance", you can
define a minimum distance from the CFF2 cutting
die for these corners. The trim from "1up Inspec-
tor > Trim > Left/Right/Bottom/Top" is also taken
into account in this value (see the
section Rectangular Clip Path, page 136).

Editing the Clip Path

Rectangular Clip Path

You can define a rectangular clip path in "1up Inspec-
tor > Bleed > Left/Right/Bottom/Top".

Polygon Clip Path

A clip path may already be defined in the CFF2 file.
You can view this clip path in the graphic window. In
this case, the line type of the clip path in the CFF2 file
must be identical to the type you defined in the Prod-
uct Part Inspector > "Packaging" tab > "Cutting Die File
and Main Settings" > "Line Type for Clip Path".
The bounding box of the 1up is used by default as the
clip path if a clip path is not defined in the CFF2 file.
Requirements for editing the clip path:
0 You have a job in the "Packaging" mode or a Mon-
tage job.
0 The "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab is selected
in the graphic window.
0 You have selected a 1up.

136 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

An example of a line is shown below:

Colors used in the line:

Clip path Cutting Die

cyan/blue magenta
1up selected broken line
1up not selected blue green

The corners of the clip path are indicated by squares.

Tool
The following tool is available for editing the clip
path:

Prinect Signa Station Reference 137

Packaging ABC

You will see this "pen nib" button at the bottom right
in the graphic window > "Press Sheet" or "Folding
Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.
The pen nib button is enabled with the left mouse
button. In this case, the mouse pointer also appears
as a pen nib in the graphic window. Remember that
you must deselect the pen nib button so that you can
use the normal mouse functions again.
You can edit the clip path with the pen nib cursor.
The pen nib cursor has three modes. You can select
them in the context-sensitive menu of the pen nib
button. To do this, right-click the enabled pen nib but-
ton or use the shortcuts described below. You can see
which cursor mode is set from the pen nib button.

The functions of the three modes will now be described:

Click a clip path line with the left mouse button. This
selects the vertices (corner points) of this line. One of
the two vertices is marked by a "cross" (fixed point),
the other has a red frame. When you insert a new ver-
tex between the selected vertices, the line changes
course accordingly to include the "new" vertex you
inserted (insert mode).
You can also select a single vertex by clicking it and
move it holding down the mouse button. The selected
vertices are moved.
Press the Shift key if you wish to select several verti-
ces. The cursor doesn't change when you do this. Click
one of the selected vertices with the left mouse but-
ton. You can move the entire selected line holding
down the mouse button.

138 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

Remember: You return to the bounding box of the

1up after all the polygonal paths are deleted, and the
tool is in the Insert mode.
You can change the pen nib mode or edit the clip
paths with the following shortcuts:
0 Command key + click on line: Adds a point.
0 Command key + Alt + click on a point Deletes the
point.
0 Shift + click on a point Selects or deselects points.
0 Command key + A: Only in the graphic window,
selects all points.
0 Left mouse button + draw box: Only in the graphic
window, selects several points.
0 Command key + X: Only in the graphic window,
deletes all selected points.

Pen nib button with plus sign:

The pen nib cursor has a plus sign when it is near the
clip path.
Click a clip path line with this cursor to set a new cor-
ner. You can now move this corner holding down the
mouse button.
Note: You can also give the pen nib cursor a plus sign
by a shortcut. To do this, press the Ctrl key (PC) or the
Apple key (Macintosh) on your keyboard.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 139

Packaging ABC

Pen nib button with minus sign:

The pen nib cursor has a minus sign when it is near a

corner.
You can delete a corner by clicking it with this cursor.
The clip path line is drawn between the two remain-
ing corners.

Functions in a 1up Context-sensitive Menu

Requirements for displaying the context-sensitive
menu are:
0 You have a job in the "Packaging" mode
0 The "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab is selected
in the graphic window.
0 You have selected a 1up.
Right-click the selected 1up to display the context-
sensitive menu:

1310 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

Functions:
0 "Clip Path": The first three functions ("Set Original
Clip Path", "Copy Clip Path" and "Paste Clip Path")
are also available in the 1up Inspector. A descrip-
tion of the functions can be found in the
section 1up Inspector, page 135.
0 "Clip Path > Define Line Type as Clip Path": The
mouse cursor changes to a crosshair when you
select this function. You can click any line of the
cutting die with this crosshair. This path is
defined as the clip path if this line forms a closed
path with other lines of the same type.
This function saves you having to know and enter
the line type as the clip path (see the
section Cutting Die File and Main Settings,
page 132).
0 "Change Station Index and Article": Select one or
more 1ups and then click the "Change Station
Index and Article" function.
A window displays where you can change the sta-
tion index or article using list boxes and editable
boxes.

Other Functions
You can find a description of other functions relating
to the clip path in the section 1up Inspector,
page 135.

Marks
The following marks were developed especially for
packaging printing:
0 "StationNumber"

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1311

Packaging ABC

0 "InternalMark", cover mark as a job-internal mark

0 "CoverClippath"
0 Ink pickup bar with measurement tool as a job-
internal mark
The "StationNumber" mark can also be used in the
"Montage" mode. The job-internal cover mark, "Cover-
Clippath" and the ink pickup bar with measurement
tool can be used in all other working modes as well.

"StationNumber" Mark
Basically, all 1ups have station number "0" by default.
This number, however, cannot be seen at first. Only
when you assign "StationNumber" to a 1up can this
hidden number be seen.
You can assign station numbers to the 1ups. In this
way, each 1up can be clearly identified on the press
sheet, independently of its content.
To benefit from this function, two steps are necessary:
0 You must make the station numbers visible. To do
this, you must assign the "StationNumber" mark
to all 1ups that are to be numbered (see also the
section Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber"
mark to the 1up, page 1313).
0 You must assign the station numbers (see also the
section Step 2: Assigning the station numbers,
page 1314). You do this by assigning a number-
ing sequence to all the 1ups or a group of selected
1ups. You set up the properties of the numbering
sequence yourself (see the section "Station Num-
bers" Dialog, page 1316). In other words, you can
form several groups of 1ups on your sheet, each
with different numbering sequences.

1312 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

The visible station numbers are very small on the

screen. You can see the numbers better in one of the
following ways:
0 You can scale up the "StationNumber" mark to
400%, for example. You must then remember to
reset the scaling again.
0 You can use the PDF view of the press sheet. To do
this, display the context-sensitive menu in the
graphic window > "Press Sheet" tab Select "Print
Press Sheet". Click the press sheet in the list of
sheets and then click "View".
The "StationNumber" mark is a text mark that con-
tains the "StationNumber" placeholder (see the
section Creating a Text Mark, page 1138 and
section Placeholders for Text Marks, page 1139). You
can also create any number of other text marks and
assign them the "StationNumber" placeholder.
In the next two sections (section Step 1: Assigning the
"StationNumber" mark to the 1up and section Step 2:
Assigning the station numbers), read how to work
with the "StationNumber" mark.

Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up

Assign the "StationNumber" mark to all 1ups that are
to be numbered. You can also assign a custom text
mark that contains the "StationNumber" placeholder.
Proceed as follows:
1. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the
graphic window.
2. Select a 1up (left mouse button).
3. Right-click the selected 1up. Display the Page/1up
Inspector from the context-sensitive menu.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1313

Packaging ABC

4. Assign the "StationNumber" mark to the selected 1up

in the 1up Inspector (for details on assigning marks,
see the section Marks, page 995 and section Marks
Resources, page 979).
Make sure that the mark is in the foreground (the
"Foreground" option must be set in the 1up Inspector
> "Marks" tab > Expert Mode").
The station number appears as a black digit on the
1up. The "StationNumber" mark appears in the
"Marks List". You can scale up the view, for example, to
400% to be able to see the mark better for tests
The default station number is "0".
5. Click "Apply to all pages/1ups" to give all the 1ups the
"StationNumber" mark.
If you have several profiles, the mark is only applied
in the profile with the selected 1up.
Note: You can also apply the "StationNumber" mark
2 (plus any inputs made in the "Marks" tab) to a group
of selected 1ups. To do this, first select the 1up with
the "StationNumber" mark. Then select the 1ups to
which the mark will be applied. Click "Apply to
selected pages/1ups". This also works if you selected
several 1ups in different profiles.
See also Page/1up Inspector, page 991.

Step 2: Assigning the station numbers

In step 2, you must now assign a station number to all
the 1ups with the "StationNumber" mark. You can
assign station numbers in the folding sheet view and
in the press sheet view.
Proceed as follows in the folding sheet view:

1314 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

1. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the

graphic window.
(2.) This step is necessary if you would like to divide your
1ups into groups with different numbering
sequences. Then you must select groups of 1ups that
will be assigned a numbering sequence later. Select a
1up by clicking it with the left mouse button while
holding down the Ctrl key.
3. Right-click the graphic window.
4. Select "Assign Station Numbers..." from the context-
sensitive menu.
5. Set the station numbers to suit your needs (for opera-
tion, see the section "Station Numbers" Dialog,
page 1316).
You will see the black station numbers in the graphic
window.
Proceed as follows in the press sheet view:
(1.) This step is necessary if you would like to divide your
1ups into groups with different numbering
sequences. Then you must select groups of 1ups that
will be assigned a numbering sequence later. Go to
the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the graphic
window to select your 1ups. Select a 1up by clicking it
with the left mouse button while holding down the
Ctrl key.
2. Go to the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window.
3. Right-click the graphic window. If you selected sev-
eral 1ups in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab,
you must click the area beyond the plate with the
right mouse button. If you don't, the selection of 1ups
will be lost.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1315

Packaging ABC

4. Select "Assign Station Numbers..." from the context-

sensitive menu.
5. Set the station numbers to suit your needs (for opera-
tion, see the section "Station Numbers" Dialog,
page 1316).
You will see the black station numbers in the graphic
window.

"Station Numbers" Dialog

In the "Station Numbers" dialog, you can set the sta-
tion numbers as you need them.
Start this dialog in the graphic window > "Folding
Sheet/Assembly Block" tab or "Press Sheet" tab >
"Assign Station Numbers..." in the context-sensitive
menu.

1316 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

0 "Numeration": This is where you set the number of

the first 1up and the increment.
0 "Apply Numbering":
0 "To all 1ups": All the 1ups will be assigned num-
bers.
0 "To selected 1ups": Only the selected 1ups will
be assigned numbers in ascending order. All
other 1ups keep their numbering. In this way,
you can group 1ups, all of which have their
own numbering sequences.
Each numbering sequence starts with the
number that you entered in "First Station Num-
ber". Each numbering sequence has its own
"increment" and its own "variant".
You can only set this option if you selected one
or more 1ups beforehand in the graphic win-
dow > "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.
0 "Variants": This is where you set the starting point
and run direction of the station numbers.

Cover Marks (Job-internal Cover Mark / "CoverClippath")

Background Info about Cover Marks

Cover marks are used to cover a certain section of the
background by an invisible white mask. The back-
ground objects lying below this mask then cannot be
seen.
The "hierarchy" of the various "layers" is listed below
to illustrate this:
0 Background
0 Cover mark

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1317

Packaging ABC

0 Page/1up content
0 Foreground
The job-internal cover mark and the "CoverClippath"
mark differ in the way that the mask outline is
defined.
Example for a cover mark:
In packaging printing, the free spaces between the
1ups are used to place marks such as color control
bars. The color control bar must be in the background
in order for it to be covered by the 1up contents. How-
ever, the color control bar can be seen if the 1up con-
tents are transparent. In such a case, you can use the
job-internal cover mark, for example.
In the first graphic, you can see how the color control
bar can be seen below the transparent packaging
flap. In the second graphic, this part of the back-
ground is covered by the rectangular white mask of
the job-internal cover mark.
Without cover mark

With cover mark

1318 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

Job-internal Cover mark ("InternalMark")

This mark only exists as a job-internal mark and can
only be a rectangle (for an example, see the graphic
"With cover mark" page 1318).
To set this mark, for example, on a press sheet, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Go to the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window.
2. Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle whose
size and position are that of the cover mark you want.
(To do this, press the command and Shift keys and
create the rectangle holding down the left mouse but-
ton. Release the mouse button first).
3. When the rectangle is created, an additional row
appears at the bottom of the graphic window. A scroll
bar with different icons appears if there is not
enough room in the graphic window. Click the left or
right arrow to view all the icons one after the other.

4. Click the button that displays as follows:

You have now created a rectangular cover mark. This

mark is listed at the following points in the applica-
tion:
0 In the Browser window > "Internal Resources" tab
in "Marks".
0 In the Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" tab > "Marks
List"

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1319

Packaging ABC

(5.) You can define a section of the mark that will be

included in imaging without changing the size of the
mark. Tips on operation can be found in the
section Expert Mode, page 977.

"CoverClippath"
The "CoverClippath" mark can be found as a standard
mark in the resources.
This mark is set for a selected 1up. If there is a clip
path, the area within the clip path is filled white. If
there is no clip path, the bounding box of the 1up
will be filled white.
The special feature of this mark is that the area
within every polygonal clip path can be be masked.
This makes packaging printing a typical field of appli-
cation for the mark.
To set the "CoverClippath", proceed as follows:
1. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the
graphic window.
2. Select the 1up you want to mask (left mouse button).
3. Right-click the selected 1up and then select "Page/1up
Inspector" from the context-sensitive menu.
4. Assign the "CoverClippath" standard mark to the
selected 1up (for details on assigning marks, see the
section Marks, page 984 and section Marks
Resources, page 985).
You have now created a white mask for the selected
1up that covers the area within the clip path.
(5.) You can define a section of the mark that will be
included in imaging without changing the size of the
mark. Tips on operation can be found in the
section Expert Mode, page 977.

1320 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

(6.) You can apply the mark to all 1ups of the product
part. To do this, click "Marks" > "Apply to all pages/
1ups".
Note: You must select the 1up with a double click as
2 the mark size generally corresponds to the 1up.
Create Cover Mark from CAD Lines
The tool can be used only if a frame is created.
A 1up must be selected before you can create a mark
from the lines of the 1up. Afterwards, you can create
the frame accordingly.
The Marks Editor opens when you click the tool. You
can now change the mark as desired. The mark dis-
plays in the frame after you save and close the Marks
Editor.

Define cover mark from line type for glue area

A 1up must be selected before you can create a mark
from the line type of the 1up.
You can move the mouse pointer over CAD lines after
you click the tool. The line type number displays in a
tooltip. You can create a cover mark with a "click" if
these lines produce a polygon.

Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool

This mark only exists as a job-internal mark.
The size of the mark is dynamic when you create an
ink pickup bar in the Ink Pickup Bar Editor that you
display with "File > Create Resource > New Mark > Ink
Pickup Bar...". In other words, the mark adapts itself
to the context (e.g. subject) in which it is set.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1321

Packaging ABC

By contrast, if you create an ink pickup bar using the

measurement tool, you define the size of the mark at
the start. The size stays the same when creating the
mark, i.e. the mark content must be fitted to the
mark size.
To create an ink pickup bar with the measurement
tool, proceed as follows:
1. Go to the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window.
2. Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle whose
size and position are that of the ink pickup bar you
want. (To do this, press the command and Shift keys
and create the rectangle holding down the left mouse
button. Release the mouse button first).
3. When the rectangle is created, an additional row
appears at the bottom of the graphic window and
includes the following button:

Click this button.

The Ink Pickup Bar Editor opens, displaying the rect-
angle you created.
4. Create your ink pickup bar and click "Save".
You can find a description on how to use the Ink
Pickup Bar Editor in the section Ink Pickup Bar Edi-
tor, page 1146.
The editor started through the measurement tool dif-
fers from the normal Ink Pickup Bar Editor as follows:

1322 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

The "Width" and "Height" boxes are dimmed as the

size of the mark cannot be changed. They only show
the size of the mark. The height of each color bar is
matched automatically if you add or remove addi-
tional colors in the "Choose Color Layer" list.

Notes on Generating CFF2 Files

The information below is for CAD users who are well
versed in Common File Format Revision 2 (CFF2).

Example
The following example of a CFF2 file will help to
explain what has to be considered when creating a
CFF2 file so that it works successfully with Prinect
Signa Station. The source code listed here receives an
artificially inserted line number which is added at
the start of the line (not there in normal cases), to
enable the line to be referenced in the following
description.
Example of a CFF2 file:
1 $BOF
2 V2
3 ORDER
4 Info1:ABCDE
5 Info2:D-12345 Adorf
6 END
7 MAIN,GangRunForm3456
8 UM
9 LL,0,0

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1323

Packaging ABC

10 UR,1030,790
11 SCALE,1,1
12 C,58#T_1,200,206,90,1,1
13 C,58#T_1,410,206,90,1,1
14 C,55#T_1,620,206,90,1,1
15 C,55#T_1,830,206,90,1,1
16 END
17 SUB,58#T_1
18 L,2,1,0,-175,-105,175,-105,2,5
19 L,2,1,0,175,-105,175,105,2,5
20 L,2,1,0,175,105,-175,105,2,5
21 L,2,1,0,-175,105,-175,-105,2,5
22 A,2,1,0,70,0,70,0,0,0,-1,2,5
23 L,2,90,0,-145.00,-85.00,145.00,-85.00,2,5
24 L,2,90,0,145.00,-85.00,145.00,85.00,2,5
25 L,2,90,0,145.00,85.00,-145.00,85.00,2,5
26 L,2,90,0,-145.00,85.00,-145.00,-85.00,2,5
27 END
28 SUB,55#T_1
29 L,2,1,0,-115,-45,115,-45,2,5
30 L,2,1,0,115,-45,115,45,2,5
31 L,2,1,0,115,45,-115,45,2,5
32 L,2,1,0,-115,45,-115,-45,2,5
33 L,2,90,0,-145.00,-85.00,145.00,-85.00,2,5
34 L,2,90,0,145.00,-85.00,145.00,85.00,2,5

1324 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

35 L,2,90,0,145.00,85.00,-145.00,85.00,2,5
36 L,2,90,0,-145.00,85.00,-145.00,-85.00,2,5
37 END
38 $EOF
The lines 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 16 and 38 are obligatory. The
lines 4, 5, 8, 9 and 10 are optional. For line 8, the
default is "UM" for the unit of measure "mm". For line
9, the default value is "0.0" (in mm) for the bottom left
coordinate of the entire form. For line 10, the default
value is "1030,790" (in mm) for the top right coordi-
nate of the entire form. Line 11 is ignored.
Furthermore, the following specific features apply:
0 The first two lines with the colon in the ORDER
section (lines 4 and 5) are used as "Info 1" and "Info
2". The "Info" data are shown in
0 Job Assistant > Cutting Die (CFF2)
0 Product Part Inspector > "Packaging" tab
0 Placement of the 1ups requires calls (lines 12--15)
and subroutines (SUB sections in lines 17--27 and
28-37) in Prinect Signa Station. All angles are per-
missible (not only multiples of 90). Scaling fac-
tors "1" and "-1" only are allowed. Rotation is
applied before scaling.
0 All lines, arcs and texts in the MAIN section are
ignored.
0 Line type 46 (dimension) and all texts will be
ignored.
0 All elements that are required for cuts on the mar-
gin, labeling, etc, but are not part of the actual
profile should preferably be located in the MAIN
section as they are ignored here (see above). If they

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1325

Packaging ABC

are defined in a subroutine, this can cover all

1ups. Then this "superfluous" profile would have
to be deleted at the Prinect Signa Station before
you can resume your work.
0 Line type 90 is designed as the default clip path for
the Prinect Signa Station. This enables the opti-
mum cut to be controlled by the CAD software.
There is a default clip path (blue line) going
beyond the trim box of the 1up by the preset trim
value.

Browser Window
The display of product parts for jobs in the "Packag-
ing" mode is different in the Browser window > "Jobs"
tab.
The new elements are:
0 "1up List" (instead of "Page List")
0 "Cutting Die" (instead of "Folding Sheets")

Overview: Changes in the "Packaging" Mode

The Prinect Signa Station UI was modified for the
"Packaging" mode at the following points in the appli-
cation:
0 Job Assistant
0 Additional work mode "Packaging"
0 The last step in the "Packaging" mode is called
"Cutting Die (CFF2)"
0 Product Part Inspector

1326 Edition March 2010

ABC Packaging

0 Additional work mode "Packaging"

0 Additional tab "Packaging"
0 Browser window > Product Part: "Cutting Die" and
"1up List" are found here.
0 The Assembly Block Inspector displays in the
inspectors window if the Folding Sheet / Assembly
Block Inspector is called up.
0 Page/1up Inspector: "Clip Path" input section

Prinect Signa Station Reference 1327

ABC Sheet Optimization

14 Sheet Optimization

Introduction
Sheet optimization gives you additional functions in
the "Montage" working mode.
If you have different types of 1ups, you must first cre-
ate an assembly block for each type that will be dupli-
cated later. This assembly block that you will dupli-
cate is referred to as master label in the text below.
A number of different master labels can automati-
cally be placed optimally on the press sheet with the
help of various algorithms. Optimization depends on
certain input data that you yourself define.
This chapter describes only those functions that
relate to sheet optimization.
Sheet optimization is set mainly in the Press Sheet
Inspector (see the section Sheet Optimization in the
Press Sheet Inspector:, page 143). The results of the
data you entered are shown there and in the list win-
dow. The graphic window shows you how the sheets
are positioned on the press sheet.
You will find examples of how to handle sheet optimi-
zation in the User's Guide in "Examples of Sheet Opti-
mization".

Requirements for Creating a Job with Sheet Optimization

0 You have bought the option for sheet optimiza-
tion and enabled it. You must set the "Sheet Opti-
mizer" option in the "Prinect Signa Station Option
Chooser" dialog. Proceed as follows to go to the
dialog:
0 Prinect Signa Station launches the first time
and the dialog displays automatically.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 141

Sheet Optimization ABC

0 Go to "File > Preferences" > "Option Chooser"

tab.
0 When you create a job with the Job Assistant,
select the "Montage" working mode and enable
"Sheet Optimization on" in "Montage Mode Specifi-
cation".
0 You can enable sheet optimization subsequently
for an existing Montage job. To do this, enable
"Sheet Optimization on" in the "General" tab in the
Product Part Inspector.

Creating Master Labels

A master label is the equivalent of an assembly block.
You can create master labels in the following ways:
0 When creating a job with the Job Assistant:
In the last step "Assembly Blocks", you can define
new master labels in "Current Assembly Block".
This is where you can also delete master labels or
change their properties.
0 In the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector >
"Attributes" tab: This is where you can create and
delete master labels or change their properties.
0 With drag-and-drop in the Browser window >
"Contents" tab:
You selected the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic
window. Go to the Browser window > "Contents"
tab and load the file for the master label you wish
to create. A new master label with the content you
want is created when you drag-and-drop this file
to the press sheet in the graphic window.

142 Edition March 2010

ABC Sheet Optimization

0 In the graphic window > "Press Sheet" tab, right-

click the press sheet and then select "Create new
assembly block" from the context-sensitive menu.
The new master label is placed at the bottom left
of the press sheet. Its default size is 100 x 70 mm.

Sheet Optimization in the Press Sheet Inspector:

Go to the Press Sheet Inspector > "Press Sheet" tab.

"Sheet Optimization" Group

This is where you set the parameters relating to the
press sheet. This includes the start of an automatic
optimization run, during which the assembly blocks
are arranged automatically on the press sheet.
0 "Sheet Optimization > Left Margin / Right / Bottom
Margin / Top":
By defining these margins, you create a bounding
box within which the assembly blocks can be posi-
tioned. If you leave the default values of "0" as they
are, the bounding box is the same size as the
paper. By entering values for the margins, you
shrink the size of the bounding box accordingly.
If you set marks at the left, right and top, you must
set a margin for these marks.
You must always define a margin at the bottom for
the gripper margin.
0 "Sheet Optimization > Ribbon Margin": A ribbon is
made up of a series of assembly blocks the same
size placed side by side. A ribbon does not have to
be rectangular (see graphics on optimization as of
page 146).

Prinect Signa Station Reference 143

Sheet Optimization ABC

To be able to cut the ribbons better later on, you

can define a margin that is placed around each
ribbon automatically during an optimization run.
Only one margin is set as a boundary at places
where two ribbons abut each with a margin. For
example, if you set the "Ribbon Margin" to 2 mm,
the distance between abutting ribbons is still 2
mm and not 4 mm.
The graphic below is taken from the graphic for
"horizontal" optimization, page 146. In this
graphic, the ochre (light) and magenta (dark) 1ups
each form a ribbon. "Ribbon Margin" was set to 4
mm to illustrate this clearly. This is the distance
between the two light-green lines (gray at the 1up)
that limit the 1ups. A trim was also defined for all
the 1ups. This is portrayed by the light-blue line
(gray between the 1ups).
There is room for the trim only if the ribbon mar-
gin is large enough. A trim would project into the
neighboring 1ups if you have 1ups with a trim
without a ribbon margin or with one that is too
small. The trim is reduced automatically by the
required amount if this happens.

144 Edition March 2010

ABC Sheet Optimization

"Ribbon Margin" Graphic

0 "Automatic rotation": If set, assembly blocks can

be rotated during optimization. In this way, you
can utilize your paper better.
0 Optimize: You can start three different functions
for sheet optimization with buttons beside this
option. During optimization, the assembly blocks
are grouped by size. Assembly blocks of the same
size placed side by side make up what is known as
a "ribbon". If possible, the bigger assembly blocks
are always positioned more to the left. Positioning
always begins at the bottom left.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 145

Sheet Optimization ABC

Graphic of "Horizontal" Optimization

0 "Horizontal": Sheet optimization is in horizon-

tal ribbons. The ribbons begin at the bottom
left. They always fill the entire space between
the margins before a new ribbon begins.

Graphic of "Vertical" Optimization

146 Edition March 2010

ABC Sheet Optimization

0 "Vertical": Sheet optimization is in vertical rib-

bons. The ribbons begin at the bottom left.
They always fill the entire space between the
margins before a new ribbon begins.

Graphic of "General" Optimization

0 "General": Sheet optimization is in rectangles

(or rectangular ribbons). In other words, assem-
bly blocks of the same size are grouped
together to form rectangles if possible.
The rectangle begins at the bottom left. In most
cases, the rectangular ribbons don't fill the
entire space between the margins.
0 "Paper Usage": After sheet optimization, this box
shows in percent the paper usage for the entire
number of press sheets. The surplus is not taken
into account in this calculation. This means that
the requested number of 1ups is used for calcula-
tion.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 147

Sheet Optimization ABC

0 "Per Sheet": After sheet optimization, this box

shows in percent the paper usage for each press
sheet. The surplus is taken into account in this cal-
culation. This means that the number of assembly
blocks you really have is used for calculation. We
will also use the term "sheet usage" for this factor
in the descriptions below.
0 "Print Volume": Number of press sheets required.
This box is for entering and displaying data. After
an optimization run, the minimum number of
press sheets required is calculated and shown. You
can then change the value to suit your needs.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List

This is where you set the parameters for the separate
master assembly blocks.
0 "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List": Only the mas-
ter labels are shown before the first optimization
run. The master label is the assembly block you
will make copies of.
All labels generated are found in this list after an
optimization run. All the labels will be assigned
consecutive numbers.
0 "Name": Name of the selected label. You can select
a master label in the list above it (see above) in the
graphic window or in the Browser window.
0 "Number of Copies" (for master labels only): Num-
ber of copies of the selected master label for the
entire print volume.
0 "(Number of Copies) Per Press Sheet" (for master
labels only): Number of copies of the selected mas-
ter label for one press sheet. This is a read and
write box.

148 Edition March 2010

ABC Sheet Optimization

After an optimization run, this box suggests the

minimum number of copies per press sheet to
you. You can then type in a higher value if neces-
sary. Hit the Tab key or click another input box to
trigger the function. Surplus 1ups are shown off
the press sheet if the value is too high.
0 "Priority" (for master labels only): The reason for
assigning priorities is that print quality drops
going from left to right. You can use priority to
define that the most important 1ups are printed
the most accurately.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority.
In optimization, copies of the master label with
the highest priority are positioned first if possible,
beginning at the bottom left. If two labels have the
same priority, then the bigger label is positioned
more to the left or more to the bottom.
Priority is assigned automatically when a master
label is being created. Priority is assigned in the
order the master labels are created. By default, pri-
ority is assigned in steps of 10. This means the first
master label is automatically given priority "10",
the second "20", the third "30", etc. The reason for
this is that the label layout can also be optimized
by changing priorities. It's then easy if there are
many values in between that are not yet assigned.
You can change a priority at any time. Values from
"-10000" to "10000" are permitted.
0 "Position X / Y": This is where you can manually
change the position of one or more selected labels.
0 "Orientation": This is where you can manually
change the orientation of one or more selected
labels.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 149

Sheet Optimization ABC

Report

Display in the List Window

The following columns are recommended in the list
window > "Folding Sheet" tab:

0 "1up Count": This is the number of 1ups in the

1416 Edition March 2010

ABC Drag & Drop

15 Drag & Drop

What's Behind Drag-and-Drop

In Prinect Signa Station many steps are made simple
by dragging-and-dropping items.
In Prinect Signa Station, this technique is suited to a
fast and visual placement or pasting of files, pages or
marks in an active job.
First the source is marked (files, pages or marks). You
can recognize a marked object by its yellow back-
ground. Then, with the left mouse button (on PC)
held down, the elements are dragged from the source
and dropped in the target. The elements are added to
the position you are in when you let go of the mouse
button.
At the target, the mouse pointer changes from a "no
go" sign to a box with a pointer. The pointer indicates
that dragging-and-dropping is possible at your
selected target.

The following tables will show you the drag-and-drop

options open in Prinect Signa Station that will make
your work much easier.

Using Drag-and-Drop
The target window for drag-and-drop in Prinect Signa
Station is generally the graphic window, with the
Browser window and list window as source windows.
When working with marks, you can also position
them directly from the Browser window to the rele-
vant inspectors.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 151

Drag & Drop ABC

You can click certain pages, resources, files and

marks and position them in the graphic window at
the position you want in the active job.
The following tables show you how you can use drag-
and-drop in Prinect Signa Station:

General

You can drag PDF files and Prinect Signa Station jobs
(.sdf) directly from the operating systems (Explorer on
PC, Finder on Mac) to the Browser window.
The PDF files appear in the "Browser > Contents" tab.
Prinect Signa Station jobs (.sdf) appear in the
"Browser window > Product Parts" tab.
The operating systems must be seen in the fore-
ground so that you can select a file. Then drag the
selected file to the Browser window of Prinect Signa
Station that is opened in the background.

Prinect Signa Station Reference 155

ABC Glossary

Glossary

1up The number of identical objects to be created on the

same piece of material. In a 2up, the page appears
twice. The page appears four times in a 4up.
The application incorporates all the changes you
made to a page when you create one or more 1ups. For
example, trim marks or page-related marks are cop-
ied to all the other 1ups. In Prinect Signa Station, the
1up can be set in "Assembly Block Inspector > Copies
X/Y".
Back The back of a press sheet.
Binding The binding fastens the sheets of a printing job. The
binding mode (saddlestitch or perfect binding) affects
the imposition scheme of a plate template. If you use
perfect binding, the Prinect Signa Station uses the
highest and lowest pages to calculate the exact posi-
tion for the remaining pages.
Use "Product Part Inspector > Binding" to select the
binding mode.
Bleed Printed area that is defined beyond the page size. This
avoids white "flashes" by page elements that are
printed up to the edge of the page. Bleed is generally 3
mm per side margin.
CFF2 file In packaging printing, the format of the CAD file
must be "CFF2" ("Common File Format Revision 2").
The CFF2 file defines the cutting die of a group of
1ups of the same kind. It may also contain the defini-
tion for a polygonal clip path of the 1ups.
A single 1up can also be loaded to create a custom lay-
out.
CIP3 The data format specified by the CIP3 consortium is
known as the "Print Production Format" (PPF). The file
extension is ".ppf". CIP3-PPF files are in ASCII format.

Prinect Signa Station Reference

Glossary ABC

CIP4 The "Job Definition Format" (JDF) was introduced as a

further development of well-known technologies
such as PPF and PJTF (Adobe Portable Job Ticket For-
mat). The JDF is based on the XML data format. JDF
combines the job ticket specifications with a message
description standard and a message interchange pro-
tocol. The file extension is ".jdf". The PPF data are a
subset in a JDF file.
Clip A clip path runs around a 1up in packaging printing
path and in the Montage mode with the "Packaging"
option enabled. A rectangular clip path is defined by
means of the trim. You can also have a polygonal clip
path that may be defined in the CFF2 file.
Collating mark A collating mark is a control mark printed in the back
margin between the first and last pages of a folded
sheet. For each following signature, the collating
mark is printed lower by its own length. The collating
mark can be used to do a visual check that all signa-
tures have been printed and that they are in the cor-
rect order.
Prinect Signa Station uses the number of front sheets
to calculate where and between which two-page
spreads to position the collating mark. Use the "Prod-
uct Part Inspector > Binding" to select automatic posi-
tioning for the collating mark.
Creeping In books with saddlestitch binding, the paper bulk
pushes the innermost pages outward, that is, away
from the spine of the book. After the binder has
trimmed the book, the innermost pages have a nar-
row margin at the edge opposite the spine. The mar-
gin for the outermost pages is wider. This is set in
"Product Part Inspector > "Binding".
EPSF Encapsulated PostScript File. A file containing struc-
tured PostScript commands and comments.

Edition March 2010

ABC Glossary

Folding mark This marks the position where a fold will be made. It
can be set automatically or manually. Automatic posi-
tioning of the folding marks is set in the "Product Part
Inspector > Binding".
Folding scheme In the folding scheme, you define the number and
arrangement of the placeholders for the pages on the
press sheet and the folding rule. No dimensional data
are defined in a folding scheme.
You define a folding scheme with the Folding Scheme
Editor. You assign the folding scheme in the "Imposi-
tion" or "Autom. Imposition" working modes. You
assign it when creating a job in the Job Assistant >
"Folding Schemes" or in the "Product Part Inspector >
Schemes".
Front Refers to the front of a signature.
Gap In Prinect Signa Station, the spacing between the
pages within an imposition scheme is known as a gap.
In label printing, you must create a gap if the colors of
the 1ups do not allow a separation cut.
Gripper margin The margin used by the grippers of the printing
machine to feed in the printing sheet. The width of
the gripper margin varies depending on the printing
machine. A gripper margin of 10mm (0.5in) is nor-
mal. The gripper margin is taken into account auto-
matically in Prinect Signa Station.
Imposition Corresponds to the term "folding scheme" (see below).
scheme
Master label In sheet optimization, a master label is the label that
you will copy and is equivalent to an assembly block.

Prinect Signa Station Reference

Glossary ABC

Master page type The master page type can be a right page, left page or
a special master page. Different master pages are
required when the trimmed size differs in the scheme
(special master page) or when the trim boxes of the
assigned PDF documents are not uniform (left page,
right page).
Origin The reference point for a system of coordinates. By
default, Prinect Signa Station uses the lower left cor-
ner as the origin / reference point for the dimensions
you enter.
Page content Content is the term used in this documentation to
describe a PDF page's content as supplied by the appli-
cation, i.e. with marks and clippath if applicable.
Page marks Marks that refer to the assembled or imposed pages of
a signature.
Parallel fold Each fold is parallel to the previous fold.
Perfect binding A binding method in which adhesive material is used
for binding the pages. Books using perfect binding
can be opened out fully. Use "Product Part Inspector >
Binding" to set perfect binding.
Perfector Tumbling refers to rotating the printing sheet about
its vertical axis after printing the front sheet. After
the printing sheet is tumbled, the lay edge changes.
The rear edge then becomes the gripper edge.
Perfector must be defined if you are imposing front
and back. In Prinect Signa Station, the placing mode
can be set in "Product Part Inspector > Plates".
Pixel The short form for picture element. A pixel is the
smallest visible element that can be used for creating
digital data. The pixel is the building block for picture
reproduction in a data processing system. The resolu-
tion is defined as the number of pixels per unit of
area.

Edition March 2010

ABC Glossary

Placing mode The placing mode determines the rules for generating
the reverse side of printing. The following placing
modes are used in Prinect Signa Station: Single-sided,
Work-and-turn, Work-and-tumble, Perfecting and
Sheetwise (front and back).
PostScript PostScript (PS) is an image description language that
describes the contents of a page. A wide range of imag-
esetters are capable of interpreting PostScript.
Product part Is one part of the job. You can save the "Imposition",
"Automatic Imposition" and "Montage" working
modes as a product part in one job. The product part
in turn can also consist of several parts such as the
press sheets, folding sheets and/or data pages if they
were filed in a page list.
Profile In packaging printing, a profile is the cutting die of a
group of 1ups of the same kind. A CFF2 file may con-
tain several profiles, e.g. for different boxes.
Register mark A mark used to align the printing forms. If the paper
is not cut exactly at right-angles, the register mark is
important for the register of the press sheet. Register
is the exact alignment of both the color separations
and the position of the printed matter on the front
and the back of the press sheet. In other words, the
register mark defines the horizontal and vertical
alignment of the printed pages.
Routing margin The routing margin defines the page margin that will
be beveled to get a "smooth" gluing edge in perfect
binding.

Prinect Signa Station Reference

Glossary ABC

Saddlestitch Printed matter with saddlestitch binding is bound by

binding a staple through the gap fold. For printed matter with
saddlestitch binding, the exact position of the pages
depends on both the imposition scheme and the size
of the job.
This can be taken into account when selecting the
binding mode in the Prinect Signa Station. If saddles-
titch is selected in the "Product Part Inspector > Bind-
ing", the application automatically pairs up the
highest and the lowest page numbers and then calcu-
lates the exact position for each page.
Separation cut The separation cut separates two juxtaposed pages
with a single cut.
A separation cut can be used to separate two pages
with tints or trim allowances. By placing the pages
side by side on a separation cut line, you can trim
both pages together.
A separation cut is often used in label printing to save
material.
Sheetwise After printing the front sheet, the printing sheet
needs to be turned. Turning describes the rotation of
the printing sheet about its horizontal axis. In con-
trast to tumbling, turning the printing sheet leaves
the gripper edge at the lay edge and moves the page
mark from left to right.
Sheetwise must be defined if you are imposing front
and back. In Prinect Signa Station, the placing mode
can be set in "Product Part Inspector > Plates".
Signature Refers to a a press sheet in the Signastation Classic
(e.g. version 9.0).
Subject Subject is the term for the bounding box around the
printed area on the press sheet.

Edition March 2010

ABC Glossary

Surfaces One or two surfaces can be defined for a press sheet

(front or front and back).
The surfaces are defined in the Product Part Inspector
> "Plates" tab > "Placement rule for perfecting".
Trim Paper margin (extra space) projecting beyond the end
size. After printing, this margin is cut off on all sides
to have a clean-cut end product.
Trim box A PDF document can have a trim box. The size of the
PDF trim box is the same as the trimmed size at Pri-
nect Signa Station.
A trim box is also always defined at Prinect Signa Sta-
tion. The size of this trim box is defined when Prinect
Signa Station imports the PDF document and evalu-
ates the PDF bounding boxes.
Trimmed Size The trimmed size is the size of the cut page after
printing. The trimmed size is equivalent to a trim box
defined in Acrobat.

Prinect Signa Station Reference

U Unplaced pages 9-53

Used colors 9-86
User Interface 2-1
Four basic windows 2-4
Menu bar 2-3
Toolbar 2-3

Prinect Signa Station Reference

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG
Kurfuersten-Anlage 5260
69115 Heidelberg
Germany
Phone +49 (62 21) 92-00
Fax +49 (62 21) 92 69 99
www.heidelberg.com/

For further information please contact

your local Heidelberg representative.

Prinect Signa Station - Users Guide en
100% (2)
Prinect Signa Station - Users Guide en
359 pages
Prinect Product Portfolio
No ratings yet
Prinect Product Portfolio
143 pages
2DArtist Issue 110 Feb2015
67% (3)
2DArtist Issue 110 Feb2015
130 pages
Heidelberggto 46
No ratings yet
Heidelberggto 46
60 pages
Heidelberg Speedmaster SM52 Series Old ENG
100% (1)
Heidelberg Speedmaster SM52 Series Old ENG
28 pages
KBA Rapida 105 Series ENG
No ratings yet
KBA Rapida 105 Series ENG
30 pages
Dampening Sistem SM52-1
100% (2)
Dampening Sistem SM52-1
29 pages
Upholstering Methods, by Fred W. Zimmerman
100% (2)
Upholstering Methods, by Fred W. Zimmerman
200 pages
Heidelberg XL75 Series ENG
No ratings yet
Heidelberg XL75 Series ENG
26 pages
TECHNOTRANS Alpha-Line - Eng
0% (1)
TECHNOTRANS Alpha-Line - Eng
6 pages
Komori Chain Delivery Gripper Finger Fabricated Sprint Excel High File
No ratings yet
Komori Chain Delivery Gripper Finger Fabricated Sprint Excel High File
33 pages
Prinect Signa Station - Install EN
No ratings yet
Prinect Signa Station - Install EN
28 pages
Installation UVTrockner R700 en
No ratings yet
Installation UVTrockner R700 en
26 pages
Heidelberg
100% (1)
Heidelberg
20 pages
ImagineFX 2016-03
86% (7)
ImagineFX 2016-03
116 pages
The Reliable Solution.: Speedmaster SX 74
No ratings yet
The Reliable Solution.: Speedmaster SX 74
20 pages
PM 46 Specs PDF
100% (1)
PM 46 Specs PDF
12 pages
E Speedmaster CX 104
No ratings yet
E Speedmaster CX 104
5 pages
Catalog Huong Dan Van Hanh Ban PC May 7 Mau So 2.2
No ratings yet
Catalog Huong Dan Van Hanh Ban PC May 7 Mau So 2.2
88 pages
Final Thesis (Dated On 17 August - 14)
100% (1)
Final Thesis (Dated On 17 August - 14)
348 pages
7-S Framework of McKinsey
No ratings yet
7-S Framework of McKinsey
13 pages
2DArtist Issue 107 Nov2014 PDF
No ratings yet
2DArtist Issue 107 Nov2014 PDF
105 pages
Final 22222catalog2015.compressed PDF
100% (2)
Final 22222catalog2015.compressed PDF
321 pages
ImagineFX 2014-01
100% (5)
ImagineFX 2014-01
116 pages
ImagineFX February 2016
100% (4)
ImagineFX February 2016
116 pages
Profi Tipp 3 Rollers in Inking and Dampening Systems
100% (2)
Profi Tipp 3 Rollers in Inking and Dampening Systems
30 pages
Standard Blanket Sizes and Bars Per Machine Type
50% (2)
Standard Blanket Sizes and Bars Per Machine Type
5 pages
Technotrans Alpha Parts EN
No ratings yet
Technotrans Alpha Parts EN
61 pages
Speedmaster SM52
100% (3)
Speedmaster SM52
26 pages
ImagineFX December 2015
100% (1)
ImagineFX December 2015
116 pages
Binder BB3002
No ratings yet
Binder BB3002
95 pages
Usr - Guid Metadimension 7.5
No ratings yet
Usr - Guid Metadimension 7.5
688 pages
Guide Speedmaster CD 102 en PDF
No ratings yet
Guide Speedmaster CD 102 en PDF
6 pages
'Docslide - Us - Prinect Signa Station Users Guide en PDF
100% (1)
'Docslide - Us - Prinect Signa Station Users Guide en PDF
359 pages
2DArtist Issue 087 Feb2013 PDF
100% (3)
2DArtist Issue 087 Feb2013 PDF
88 pages
Printing Supplies Direct Catalog 2017 2
No ratings yet
Printing Supplies Direct Catalog 2017 2
59 pages
ImagineFX April 2016
50% (2)
ImagineFX April 2016
116 pages
ImagineFX April 2016
50% (2)
ImagineFX April 2016
116 pages
KB Rapida 145 164 Engl
No ratings yet
KB Rapida 145 164 Engl
32 pages
Gto Montaje de Alastra
100% (1)
Gto Montaje de Alastra
88 pages
Stahlfolder - KH TH Folders
100% (1)
Stahlfolder - KH TH Folders
10 pages
InkZone Supported Presses and Consoles PDF
No ratings yet
InkZone Supported Presses and Consoles PDF
33 pages
Heidelberg Global Training For Print Professionals
100% (2)
Heidelberg Global Training For Print Professionals
6 pages
2DArtist - March 2016 PDF
100% (1)
2DArtist - March 2016 PDF
142 pages
HD 42
No ratings yet
HD 42
11 pages
ImagineFX November 2015
100% (2)
ImagineFX November 2015
116 pages
Imagine FX
93% (15)
Imagine FX
132 pages
11493PQC Data Manager en
No ratings yet
11493PQC Data Manager en
95 pages
Products: Installation and Start-Up As of Version A003Ax
No ratings yet
Products: Installation and Start-Up As of Version A003Ax
63 pages
Brochure Speedmaster XL 75 en PDF
100% (1)
Brochure Speedmaster XL 75 en PDF
26 pages
Heidelberg SM74 Series ENG
No ratings yet
Heidelberg SM74 Series ENG
6 pages
Prinect Signa Station - Reference EN
No ratings yet
Prinect Signa Station - Reference EN
475 pages
2DArtist 2017 136 April PDF
100% (4)
2DArtist 2017 136 April PDF
137 pages
POLAR - Cutting in Practice
100% (2)
POLAR - Cutting in Practice
24 pages
NOTES ON IPC (RA No. 8293) - LAW On PATENTS
100% (4)
NOTES ON IPC (RA No. 8293) - LAW On PATENTS
21 pages
ImagineFX 2017-06
100% (4)
ImagineFX 2017-06
116 pages
Prinect 2010 - What's New
No ratings yet
Prinect 2010 - What's New
24 pages
321 Fox Brochure (Muller Martini)
No ratings yet
321 Fox Brochure (Muller Martini)
9 pages
SM CX 75 Manual 1
No ratings yet
SM CX 75 Manual 1
20 pages
Software Product Description: (Version 17.00.409)
No ratings yet
Software Product Description: (Version 17.00.409)
28 pages
Universal Manual 01012010 PDF
No ratings yet
Universal Manual 01012010 PDF
42 pages
ΚΕΛΤΙΚΗ ΤΕΧΝΗ
100% (3)
ΚΕΛΤΙΚΗ ΤΕΧΝΗ
162 pages
Prinect PDF Toolbox 2019 What S New: Equipment
No ratings yet
Prinect PDF Toolbox 2019 What S New: Equipment
45 pages
Device Link Profile
0% (1)
Device Link Profile
28 pages
CTP Wp-Web
100% (1)
CTP Wp-Web
68 pages
Heidelberg SM 74 - 5 H: Curriculum Vitae of The Machine Reference Number: 20059
No ratings yet
Heidelberg SM 74 - 5 H: Curriculum Vitae of The Machine Reference Number: 20059
2 pages
Ryobi 3300MR-3300CR
No ratings yet
Ryobi 3300MR-3300CR
302 pages
Valmores v. Achacoso - G.R. 217453 - Case Digest
No ratings yet
Valmores v. Achacoso - G.R. 217453 - Case Digest
3 pages
ImagineFX 2017-04 - 146 PDF
100% (3)
ImagineFX 2017-04 - 146 PDF
116 pages
Coating Module: Service Training Mechanik
No ratings yet
Coating Module: Service Training Mechanik
28 pages
The Versatile.: Speedmaster CD 102
No ratings yet
The Versatile.: Speedmaster CD 102
8 pages
ImagineFX 2018 156 January
100% (6)
ImagineFX 2018 156 January
116 pages
Prinect Signa Station - Install en
No ratings yet
Prinect Signa Station - Install en
41 pages
Digifold Pro Operators Manual
No ratings yet
Digifold Pro Operators Manual
61 pages
2DArtist - February 2017
100% (6)
2DArtist - February 2017
139 pages
Scavenger Hunt Lesson Plan
No ratings yet
Scavenger Hunt Lesson Plan
3 pages
Stitchmaster ST 100
No ratings yet
Stitchmaster ST 100
18 pages
ImagineFX 2017-03 - 145 PDF
100% (6)
ImagineFX 2017-03 - 145 PDF
116 pages
ImagineFX October 2017
100% (7)
ImagineFX October 2017
116 pages
1050 Series Brochure
No ratings yet
1050 Series Brochure
11 pages
Aircon Heat Load Calculation Sheet: Project Name: Latihan Address: Pancoran
No ratings yet
Aircon Heat Load Calculation Sheet: Project Name: Latihan Address: Pancoran
21 pages
Speedmaster XL 75 Product Information
No ratings yet
Speedmaster XL 75 Product Information
20 pages
Table of Back Muscles RW
100% (1)
Table of Back Muscles RW
3 pages
Heidelberg Flyer
No ratings yet
Heidelberg Flyer
66 pages
Color Toolbox - Usr - Guid - Us
No ratings yet
Color Toolbox - Usr - Guid - Us
574 pages
نماذج الاضواء انجليزي اولى اعدادي الترم الثاني 2024 بالاجابات
No ratings yet
نماذج الاضواء انجليزي اولى اعدادي الترم الثاني 2024 بالاجابات
44 pages
Hologravure
From Everand
Hologravure
Jachin Wang
No ratings yet
Prepress Manual
From Everand
Prepress Manual
Bhaskaran Krishnan
No ratings yet
BUYAMIA-Investment Round 12-September 2023 Indonesia Updated
No ratings yet
BUYAMIA-Investment Round 12-September 2023 Indonesia Updated
23 pages
2DArtist Issue 086 Feb2013 PDF
No ratings yet
2DArtist Issue 086 Feb2013 PDF
88 pages
ImagineFX September 2016
100% (7)
ImagineFX September 2016
116 pages
Periodic Classification NEET ALLEN
No ratings yet
Periodic Classification NEET ALLEN
49 pages
Midterm GE 2 Ethics Week 11 Module 9
No ratings yet
Midterm GE 2 Ethics Week 11 Module 9
7 pages
Output Devices Supported by Xitron: 2 2 2 2 Made in The Usa
No ratings yet
Output Devices Supported by Xitron: 2 2 2 2 Made in The Usa
2 pages
Module 2 Notes
No ratings yet
Module 2 Notes
41 pages
1a4a Pretty Deadly #9
No ratings yet
1a4a Pretty Deadly #9
1 page
1a4a Octoberfaction #7 - B
No ratings yet
1a4a Octoberfaction #7 - B
1 page
12 Accountancy
No ratings yet
12 Accountancy
4 pages
Stellaris Cheats
No ratings yet
Stellaris Cheats
6 pages
San Diego YouGotPosted Lawsuit: Motion To DIsmiss: Plaintiff's Supplemental Evidence
No ratings yet
San Diego YouGotPosted Lawsuit: Motion To DIsmiss: Plaintiff's Supplemental Evidence
42 pages
Level 7 Hfle
No ratings yet
Level 7 Hfle
21 pages
Docu85238 - Data Domain Boost For OpenStorage 3.4.1.1 Release Notes
No ratings yet
Docu85238 - Data Domain Boost For OpenStorage 3.4.1.1 Release Notes
8 pages
History Modern: Andhra
No ratings yet
History Modern: Andhra
221 pages
Timothy F Resume
No ratings yet
Timothy F Resume
4 pages
Model Test 133
No ratings yet
Model Test 133
16 pages
VSB5 Draft Public Comment
No ratings yet
VSB5 Draft Public Comment
27 pages
Survey On Life Skills - Google Forms
No ratings yet
Survey On Life Skills - Google Forms
21 pages
Complexity Theory - Chapter 1 - Introduction
No ratings yet
Complexity Theory - Chapter 1 - Introduction
14 pages
Unit - II Architectural Framework For IoT Systems
No ratings yet
Unit - II Architectural Framework For IoT Systems
13 pages
TR - 1 - Science Curriculum Analysis - Learning Journal - Siti Hanifah Nasution
No ratings yet
TR - 1 - Science Curriculum Analysis - Learning Journal - Siti Hanifah Nasution
3 pages
Influence of Apparatus Geometry and Deposition Conditions On The Structure and Topography of Thick Sputtered Coatings
No ratings yet
Influence of Apparatus Geometry and Deposition Conditions On The Structure and Topography of Thick Sputtered Coatings
6 pages
2025 1 B
No ratings yet
2025 1 B
7 pages
Present Simple
No ratings yet
Present Simple
4 pages
Rivers and Tributaries and National Parks of Peninsular India
No ratings yet
Rivers and Tributaries and National Parks of Peninsular India
1 page
2DArtist January 2017 PDF
No ratings yet
2DArtist January 2017 PDF
146 pages
ImagineFX - Christmas 2015
100% (5)
ImagineFX - Christmas 2015
116 pages
1a4a Lady Mechanika #3 - B
No ratings yet
1a4a Lady Mechanika #3 - B
1 page
1a4a LADY MECHANIKA #3 - A.indd A Medida V 2/6/18 2:11 PM
No ratings yet
1a4a LADY MECHANIKA #3 - A.indd A Medida V 2/6/18 2:11 PM
1 page